Hi-vision-avius-operation.pdf

Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner HI VISION Avius Operation

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Special Notes to Operators and Maintenance Managers ★ Before using this system, be sure to thoroughly read this manual and make yourself familiar with this system. ★ After reading this manual, keep it in an easily accessible place close to the system.

Tokyo, Japan

Q1E-EA1203-3

Copyright © Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2009, 2010.

All rights reserved.

This manual describes how to operate the HI VISION Avius Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner. The main purpose of describing equipment operation is to ensure the safe and correct use of the equipment.

Conventions used in this manual: Alphanumeric keyboard (option) keys and dialog box buttons are shown in bold letters. Examples:

: Del key,

: OK button

Symbols used in this manual: This symbol indicates an immediate danger that could result in death or serious injury of personnel, total destruction of equipment, or fire if the warning is ignored and the equipment is handled incorrectly. This symbol indicates a potential (latent) danger that could result in death or serious injury of personnel, total destruction of equipment, or fire if the warning is ignored and the equipment is handled incorrectly. The following is an example of a potential danger: (Ex.) Failure to observe this warning could result in death if the cover is opened and a high-voltage terminal is touched. This symbol indicates possible danger that could result in light or moderate injury of personnel, partial equipment damage, or deletion of computer data if the warning is ignored and the equipment is handled incorrectly. This symbol indicates prohibited conditions or actions. The description accompanying this symbol indicates conditions or actions that are prohibited. This symbol indicates precautions to be observed. The description accompanying this symbol indicates conditions that require careful attention or that might be dangerous. This symbol indicates a recommended procedure, condition, or action that requires careful attention when operating the equipment.

This symbol indicates supplementary information.

Cautions on exportation: When exporting this equipment, be sure to check the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law and the regulations related to export control in the United States of America, and perform the necessary procedures. Contact Hitachi or an authorized representative if you have further inquiries.

Revision history: First edition: October 2009 Second edition: November 2009 Third edition: February 2010

Introduction Thank you for purchasing Hitachi's HI VISION Avius ultrasound diagnostic scanner. To use this equipment safely and correctly, and to maintain normal performance for a long period, it is essential to have a full understanding of its functions, operation, and maintenance. Read this instruction manual thoroughly before using this equipment.

About the ultrasound diagnostic scanner windows Note that the ultrasound diagnostic scanner windows reffered to in this instruction manual might differ from the windows actually displayed.

Caution The HI VISION Avius ultrasound diagnostic scanner and the probes that can be connected are designed to conform to the IEC60601-2-37. This equipment sends ultrasonic waves into the body of the patient during an examination to provide the operator with extensive real-time information. Before using the equipment, be sure to read the sections indicated below in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation and in this instruction manual to ensusre that you correctly monitor and control the real-time acoustic output indices displayed on the HI VISION Avius.

Sections related to safe operation ƒ

The section Precautions regarding ultrasound output in the chapter Outline of HI VISION Avius in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation

ƒ

The section Controlling ultrasound output in the chapter Operation Procedures in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation

ƒ

3.16 Applying the ALARA principle in B mode

ƒ

4.11 Applying the ALARA principle in M mode

ƒ

5.13 Applying the ALARA principle in CFM mode

ƒ

5.14 Applying the ALARA principle in CFM mode when used together with the M and PW modes

ƒ

6.16 Applying the ALARA principle in PW mode

ƒ

6.17 Applying the ALARA principle in CW mode

Q1E-EA1203

i

About the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation The separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation, provided together with this manual, contains important notes on safely using the equipment, an overview of the equipment, and preliminary procedures required before the equipment is actually used, such as how to connect probes, turn on the power, and enter patient information. Before you read this instruction manual, make sure that you read the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation. The separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation also lists the principal messages that are displayed in windows. Refer to the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation as necessary for the messages.

ii

Q1E-EA1203

Contents Introduction................................................................................................................................................i Caution ..........................................................................................................................................................i About the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation......................................... ii Contents .................................................................................................................................................. iii

Chapter 1 - Configuration of the Examination Window....... 1 1.1 Configuration of the Examination window..........................................................................................1 1.1.1 System information display area .........................................................................................................1 1.1.2 Examination information display area.................................................................................................2 1.1.3 Base area..............................................................................................................................................4 1.1.4 Cine memory playback bar..................................................................................................................4 1.1.5 Screen buttons .....................................................................................................................................5 1.1.6 Tab menus............................................................................................................................................5 1.2 Comparison window ...........................................................................................................................6 1.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................6 1.2.2 Toolbars for operating the Comparison window..................................................................................6 1.2.3 Position of the Comparison window display .......................................................................................7 1.2.4 Images displayed in the Comparison window .....................................................................................7 1.2.5 Opening the Comparison window .......................................................................................................9 1.2.6 Closing the Comparison window.......................................................................................................10

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner ....................................................................11 2.1 Using the keyboard panel ................................................................................................................11 2.2 On-screen keyboard.........................................................................................................................12 2.3 Functions assigned to the trackball..................................................................................................13 2.4 Screen buttons .................................................................................................................................15 Q1E-EA1203

iii

2.4.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................... 15 2.4.2 Types of screen buttons..................................................................................................................... 15 2.4.3 Operating the screen buttons............................................................................................................. 18 2.4.4 Menu list ........................................................................................................................................... 19 2.4.5 Operation when freeze mode is deactivated...................................................................................... 21 2.5 Using tab menus.............................................................................................................................. 22 2.6 Using the pointer ............................................................................................................................. 24

Chapter 3 - B Mode ...........................................................25 3.1 Displaying B-mode images.............................................................................................................. 25 3.2 Adjusting the gain ............................................................................................................................ 26 3.2.1 Adjusting the sensitivity (brightness) of an entire image .................................................................. 26 3.2.2 Adjusting the sensitivity (brightness) of an image for a specific depth (all modes).......................... 27 3.3 Changing the focus position (for all modes) .................................................................................... 27 3.4 Changing the transmission frequency ............................................................................................. 28 3.5 Dynamic Tissue Harmonic Imaging (dTHI) function ............................................................................. 29 3.6 HI Com function............................................................................................................................... 30 3.7 Oblique B-mode image function (for linear probes only)................................................................. 30 3.8 Changing display depth ................................................................................................................... 31 3.9 PAN Zoom function.......................................................................................................................... 32 3.10 HI zoom function............................................................................................................................ 33 3.11 Dual display for B-mode images.................................................................................................... 35 3.12 Automatic gain adjustment function............................................................................................... 35 3.13 PSS function.................................................................................................................................. 35 3.13.1 Outline of PSS function .................................................................................................................. 35 3.13.2 Selecting presets ............................................................................................................................. 36 3.13.3 Registering presets.......................................................................................................................... 36 3.14 Mode-specific screen buttons........................................................................................................ 37 3.15 Image adjustment screen buttons ................................................................................................. 43 3.16 Applying the ALARA principle in B mode....................................................................................... 50

iv

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 4 - M Mode .......................................................... 51 4.1 Displaying M-mode images..............................................................................................................51 4.2 Optional Displaying omni-directional M (ODM)-mode images.........................................................53 4.2.1 Overview of omni-directional M (ODM) mode ................................................................................53 4.2.2 Displaying real-time ODM-mode images..........................................................................................53 4.2.3 Rotating and moving the ODM cursor ..............................................................................................54 4.2.4 Displaying single-directional/dual-directional ODM-mode images ..................................................54 4.2.5 Controlling the center of the ODM cursors in bi-directional ODM mode.........................................55 4.2.6 Using the cine memory to create ODM-mode images.......................................................................56 4.3 Adjusting the gain.............................................................................................................................57 4.4 Changing the display for M-mode images .......................................................................................57 4.5 Changing the display depth..............................................................................................................58 4.6 Changing the focus position.............................................................................................................58 4.7 Changing the sweep speed..............................................................................................................58 4.8 PSS function.....................................................................................................................................59 4.9 Mode-specific screen buttons ..........................................................................................................59 4.10 Image adjustment screen buttons ..................................................................................................64 4.11 Applying the ALARA principle in M mode .......................................................................................68

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode ..................................................... 69 5.1 Displaying CFM-mode images .........................................................................................................69 5.1.1 CFI-mode images ..............................................................................................................................69 5.1.2 Fine Flow-mode images and CFA-mode images...............................................................................69 5.2 Specifying the CFM ROI range ........................................................................................................70 5.2.1 Moving the CFM ROI .......................................................................................................................70 5.2.2 Specifying the CFM ROI range.........................................................................................................70 5.3 Adjusting the gain.............................................................................................................................71 5.4 Changing the focus position.............................................................................................................71 5.5 Changing the reference frequency...................................................................................................72 Q1E-EA1203

v

5.6 Velocity range (PRF) ....................................................................................................................... 72 5.7 Baseline........................................................................................................................................... 73 5.8 Oblique function (for linear probes only) ......................................................................................... 73 5.9 Zoom functions ................................................................................................................................ 74 5.9.1 HI zoom function (when the angle of the CFM ROI is less than 180 degrees)................................. 74 5.9.2 HI zoom function (when the angle of the CFM ROI is 180 degrees or greater) ............................... 75 5.10 CFM filter ....................................................................................................................................... 77 5.11 Mode-specific screen buttons........................................................................................................ 77 5.12 Image adjustment screen buttons ................................................................................................. 82 5.13 Applying the ALARA principle in CFM mode ................................................................................. 89 5.14 Applying the ALARA principle in CFM mode when used together with the M and PW modes............................................................................................................................................. 90

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode .................................................91 6.1 Displaying PW-mode images .......................................................................................................... 91 6.2 Displaying CW-mode images .......................................................................................................... 94 6.3 Displaying Single Element CW-mode images................................................................................. 95 6.3.1 Connecting probes ............................................................................................................................ 95 6.3.2 Starting Single Element CW mode ................................................................................................... 95 6.3.3 Notes on operations in Single Element CW mode............................................................................ 95 6.4 Adjusting the gain ............................................................................................................................ 96 6.5 Adjusting the incident angle............................................................................................................. 96 6.6 Other adjustments ........................................................................................................................... 97 6.7 Changing the reference frequency .................................................................................................. 98 6.8 Adjusting the baseline...................................................................................................................... 98 6.9 Velocity range (PRF) ....................................................................................................................... 99 6.10 Oblique function (for linear probes only) ....................................................................................... 99 6.11 Changing sample width ............................................................................................................... 100 6.12 Wall filter ...................................................................................................................................... 100 6.13 Automatic adjustments ................................................................................................................ 100

vi

Q1E-EA1203

6.14 Mode-specific screen buttons ......................................................................................................101 6.15 Image adjustment screen buttons ................................................................................................105 6.16 Applying the ALARA principle in PW mode ..................................................................................109 6.17 Applying the ALARA principle in CW mode..................................................................................110

Chapter 7 - TDI Mode ...................................................... 111 7.1 Basic features of TDI mode............................................................................................................ 111 7.2 Selecting TDI submode .................................................................................................................. 111 7.2.1 Doppler cursor in TDI-PW submode...............................................................................................112 7.3 Blend function.................................................................................................................................112 7.4 Other operations.............................................................................................................................112

Chapter 8 - Cine Memory Function..................................113 8.1 About cine memory ........................................................................................................................113 8.2 Recording images ..........................................................................................................................113 8.2.1 Recording images in the cine memory ............................................................................................113 8.2.2 Number of recorded images.............................................................................................................113 8.3 Changing the cine memory split ratio.............................................................................................114 8.3.1 If the cine memory has not been divided.........................................................................................114 8.3.2 Recording two B-mode images in two parts of the cine memory....................................................114 8.3.3 Recording B- and M/Doppler-mode images in two parts of the cine memory ................................115 8.4 Changing the time display range for M mode and Doppler mode .................................................116 8.5 Continuous playback mode for normal images and playback mode for automatically detected heartbeats ......................................................................................................................116 8.6 Playing images ...............................................................................................................................117 8.6.1 Continuous playback .......................................................................................................................117 8.6.2 Advancing and rewinding frame by frame ......................................................................................117 8.6.3 Displaying image numbers ..............................................................................................................119 8.6.4 Using gain encoders to play images frame by frame .......................................................................119

Q1E-EA1203

vii

Chapter 9 - Optional Physiological Signal Display Function .................................................................121 9.1 Connecting cables ......................................................................................................................... 121 9.1.1 Connecting cables to the main unit ................................................................................................. 121 9.1.2 Keeping the ECG clip ..................................................................................................................... 122 9.1.3 Attaching the ECG lead cable to the body ...................................................................................... 122 9.1.4 Selecting a connector for inputting the physiological signal waveforms........................................ 123 9.2 Displaying physiological signal waveforms ................................................................................... 123 9.3 Adjusting the position (height) of the displayed waveform ............................................................ 124 9.4 Changing the sweep speed........................................................................................................... 125 9.5 Adjusting the waveform amplitude................................................................................................. 125 9.6 Vertically reversing waveforms...................................................................................................... 125 9.7 Automatically adjusting the ECG gain ........................................................................................... 126 9.8 Adjusting filters .............................................................................................................................. 126

Chapter 10 - Needle Guide Line......................................127 Chapter 11 - 360° Radial Display Mode ..........................131 11.1 360° radial display ....................................................................................................................... 131 11.2 Special operations in 360° radial display mode........................................................................... 132 11.2.1 Changing the display width of B-mode images (360°/180°) ........................................................ 132 11.2.2 Rotating and reversing images ...................................................................................................... 132 11.2.3 Starting M mode or PW mode in 360° display mode.................................................................... 133 11.2.4 Zoom function............................................................................................................................... 134

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks ............................................................135 12.1 Entering comments and annotations........................................................................................... 135 12.1.1 Using the keyboard to directly enter comments............................................................................ 137

viii

Q1E-EA1203

12.1.2 Entering annotations ......................................................................................................................138 12.1.3 Entering arrows .............................................................................................................................138 12.1.4 Using screen buttons to change settings ........................................................................................139 12.1.5 Deleting comments ........................................................................................................................141 12.1.6 Ending entry of comments.............................................................................................................141 12.1.7 Types of annotations ......................................................................................................................142 12.2 Entering body marks ....................................................................................................................155 12.2.1 Displaying body marks ..................................................................................................................155 12.2.2 Using the Body mark key to display body marks ..........................................................................155 12.2.3 Moving and rotating probe marks..................................................................................................156 12.2.4 Selecting the body mark subject to operation during dual display in B mode...............................157 12.2.5 Displaying the label UP in body marks .........................................................................................157 12.2.6 Manipulating probe marks for a radial scan ..................................................................................157 12.2.7 Using screen buttons to change settings ........................................................................................158

Chapter 13 - Tab menus ................................................. 161 13.1 Tool tab menu...............................................................................................................................162 13.1.1 Manual...........................................................................................................................................162 13.1.2 Edit Patient ....................................................................................................................................162 13.1.3 Mode Adjust ..................................................................................................................................162 13.1.4 Media.............................................................................................................................................163 13.1.5 Remove Hardware .........................................................................................................................167 13.1.6 Simplified Transfer ........................................................................................................................167 13.1.7 Filing .............................................................................................................................................168 13.1.8 Cine Memory.................................................................................................................................168 13.1.9 Display...........................................................................................................................................169 13.1.10 Physiology ...................................................................................................................................170 13.1.11 Video/ORIG .................................................................................................................................170 13.2 Setup tab menu ............................................................................................................................171 13.2.1 System ...........................................................................................................................................172 Q1E-EA1203

ix

13.2.2 Application.................................................................................................................................... 179 13.2.3 Region Data Setting ...................................................................................................................... 179 13.2.4 Measure......................................................................................................................................... 197 13.2.5 Filing............................................................................................................................................. 197 13.2.6 REC Key/Foot SW........................................................................................................................ 197 13.2.7 Recorder........................................................................................................................................ 200 13.2.8 Auto Freeze ................................................................................................................................... 203 13.2.9 Comp. Window (Left, Right) ........................................................................................................ 203 13.2.10 Screen Button.............................................................................................................................. 204 13.2.11 Color Map ................................................................................................................................... 205 13.2.12 Biopsy Guide .............................................................................................................................. 206 13.2.13 Annotation................................................................................................................................... 206 13.2.14 Body Mark .................................................................................................................................. 208 13.2.15 Data Backup................................................................................................................................ 209 13.2.16 Entry Option ............................................................................................................................... 210

Chapter 14 - Application Function ................................... 211 14.1 Editing an application ...................................................................................................................211 14.2 Application Data Setting window ................................................................................................. 214 14.2.1 General item tabbed pages ............................................................................................................ 215 14.2.2 B item tabbed page ....................................................................................................................... 220 14.2.3 M item tabbed page....................................................................................................................... 222 14.2.4 D item tabbed pages...................................................................................................................... 223 14.2.5 CFM item tabbed pages ................................................................................................................ 228 14.2.6 TDI item tabbed pages .................................................................................................................. 235 14.2.7 Measurement item tabbed pages ................................................................................................... 237 14.2.8 Body Mark item tabbed pages ...................................................................................................... 241 14.3 Edit PSS window ......................................................................................................................... 243 14.3.1 B page ........................................................................................................................................... 244 14.3.2 M page .......................................................................................................................................... 245

x

Q1E-EA1203

14.3.3 Display page ..................................................................................................................................246 14.4 Preset Copy window ....................................................................................................................247 14.5 Application Export / Import window ..............................................................................................249

Chapter 15 - Filing Function............................................ 251 15.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................251 15.1.1 Overview of the filing function .....................................................................................................251 15.1.2 Notes on using data........................................................................................................................251 15.1.3 Notes on using the Filing function.................................................................................................252 15.1.4 Basic operations.............................................................................................................................253 15.2 Settings in the Set Up Filing window............................................................................................254 15.2.1 Common ........................................................................................................................................254 15.2.2 Recording Single Image ................................................................................................................259 15.2.3 Recording Multi Image..................................................................................................................260 15.2.4 Measurement Filing.......................................................................................................................263 15.2.5 Specifying the retrieval interval.....................................................................................................264 15.3 Saving examination data..............................................................................................................265 15.4 Filing window................................................................................................................................267 15.4.1 Operations in the Filing window ...................................................................................................267 15.4.2 Viewing data ..................................................................................................................................274 15.4.3 Using files......................................................................................................................................280 15.4.4 Printing an image...........................................................................................................................285 15.4.5 Displaying patient information ......................................................................................................285 15.4.6 Burning a data disc ........................................................................................................................289 15.4.7 Transfer spool ................................................................................................................................292 15.5 Review window.............................................................................................................................293 15.5.1 Filing function screen buttons .......................................................................................................294 15.5.2 Functions in the review bar area ....................................................................................................298 15.5.3 Performing measurements on review images ................................................................................298 15.5.4 Registering the modes of review images .......................................................................................303 Q1E-EA1203

xi

15.5.5 Mode adjust function .................................................................................................................... 308 15.5.6 Entering comments on the review image ...................................................................................... 308 15.5.7 Reading measurement results automatically................................................................................. 308 15.5.8 Other functions ............................................................................................................................. 309 15.6 Editing image data....................................................................................................................... 310 15.6.1 Merge folder ................................................................................................................................. 310 15.6.2 Saving data.................................................................................................................................... 310 15.6.3 Deleting data ................................................................................................................................. 310 15.6.4 Example of editing........................................................................................................................ 310 15.6.5 Display after operation completed ................................................................................................ 310 15.7 Collectively transferring images ...................................................................................................311 15.7.1 Setting ............................................................................................................................................311 15.7.2 Transfer ..........................................................................................................................................311 15.8 Saving examination data to external media .................................................................................311 15.8.1 Folder configuration ......................................................................................................................311 15.9 Image compression ratio ............................................................................................................. 312

Chapter 16 - Image Print Function ..................................313 16.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................... 313 16.1.1 Overview of the printing image function ...................................................................................... 313 16.1.2 Notes on using this function ......................................................................................................... 313 16.2 Preparing a PC printer................................................................................................................. 314 16.3 Printer settings............................................................................................................................. 315 16.3.1 PC printer...................................................................................................................................... 315 16.3.2 Printing images ............................................................................................................................. 316 16.3.3 Other setting items ........................................................................................................................ 317 16.4 Printing images............................................................................................................................ 317 16.4.1 Printing using the REC key........................................................................................................... 317 16.4.2 Printing images by using the Filing window................................................................................. 318 16.5 Print preview................................................................................................................................ 319

xii

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 17 - Optional DVD Video Recorder ................... 321 17.1 Remotely controlling DVD video recorder....................................................................................321 17.2 Recording images to DVD video recorder ...................................................................................321 17.3 Switching to the DVD video recorder's playback mode ...............................................................323 17.4 Using a DVD video recorder's video playback mode...................................................................324 17.4.1 Menu functions ..............................................................................................................................325 17.4.2 Title list functions ..........................................................................................................................327 17.5 Measurement of played back images ..........................................................................................328

INDEX ............................................................................. 329

Q1E-EA1203

xiii

xiv

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 1 - Configuration of the Examination Window

Chapter 1 - Configuration of the Examination Window 1.1 Configuration of the Examination window Figure 1.1-1 shows the equipment's Examination window. See 1.1.3.

Examination information display area

See 1.1.6. Tab menus

Base area

See 1.1.2.

See 1.1.4. See 1.1.5.

Cine memory playback bar Screen buttons System information display area See 1.1.1.

Figure 1.1-1 Configuration of the Examination window

1.1.1 System information display area ······························································ (1) (2) (3) (4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

Figure 1.1-2 System information display area components

Table 1.1-1 Description of the system information display area components No. (1)

Description Indicates whether the equipment is connected to the network. (When an optional network interface unit is not installed, it is not displayed.)

(2)

Indicates whether a printer is connected.

(3)

Indicates the printer type (color or black and white), print layout, and number of films.

Q1E-EA1203

1

Chapter 1 - Configuration of the Examination Window

No.

Description

(4)

Indicates the wait status for batch transfer.

(5)

Each bar indicates whether the corresponding drive is connected, whether media is inserted, and the approximate amount of space being used. Note that the amount of space being used is indicated even if read-only media is inserted.

(6)

Indicates the status of data transfer of the filing function.

(7)

PSS on the keyboard panel. Indicates the parameter assigned to PSS encoder encoder

(8)

Multi on the keyboard panel. Indicates the function assigned to Multi encoder encoder

(9)

Indicates the function assigned to the trackball. For details about switching the functions assigned to the trackball, see 2.3 Functions assigned to the trackball.

(10)

This symbol appears when the optional alphanumeric keyboard is not installed. To display the on-screen keyboard, click this symbol.

(11)

Indicates the current date and time.

1.1.2 Examination information display area······················································· You can use this area to view an outline of the images stored using the filing function for the current patient registered in the Patient Information window. Normally, stored images are shown in reduced size. If you move the pointer to an image (Figure 1.1-3 (a)), the image is enclosed in a yellow frame. In this state, pressing the ENTER key displays the image as a thumbnail (Figure 1.1-3 (b)). ENTER

When the Close button ² is selected, stored images are displayed in reduced size.

2

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 1 - Configuration of the Examination Window

(2)

(1) ¯

Placing the pointer over a reduced image and pressing the ENTER key ( ) displays the image as a thumbnail (see (b)).

Current

(3)

Past

¯ Current

Hard Disk

Past

Hard Disk

(5) Date 2008/12/18

(4)

2008/12/18 2008/12/18 2008/12/18

(6)

(5)

(7) (8) (9) (a) Reduced display

(b) Thumbnail display

(c) Detailed display

Figure 1.1-3 Examination information display area components

Table 1.1-2 Description of the examination information display area components No.

Name

(1)

Close button

Displays the stored image shown as a thumbnail in reduced size.

(2)

Reference image

Click the Current button to display the images for the current examination.

buttons

Click the Past button to display the images for a past examination.

Media button

Use this button to specify the source (drive) of the images to be read.

(3)

Description

Select the Filter by current application check box to display only the stored images captured by using the current application.

DICOM images cannot be filtered by application.

Q1E-EA1203

3

Chapter 1 - Configuration of the Examination Window

No. (4)

Name

Description

Thumbnail image

The read image appears. Move the pointer over a thumbnail image and then press the UNDO key

UNDO

to enlarge the image. Move the pointer over a thumbnail image and then dobule-click the ENTER key

ENTER

to open the Comparison window.

For details about the Comparison window, see 1.2 Comparison window. (5)

Up/down icon

Use these buttons to scroll upward or downward through a displayed image by one image at a time.

(6)

Scroll bar

Drag the scroll bar to scroll the displayed image.

(7)

Delete image icon

Click this icon to delete the selected image. To select an image for deletion, place the pointer over the target thumbnail image and then press the ENTER key

(8)

Display thumbnail

ENTER

. The selected image is enclosed in a yellow frame.

Click this icon to display stored images as thumbnails.

icon (9)

Display details icon Click this icon to display a detailed description of a stored image.

1.1.3 Base area ································································································· This area is used mainly for the display of ultrasound images. With the initial settings, when you file or print an image, the image in the base area is filed or printed. However, you can change the settings of the filing function to record the entire display. For details, see [2] Record/Print area in (2) Details in 15.2.1 Common.

1.1.4 Cine memory playback bar ······································································· You can use this bar to control the playback of cine memory images. y

The cine memory playback bar does not appear if freeze mode is not activated or in the following cases: - When a moving image is being transferred in freeze mode - When frame-by-frame playback of cine memory images is not enabled - When continuous playback of cine memory is not enabled - When the Comparison window is displayed at full size

y

When the cine memory has no images, the cine memory playback bar cannot be operated.

4

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 1 - Configuration of the Examination Window

No.57/57 (1)

(2)

(3) (4)

(5)

(6)

Figure 1.1-4 Cine memory playback bar components Table 1.1-3 Description of the cine memory playback bar components No.

Name

(1)

Playback slider

Description Indicates the position of the cine memory images being played. You can drag the playback slider to specify the desired playback position.

(2)

First frame button

Moves the image to the first frame. If an ECG waveform is displayed, the button moves the image to the previous R wave.

(3)

Frame-by-frame

When you click this button, the pointer disappears. You can play the

playback button

cine memory images frame by frame by moving the trackball right or left. To stop frame-by-frame playback, press the POINTER key

(4)

Playback/stop button

POINTER

.

Click this button to continuously play or stop the cine memory images. Clicking the button when its shape is X continuously plays the cine memory images. During playback, the button's shape is „. Clicking the button when its shape is „ stops playback.

(5)

Last frame button

Moves the image to the last frame. If an ECG waveform is displayed, the button moves the image to the following R wave.

(6)

Status display

Indicates the number of the image in the cine memory that is being played and the playback speed.

1.1.5 Screen buttons ························································································· Use the screen buttons to specify the parameters and functions in each mode. The specifiable settings differ depending on the mode or optional function. For details about how to use the screen buttons, see 2.4 Screen buttons.

1.1.6 Tab menus································································································ Usually, the tab menus are hidden at the left of the screen, and only their tabs, each marked X, are displayed. To display a tab menu, press the POINTER key

POINTER

to display the pointer, and then move the

pointer over a desired tab (X). For details about the contents of the tab menus, see Chapter 13 Tab menus. For details about how to use the tab menus, see 2.5 Using tab menus.

Q1E-EA1203

5

Chapter 1 - Configuration of the Examination Window

1.2 Comparison window 1.2.1 Overview··································································································· You can compare a real-time image with an image taken in the current examination or one taken in a past examination. When you double-click a thumbnail in the examination information display area, the Comparison window appears. Comparison window

Figure 1.2-1 Display example of the Comparison window

1.2.2 Toolbars for operating the Comparison window········································ The figure below shows the toolbars for operating the Comparison window. Table 1.2-1 describes the function of each toolbar button. (1) (3) (4) (2)

(5) (6)

(7) (8)

(9)

Figure 1.2-2 Toolbar buttons for operating the Comparison window

Table 1.2-1 Description of the toolbar buttons for operating the Comparison window No.

Name

Description

(1)

Previous chapter button

Click these buttons to jump to an embedded chapter in an MPEG

(2)

Next chapter button

multi image.

(3)

Fast rewind button

Click these buttons to rewind or fast-forward an MPEG multi

(4)

Fast forward button

image. Clicking either button when the image is stopped plays the image at its original speed. Thereafter, each time you click the button used to start playback, the playback speed changes.

6

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 1 - Configuration of the Examination Window

No. (5)

Name

Description

Reduce button

Reduces the size of an image. Each time you click this button, the size of the image decreases 10%. The maximum decrease is 50% of the original size.

(6)

Enlarge button

Enlarges the size of an image. Each time you click the button, the size of the image increases 10%. The maximum increase is 200% of the original size.

(7)

Full display button

Click this button to display one full-size Comparison window.

(8)

Close button

Closes the Comparison window.

(9)

Moving image playback bar

This bar appears when moving images are played. Its operation is the same as that of the cine memory playback bar. See Figure 1.1-4 and Table 1.1-3.

1.2.3 Position of the Comparison window display ············································· (1)

B-mode single display The Comparison window appears at the position you specify by using the Setup tab menu. For details about how to specify the position, see 13.2.9 Comp. Window (Left, Right). If you press the L(U) key

L(U)

or R(D) key

R(D)

on the keyboard panel when freeze mode is

activated, the left-hand or right-hand image in the B-mode dual display appears in the window that is not the Comparison window. (2)

B-mode dual display The Comparison window appears to the left or right of the image to be compared. If you press the L(U) key

L(U)

or R(D) key

R(D)

on the keyboard panel when freeze mode is

activated, the position of the Comparison window switches from left to right or from right to left. In a dual-CFM dual display, the Comparison window appears at the position you specify by using the Setup tab menu.

1.2.4 Images displayed in the Comparison window ·········································· The image to be displayed in the Comparison window differs depending on the recorded area (see [2] Record/Print area in (2) Details in 15.2.1 Common), image format, and display mode of the stored images. When the recorded area of a stored image is the base area, and the display mode is B-mode dual display, the right or left B-mode image appears in the Comparison window based on which side the Comparison window is specified to be displayed (see Figure 1.2-3). Q1E-EA1203

7

Chapter 1 - Configuration of the Examination Window

In all other cases, the center of a stored image appears in the Comparison window (see Figure 1.2-4). You can use the trackball to move the area displayed in the Comparison window by positioning the pointer in the window, and then dragging the pointer while holding down the ENTER key The right-hand image of the stored image is displayed in the Comparison window.

Comparison window

ENTER

.

The left-hand image of the stored image is displayed in the Comparison window.

Comparison window

When the Comparison window is specified to appear on the left

When the Comparison window is specified to appear on the right

Figure 1.2-3 When the recorded area of the stored image is the base area, and the display mode is B-mode dual display The center of the stored image is displayed in the Comparison window.

Comparison window

Example: When the display mode is B-mode single display

The center of the stored image is displayed in the Comparison window.

Comparision window

Example: When the recorded area is the full screen

Figure 1.2-4 When the recorded area of the stored image is full screen, or the display mode is other than B-mode dual display

8

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 1 - Configuration of the Examination Window

1.2.5 Opening the Comparison window····························································· When you double-click a thumbnail in the examination information display area, the Comparison window opens. „ Note on opening the Comparison window while an ECG waveform is displayed ECG waveforms are displayed differently depending on the division settings of the cine memory. If you open the Comparison window with cine memory division disabled, the latest ECG waveform is hidden behind the Comparison window. If you start the Comparison window with cine memory division and B-mode dual display enabled, the latest ECG waveform is not hidden behind the Comparison window. You can therefore compare an ultrasound image with the latest ECG waveform and the image in the Comparison window. If you display the Comparison window at full display while an ECG waveform is displayed, the heartbeat is not updated. (For details about setting cine memory division, see (1) B split in 13.1.8 Cine Memory.) ƒ

Without cine memory division Comparison window

Display the Comparison window.

Latest ECG waveform

ƒ

The latest ECG waveform is hidden behind the Comparison window.

With cine memory division and B-mode dual display Comparison window

Display the Comparison window.

Latest ECG waveform of the left image

Latest ECG waveform of the right image

Latest ECG waveform of the left image Q1E-EA1203

9

Chapter 1 - Configuration of the Examination Window

If you use the trackball or the Angle encoder

ODM

, the CFM ROI, needle guide line, etc.

hidden behind the Comparison window moves. If this occurs, close the Comparison window and re-set the CFM ROI or needle guide line. „ You cannot display the Comparison window in the following cases: - In the following modes: M mode and Doppler mode - When an image is being played back by using the filing function - When the Comparison window is hidden and measurements are performed - If any of the following options are enabled: Three-Dimensional Display Unit (Real-Time), Stress Echo Software, wide view image display software, DVD video playing mode „ While the Comparison window is displayed, the CFM ROI, measurement results, and needle guide line might be hidden behind the Comparison window. „ While measurements are being performed, the L(U) key

L(U)

and R(D) key

R(D)

are

inoperable, making it impossible to switch ultrasound images from left to right or right to left. y

The images displayed in the Comparison window are for reference only. Do not use these images for diagnosis.

y

When moving images are played in the Comparison window, processing load on the equipment is great and playback could temporarily stop.

y

Do not perform measurements on an image for which the Comparison window is displayed.

y

When using another ultrasound system, do not perform measurements on an image for which the Comparison window is displayed.

1.2.6 Closing the Comparison window ······························································ When you choose the x button or change the mode, the Comparison window closes. If you are performing measurements while the Comparison window is displayed, measuring ends and the measured data is cleared when the Comparison window closes. All entered comments are also erased.

10

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner The HI VISION Avius provides six major methods of operation: z

Keyboard panel You can use the keys provided on the keyboard panel. The keyboard panel offers a basic means of operation. You can also use the optional alphanumeric keyboard to enter alphabetic characters and symbols.

z

On-screen keyboard The on-screen keyboard is a dialog box in which you can enter alphanumeric characters and symbols. The on-screen keyboard appears if the optional alphanumeric keyboard is not mounted.

z

Functions assigned to the trackball You can change the functions assigned to the trackball. Assigning functions to the trackball allows you to use the trackball for many purposes.

z

Screen buttons You can use the buttons displayed at the bottom of the screen. The screen buttons are primarily used to specify the parameters in a mode or enable special functions.

z

Tab menus The tab menus appear at the left side of the monitor screen. The tab menus are primarily used to switch applications and specify equipment settings.

z

Pointer You can operate the buttons in the Examination window by first pressing the POINTER key

POINTER

to display the pointer and then pressing the ENTER key

ENTER

.

2.1 Using the keyboard panel For details about how to use the keys on the keyboard panel, see the chapter Operation Procedures in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation.

Q1E-EA1203

11

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

2.2 On-screen keyboard If the optional alphanumeric keyboard is not installed, the HI VISION Avius displays an on-screen keyboard on the monitor where you can type alphanumeric characters and symbols to enter comments and patient names. To display the on-screen keyboard, press the keyboard symbol in the system information display area.

Press the keyboard symbol to display the on-screen keyboard.

Figure 2.2-1 To display the on-screen keyboard Clicking the button for a character you want to enter places that character in the entry field. To enter a lower-case character, press the shft button before you press a character button. For example, if you want to enter lower-case "a", press the shft button and then the A button.

Figure 2.2-2 On-screen keyboard Do not change the settings in Keyboard and Settings on the menu bar of the on-screen keyboard. Also do not press Help. If you do so, the on-screen keyboard might not be displayed correctly.

12

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

2.3 Functions assigned to the trackball The trackball priority is assigned to the suitable function based on equipment conditions. The symbol corresponding to the function is displayed in yellow in the lower corner of the screen. If more than one function that uses the trackball is running, the symbols corresponding to these functions are also displayed in yellow frame in the lower right corner of the screen. To switch the trackball priority, press the TRACK BALL key

TRACK BALL

to cycle through the functions.

A maximum of three function symbols appear. Each press of the TRACK BALL key

TRACK BALL

cycles

to the next function to the right.

Press the TRACK BALL key

to select a function.

Symbols for functions assigned to the trackball

Figure 2.3-1 Selecting a function assigned to the trackball Table 2.3-1 Functions that can be assigned to the trackball B(M) image up/down move

Pointer

Image steering

Character input

Zoom ROI setting

Image memory playback by frame

M mode beam line/ODM cursor

Image filing playback by frame

Doppler mode sample point

Filing function box cursor (for multiple-image display)

CFM-ROI setting

Filing function box cursor (for single-image display)

Q1E-EA1203

13

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

Measurement caliper

Review image angle sample point setting

Probe mark

VCR playback by frame

Pointer

y

While you are using the trackball to operate the equipment, the time display and moving image playback in the Comparison window might not be updated.

y

The probe mark function automatically terminates when you press the TRACK BALL key

TRACK BALL

one time and pass the priority to another function assigned to the

trackball. To use a terminated function again, restart it.

14

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

2.4 Screen buttons 2.4.1 Overview ·································································································· Screen buttons appear on the screen. You can use the screen buttons to specify the functions and mode-specific parameters that are not available on the keyboard panel. The screen buttons are displayed in the lower part of the screen. You can also enable a screen button by pressing the POINTER key

POINTER

to display the pointer, moving the pointer to the screen

button, and then pressing the ENTER key

ENTER

. Furthermore, you can use the screen button keys

on the keyboard panel to operate the screen buttons.

2.4.2 Types of screen buttons ··········································································· There are five types of screen buttons.

(1) On/Off

(2) Execution

(3) Menu

(4) Cyclic

(5) Encoder

Figure 2.4-1 Types of screen buttons

(1)

On/Off Each time you choose an On/Off type screen button, the function assigned to the screen button is enabled (on) or disabled (off). If the function is enabled, the button is displayed in bright yellow.

Off

On (yellow)

Figure 2.4-2 On/Off screen button When a screen button that has multiple parameters, such as the Focus Setting screen button and the Display Setting screen button

, is pressed, the set of

displayed screen buttons changes to another set that allows you to choose related functions. To return to the original menu, press the button used to launch the second set of screen buttons.

Q1E-EA1203

15

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

Focus Set.

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

# Focus Step

# Focus Width

Focus Set.

Choose

Focus Set.

.

More screen buttons related to focus settings appear. again to return to the original Choose the Focus Setting screen button Focus Set. menu.

Figure 2.4-3 Using a screen button that has multiple parameters

(2)

Execution When you choose an execution type screen button, the function assigned to that button is executed.

(3)

Menu When you choose a menu type screen button, the set of displayed screen buttons changes to another set that offers options for the screen button you chose. You can choose the function you want to execute from the second set of screen buttons. ・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

γ-Curve;

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

Choose

γ-Curve;／

.

γ-Curve;

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

Choose a curve in the displayed options.

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

γ-Curve;

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

・・・・・・・

Selection is completed.

Figure 2.4-4 Using a menu type screen button

16

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

(4)

Cyclic Each time you choose a screen button that cycles, a different function appears in turn. Plane;Ｔ

Plane;L

Figure 2.4-5 Using a screen button that cycles In this manual, the letter appearing on this type of screen button to indicate the selected function (;T and ;L in the above figure) is displayed as ;#.

(5)

Encoder Multi When you press an encoder type screen button, you can use the Multi encoder encoder on the

keyboard panel, the Up screen button

or the Down screen button

Up

Down

to

adjust the screen button's function. Prev. Page

Next Page

75 B-Dyn

75

Choose

Prev. Page

▲ Up

75 B-Dyn

▼ Down

75 B-Dyn

.

Next Page

75

The Up screen button and the Down screen button are displayed next to the selected button. A blue frame is displayed in surroundings of the selected button, the Up screen button, and the Down screen button.

Prev. Page

▲ Up

55 B-Dyn

▼ Down

75 B-Dyn

is selected and the Multi encoder is set to allow the B dynamic range to be changed.

Next Page

55

▲ Up

▼ Down

Use the Up screen button or the Down screen button to adjust the value.

Use the Multi encoder to adjust the value.

Figure 2.4-6 Using an encoder type screen button

Q1E-EA1203

17

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

Unavailable screen buttons are displayed dimmed. Multi , then the Up screen button Use the Multi encoderencoder

button

Down

and the Down screen

Up

automatically disappear.

The Up screen button

and the Down screen button

Up

automatically when leaving it without touching the Up screen button Down screen button

disappear

Down Up

and the

for about seven seconds.

Down

2.4.3 Operating the screen buttons ··································································· (1)

Using the pointer When you move the pointer over a screen button that you want to use, a yellow frame encloses the screen button. In this state, press the ENTER key

ENTER

to execute the screen button's function.

Figure 2.4-7 Screen button in a yellow frame (2)

Using the screen button keys You can use the screen button keys on the keyboard panel to operate the screen buttons displayed at the bottom of the window. The correspondence between screen buttons and screen button keys is shown in the following figure. When you press a screen button key, the screen button with the same number is executed. [screen button keys] (1) (3) (5)

(2)

(4)

[screen button] (1) (3)

(2)

(4)

(6)

(7)

(9)

(11)

(13)

(15)

(8)

(10)

(12)

(14)

(16)

(5)

(7)

(9)

(11)

(13)

(15)

(6)

(8)

(10)

(12)

(14)

(16)

Figure 2.4-8 Correspondence between screen button keys and screen buttons

18

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

2.4.4 Menu list ··································································································· A maximum of 16 screen buttons can be displayed in two rows of eight buttons each. These buttons can be grouped as follows. Table 2.4-1 Menu list Screen button category Mode-specific

Description Mode-specific screen buttons appear as the factory default. The set of screen buttons that are displayed are used to manipulate the main image according to the mode. The Body Mark, Measurement, and User Define screen buttons can be chosen from this set of screen buttons. For B mode

Example:

Focus Step, Invert L/R, PW Cursor display

For M mode

Example:

ODM, Split, Split Ratio

For CFM mode

Example:

Dual CFM, To Fine Flow, To CFA

For Doppler mode

Example:

Simultaneous, Flow Invert

The screen buttons that are displayed are determined by the combination of modes. Image adjustment

This set of screen buttons appears when you press the Image Menu key Image Menu

on the keyboard panel.

The set of screen buttons that are displayed is used mainly to adjust the quality of the main image according to the mode. For B mode

Example:

Density, B-Dynamic Range, B-Gray Map, HI REZ+

For M mode

Example:

Density, M-Dynamic Range, M-Gray Map

For CFM mode

Example:

Density, Color Map, Artifact Suppression

For Doppler mode

Example:

Density, FFT-γ, Resolution

The screen buttons that are displayed are determined by the combination of modes. You can use the Prev. Page screen button screen button

and Next Page

on the sides to page through the menu.

Q1E-EA1203

19

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

Screen button category Body mark

Description This set of screen buttons indicating selections of body marks appears when .

you press the Body Mark mode-specific menu screen button Use body mark screen buttons to select or move a body mark. For details, see 12.2 Entering body marks. Measurement

This set of screen buttons indicating available measurement items appears when you press the Measurement mode-specific screen button . Use the screen buttons in this category to initiate measurements. For details, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Measurement.

Filing

This set of screen buttons appears when you press the READ key

READ

.

Use the screen buttons in this category to perform filing-related operations. For details, see Chapter 15 - Filing Function. Option

This set of screen buttons is available for the operation of functions and devices, such as the Stress Echo Software. When you start an optional function or when you press the Menu mode-specific screen button while optional function is executed, the corresponding screen buttons are displayed. For details, see the description of each optional device.

User-defined

When you click the User Define mode-specific menu screen button , user-defined options appear. The screen buttons registered by users appear. For details about how to register user-defined screen buttons, see 13.2.10 Screen Button.

Comment and annotation

This set of screen buttons appears when you enter a comment or annotation. For details, see 12.1 Entering comments and annotations.

Physiological signal

This set of screen buttons appears when you press the PHYSIO key

PHYSIO

.

Use these screen buttons to adjust physiological signals. For details, see 9.2 Displaying physiological signal waveforms. Video playback

This set of screen buttons appears when you play back a DVD. These screen buttons function as the controls for the DVD recorder. For details, see Chapter 17 - Optional DVD Video Recorder.

20

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

2.4.5 Operation when freeze mode is deactivated ············································ When you deactivate freeze mode while a body mark menu or a measurement menu is displayed, the displayed screen buttons automatically change. (1)

When a body mark menu is displayed When a body mark menu is displayed while freeze mode is activated and then you deactivate freeze mode, the body mark menu automatically changes to a mode-specific menu (menu of options).

(2)

When a measurement menu is displayed When a measurement menu is displayed while freeze mode is activated and then you deactivate freeze mode, the measurement menu automatically changes to a mode-specific menu (menu of options). However, if measurements continue after freeze mode is deactivated, the measurement menu continues to be displayed.

Q1E-EA1203

21

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

2.5 Using tab menus Use the tab menus to switch applications, perform measurements, activate annotations, and specify equipment parameters. Normally, the tab menus are hidden at the left of the screen, and only the tabs, each marked X, are displayed. If you press the POINTER key

POINTER

to display the pointer and then move the pointer over a

desired tab (X), the group name of each tab menu is displayed on its tab. If you then press the ENTER key

ENTER

, the tab menu are displayed.

Tool

Tool

a

Move the pointer.

Moving the pointer over a tab displays the group names.

Application

Application

a Tabs

Adult Abdomen Kidney Gynecology Obstetrics

Annotation

Annotation

Measure

a

Measure

a

Setup

Setup

a

Press the ENTER to display key the contents of the tab menu. ENTER

Figure 2.5-1 Displaying a tab menu Next, use the pointer to choose an item on the menu. The item you choose is displayed in a gray box (Figure 2.5-2 (a)). To choose another tab menu, choose its tab (Figure 2.5-2(b)). If the pointer is moved outside the tab menu area for a few seconds or if the pointer is hidden, the tab menu automatically closes and the group name reverts to X (Figure 2.5-2(c)).

22

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

Application

Adult Abdomen Kidney Gynecology Obstetrics

Tool Measure

(a) The menu item you choose is displayed in a gray box. (b) Choosing another tab displays that tab menu.

Annotation Setup

(c) Moving the pointer outside the tab menu area closes the menu and collapses the area so that group names revert to f at the left of the screen.

Figure 2.5-2 Using tab menus To ensure that a tab menu is always displayed, use the pointer to choose the pin icon in the upper right corner of the tab menu. Choosing the pin icon pins the menu in place. Adult Abdomen Kidney Gynecology Obstetrics

Setup

Setup

Annotation

Setup

Annotation

Measure

Annotation

Measure

Measure

The tab menu continues to be displayed even though the pointer is moved outside the tab menu area.

Tool

Tool

Tool

Pin the menu.

The menu is pinned

Application

Adult Abdomen Kidney Gynecology Obstetrics

Application

Application

Adult Abdomen Kidney Gynecology Obstetrics

Figure 2.5-3 Pinning a tab menu

Q1E-EA1203

23

Chapter 2 - How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

2.6 Using the pointer Pressing the POINTER key

POINTER

displays the pointer. You can then press the ENTER key

ENTER

to

operate the Examination window buttons. The equipment records the last position of the pointer in the Examination window. If you press the POINTER key

POINTER

when the pointer is not displayed, the pointer appears in the Examination

window at its last displayed position. If a menu window or a message window appears while the pointer is hidden, the pointer also appears. In this case, however, when you close the menu window or the message window, the equipment does not record the position of the pointer in the menu window or the message window. Instead, the equipment records the last position of the pointer in the Examination window.

To return the displayed pointer to the center of the screen, press the UNDO key

24

Q1E-EA1203

UNDO

twice.

Chapter 3 - B Mode

Chapter 3 - B Mode 3.1 Displaying B-mode images Pressing the B mode selection key

B

(center of the knob) while freeze mode is not activated

displays a B-mode image in black and white. Pressing the B mode selection key

while M mode, Doppler mode, CFI mode ,etc. is set turns

B

these modes off. Age, sex, and BSA (when the application name is other than Obstetric) (Age and DGA when the application name is Obstetric. Example: ) Hospital name

Manufacturer's logo

Examiner name

Patient Name Patient ID

Application name

Date

Time

Ultrasound output level Mechanical Index

Orientation mark Gray scale

Display scale

Body mark

Measurement result display area Frame rate

Probe name

B gain

B dynamic range

Frequency range

Transmission frequency

Figure 3.1-1 a B-mode image and the main parameters display The display setting of Frequency range is set up on Basic Setting section of the System Settings window that is displayed by choosing the Setup tab and then System on the tab Menu (See 13.2.1 System).

Q1E-EA1203

25

Chapter 3 - B Mode

3.2 Adjusting the gain 3.2.1 Adjusting the sensitivity (brightness) of an entire image··························· You can use the Gain encoder

B

(rim of the knob) to adjust the gain of the entire B-mode image

whether the freeze function is on or off. To brighten the entire image, turn the knob clockwise. To darken the entire image, turn the knob counterclockwise. Brighter B

Darker

Figure 3.2-1 Adjusting B gain If you turn the Gain encoder

clockwise while the freeze function is on, Δ appears in the

B

display area for B gain and the entire image becomes brighter. If you turn the encoder counterclockwise, ∇ appears and the entire image becomes darker. BG:5Δ : Indicates that the Gain encoder has been turned clockwise while the freeze function is on. BG:5∇ : Indicates that the Gain encoder has been turned counterclockwise while the freeze function is on. When you activate the automatic gain adjustment function, the gain is automatically adjusted to the optimum value. If the automatic gain adjustment function is activated, the B gain value is highlighted. BG:5 : Indicates that the automatic gain adjustment function is activated. The B gain adjustment function and the cine memory image playback function are assigned to the Gain encoder

B

(rim of the knob). In freeze mode, the function

switches from one to the other each time you press the B mode selection key

B

(center of the knob). You can use the Region Data Setting window to specify the default function assigned to the Gain encoder Data Setting.)

26

Q1E-EA1203

B

. (See (2) Operation page of the General item in 13.2.3 Region

Chapter 3 - B Mode

3.2.2 Adjusting the sensitivity (brightness) of an image for a specific depth (all modes) ··································································································· Use the depth gain sliders to adjust the gain of a specific depth. To brighten the area at the respective depth, move a slider to the right. To darken the area at the respective depth, move a slider to the left. Shallow area

Brighter

Darker

Deep area

Figure 3.2-2 Adjusting gain for a specific depth When you press the HI-Support key

HISupport

to start the automatic gain adjustment function, the gain

of each specific depth is automatically optimized. While the automatic gain adjustment function is activated, the positions of the sliders do not match the actual gain of the specific depths. To stop the automatic gain adjustment function, click the HI Support Reset screen button .

3.3 Changing the focus position (for all modes) Use the FOCUS toggle switch FOCUS to change the focus position. Position of focus

Shallower

FOCUS

Deeper

Figure 3.3-1 Changing the focus depth

Q1E-EA1203

27

Chapter 3 - B Mode

You can specify from 1 to 4 focus steps. You can also change the interval between focus steps. For details about how to change the number of focus steps, see (15) in 3.14 Mode-specific screen buttons.

3.4 Changing the transmission frequency Use the REF FREQ toggle switch REF FREQ to change the depth sensitivity and axial resolution of the target image. The transmission frequency you can select differs depending on the selected probe and the dTHI function. Figure 3.4-1 shows an example of operation when the dTHI function is turned off. Moving the toggle switch down selects low frequency, enabling images with superior penetration (depth sensitivity) to be obtained. Moving the toggle switch up selects high frequency, enabling images with superior axial resolution to be obtained. For details about how to change the frequency while the dTHI function is selected, see 3.5 Dynamic Tissue Harmonic Imaging (dTHI) function. High frequency

REF FREQ

Low frequency

Figure 3.4-1 Selecting a transmission frequency The transmission frequency to be selected also changes depending on whether the contrast imaging function (optional) is executed.

28

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 3 - B Mode

3.5 Dynamic Tissue Harmonic Imaging (dTHI) function When you click the dTHI mode-specific screen button

, a dTHI image appears.

The dTHI function produces B-mode images with fewer artifacts by visualizing tissue harmonic signals. You can select a method for visualizing tissue harmonic signals from three options: the filter method, the Wideband Pulse Inversion (WPI) method, and high-definition dynamic tissue harmonic imaging (HdTHI). Filter method

z

Allows you to obtain dTHI images without decreasing the frame rate. WPI method

z

Allows you to obtain dTHI images with higher resolution than that provided by the filter method. HdTHI

z

Allows you to obtain dTHI images with even higher resolution and excellent depth sensitivity. When you use the REF FREQ toggle switch REF FREQ while the dTHI function is enabled, several processing modes can be switched. HdTHI-R: HdTHI high resolution mode UP HdTHI-P: HdTHI deep scan mode

dTHI-W-R: WPI method high resolution mode REF FREQ

dTHI-W-P:

WPI method deep scan mode

dTHI-R: Filter method high resolution mode DOWN dTHI-P: Filter method deep scan mode

Figure 3.5-1 Changing the frequency when the dTHI function is enabled 1. The number of frequencies you can select depends on the probe. This function is not available for some probes. 2. When dTHI-W-P, dTHI-W-R, HdTHI-P, or HdTHI-R is selected, only 1 or 2 can be selected as the number of focus steps.

Q1E-EA1203

29

Chapter 3 - B Mode

3.6 HI Com function The HI Com function superimposes an image constructed from ultrasound signals at a certain angle on a different image. The HI Com function enables the display of images with high spatial resolution, wide dynamic range, and high contrast resolution. To start the Hi Com function, click the HI Com mode-specific screen button

.

If the HI Com function is enabled, you can switch to the steering HI Com function, which superimposes only the images taken at the angle selected with the OBLIQUE toggle switch OBLIQUE . If the steering HI Com function is selected, an arrow is displayed under the orientation mark (Figure 3.6-1). Ultrasound beams are steered to the left Ultrasound beams are steered to the right Figure 3.6-1 Indication for the steering HI Com function If the HI Com function is enabled, you can use the Compound image adjustment screen button to change the number of images to be superimposed. 1. This function is available only for some probes. 2. If a biopsy guide line is displayed, you cannot steer the ultrasound beams to the insertion direction of the puncture needle. If you steer the ultrasound beams to the insertion direction of the puncture needle and then display a biopsy guide line, steering is turned off. 3. If you are using a linear probe, you cannot switch to the steering HI Com function while a Doppler cursor or CFM ROI is displayed.

3.7 Oblique B-mode image function (for linear probes only) If you are using a linear probe, you can tilt the ultrasound beams to create a B-mode image. This function enables you to direct the ultrasound beams almost perpendicular to the region of interest to enhance visibility. To tilt the B-mode image to the right, move the OBLIQUE toggle switch OBLIQUE to the right. To tilt the image to the left, move the toggle switch to the left.

30

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 3 - B Mode

OBLIQUE

B-mode image

Figure 3.7-1 Using the oblique B-mode image function 1. If a needle guide line is displayed, you cannot set the angle of the oblique B-mode image function to the same angle as the needle guide line. If you display a needle guide line when the angle of the oblique B-mode image function is set to the same angle as the needle guide line, the oblique B-mode image function is turned off. 2. The oblique B-mode image function is not available when you select the function for combining images in B-mode dual display. 3. The HI Zoom function is not available when oblique B-mode image function is executed.

3.8 Changing display depth Use the DEPTH(MAG.) encoder

DEPTH(MAG.)

to change the display depth.

Shallower display depth

DEPTH (MAG.)

Deeper display depth

Figure 3.8-1 Changing display depth The display depth range differs depending on the probe.

Q1E-EA1203

31

Chapter 3 - B Mode

3.9 PAN Zoom function Use the PAN Zoom function to enlarge a desired area in a B-mode image. Press the PAN Zoom key.

Panning and zooming are enabled.

Use the DEPTH(MAG.) encoder to change the magnification.

DEPTH (MAG.)

Use the trackball to change the area to be enlarged.

Trackball

Figure 3.9-1 Using the PAN Zoom function

32

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 3 - B Mode

3.10 HI zoom function Use the HI zoom function to enlarge a desired area in a B-mode image. Compared to the PAN Zoom function, the HI zoom function helps to display enlarged views with finer scan line density, improved frame rate, and higher definition. Press the HI Zoom key Zoom ROI

HI Zoom

to display the zoom

ROI on the target image.

Use the trackball to move the zoom ROI. For a sector probe or convex probe, when you move the zoom ROI upward, the width decreases. When Trackball

you move the zoom ROI downward, the width increases.

Press the ENTER key

ENTER

to display z at the

lower right corner of the zoom ROI. ENTER

The z mark indicates the position of the trackball. When you turn the trackball, the zoom ROI becomes larger or smaller horizontally and vertically. Trackball

Q1E-EA1203

33

Chapter 3 - B Mode

When you press the ENTER key

ENTER

again or

leave the trackball untouched for about five seconds, the z mark disappears and you can move

ENTER

the zoom ROI again.

After you determine the region of interest, press the UPDATE (NEXT) key

UPDATE (NEXT)

to display an

enlarged view of the area enclosed by the zoom ROI. You can also press the DEPTH(MAG.) encoder

DEPTH(MAG.)

to display the enlarged view.

When you turn the DEPTH(MAG.) encoder DEPTH(MAG.)

clockwise, the magnification of the image

increases.

When

you

turn

the

encoder

counterclockwise, the magnification of the image Trackball

decreases. Note that you cannot decrease the magnification lower to exceed the size of the enlarged view set in the ROI frame. After the magnification of the image is increased, you can use the trackball to move the image horizontally and vertically. When you press the HI Zoom key

HI Zoom

again, the

HI zoom function ends.

Figure 3.10-1 Using the HI zoom function y

Pressing the UNDO key

UNDO

while an enlarged view is displayed returns to the

step for setting up the zoom ROI. y

When the display width of a B-mode image is greater than 180°, the maximum width of the zoom ROI is 180°.

34

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 3 - B Mode

3.11 Dual display for B-mode images Press the DUAL/SINGLE key

DUAL SINGLE

to display a real-time image in one window and a frozen

image in the other window in B mode. Realtime Frozen image image

Real-time image

Figure 3.11-1 Switching between single display and dual display You can use the L(U) key

L(U)

and R(D) key

R(D)

to select the window that displays the real-time

image.

Real- Frozen time image image

Frozen Realtime image image

Figure 3.11-2 Pressing the L(U) key and R(D) key during dual display When you press the DUAL/SINGLE key the L(U) key

L(U)

or R(D) key

Realtime image

R(D)

DUAL SINGLE

again, the display becomes a single display. Use

to select the window you want to display.

Realtime image

Figure 3.11-3 Pressing the L(U) key and R(D) key during single display

3.12 Automatic gain adjustment function Use the HI-Support key

HISupport

to automatically adjust B gain and depth-dependent gain to

optimize the quality of the displayed image.

3.13 PSS function 3.13.1 Outline of PSS function ·········································································· The PSS(Patient Scanning Selector) function allows you to register values for a maximum of eight image quality adjustment parameters per application for B-mode images and M-mode images. You can call and specify the preset values during an examination.

Q1E-EA1203

35

Chapter 3 - B Mode

3.13.2 Selecting presets ···················································································· When you turn the PSS encoder

PSS encoder

, different combinations of preset values for image quality

adjustment parameters are sequentially called. Select the preset you want. The name of each preset appears at the bottom of the screen.

PresetA PSS

Preset name

Figure 3.13-1 Peset name display

3.13.3 Registering presets················································································· For details about the types of image quality adjustment parameters whose preset values you can select using the PSS encoder

PSS encoder

and how to register the preset values, see 14.3 Edit PSS

window and 14.4 Preset Copy window. PSS You can also register presets by pressing the PSS encoder encoder during an examination.

When you press the PSS encoder

PSS encoder

during an examination, the following window appears.

Press the name of an existing preset or the NEW button to display a dialog box. In the dialog box, enter the name of the new preset you want to register and register the current settings as a preset.

Figure 3.13-2 Registering a preset during an examination

36

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 3 - B Mode

3.14 Mode-specific screen buttons In B mode, the following mode-specific screen buttons appear at the bottom of the screen. If freeze mode not activated (1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) (6)

(7)

Plane;#

Body Mark

HI Com

PW Cursor

Measurement

dTHI

HI Support Reset

(8)

(9)

360°/180° Trapezoid

Focus Set.

User Define

Display Set.

Menu;#

(14)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(15)

(15)

(6)

# Focus Step

# Focus Width

Focus Set.

(18)

(17)

(19)

(16)

# Angle

Image Steering

# B-Color

Up/Down Shift

(21)

(20)

(10)

If the Focus Setting screen button is chosen

If the Display Setting screen button is chosen

Display Set.

(13)

(12)

If freeze mode activated (1)

(22)

(23)

Body Mark

Review

# Speed

Measurement

ODM

(8)

(24)

(7)

User Define

(12)

Display Set.

Menu;#

(13)

(14)

Depending on the situation, some screen buttons might not appear. Figure 3.14-1 Mode-specific screen buttons for B mode (1)

Displaying a menu of body marks: Body Mark menu screen button Use the Body Mark screen button to display the screen buttons for selecting body marks. For details, see 12.2.7 Using screen buttons to change settings.

(2)

Selecting the HI Com function: HI Com screen button Use the HI Com screen button to select the HI Com function. For details, see 3.6 HI Com function.

Q1E-EA1203

37

Chapter 3 - B Mode

(3)

Displaying the PW cursor: PW Cursor screen button Use the PW Cursor screen button to display a Doppler cursor in a B-mode image.

(4)

Switching between a vertical cross section and a horizontal cross section: Plane screen button If you are using a probe with two scan planes at the tip of the probe, use the Plane screen button to change the scan plane between vertical cross section and horizontal cross section.

Plane;#

Linear side

Convex side

Figure 3.14-2 Switching cross sections (example: EUP-U533) (5)

Switching between 360° and 180°: 360°/180° screen button If you are using a radial probe that can display 360°, use the 360°/180° screen button to change the display width of B-mode images between 360° display, lower 180° display (lower semicircle), and upper 180° display (upper semicircle).

(6)

Displaying a menu of focus steps: Focus Setting menu screen button Use the Focus Setting menu screen button to display the screen buttons for selecting the number of focus steps and the interval between focus steps. (See If the Focus Setting screen button is chosen in Figure 3.14-1 Mode-specific screen buttons for B mode.)

(7)

Displaying a menu of user-defined screen buttons: User Define menu screen button Use the User Define menu screen button to display the user-defined screen buttons. For details about how to specify user-defined screen buttons, see 13.2.10 Screen Button.

(8)

Displaying measurement screen buttons: Measurement screen button Use the Measurement screen button to display the screen buttons for performing measurements. For details, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Measurement.

(9)

Selecting the dTHI function: dTHI screen button Use the dTHI screen button to select the dTHI function. For details, see 3.5 Dynamic Tissue Harmonic Imaging (dTHI) function.

(10) Resetting the HI-Support : HI Support Reset screen button When you press the HI-Support key

HISupport

, B gain and depth-dependent gain are

automatically adjusted. Use the HI Support Reset screen button status before automatic gain adjustment was enabled.

38

Q1E-EA1203

to restore the

Chapter 3 - B Mode

(11) Selecting trapezoidal display: Trapezoid screen button If you are using a linear probe, use the Trapezoid screen button to enable display of a B-mode image in a trapezoidal shape to widen the view.

Trapezoid

OFF

ON

Figure 3.14-3 Displaying a linear probe image as a trapezoid If you enable trapezoidal display, you cannot select other functions such as view angle, oblique B-mode image, oblique, HI Com, and combining images.

(12) Inverting an image horizontally: Invert L/R screen button Use the Invert L/R screen button to display a B-mode image that is horizontally inverted.

Figure 3.14-4 Horizontally inverting a B-mode image (13) Displaying a menu of display settings: Display Setting menu screen button Use the Display Setting menu screen button to display the screen buttons for changing the parameters regarding B-mode image display, such as rotation and steering of B-mode images. (See If the Display Setting screen button is chosen in Figure 3.14-1 Mode-specific screen buttons for B mode.) (14) Switching menus: Menu screen button Use the Menu screen button to display the menus for operating optional functions, such as the Stress Echo Software. The menu that appears differs depending on the enabled option.

Q1E-EA1203

39

Chapter 3 - B Mode

(15) Changing the number of focus steps and the interval between focus steps: Focus Step screen button

/Focus Width screen button

You can change the number of focus steps to a value from 1 to 4. To change the number of focus steps, press the Focus Step screen button

and

Multi . then turn the Multi encoder encoder

To select the interval between multiple focus steps, press the Focus Width screen button and then turn the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

. By using these screen buttons and

encoder, you can display an image with focus on the region of interest. The number of focus steps you can specify differs according to the probe.

The number of steps increases. # Focus Step

Start of the operation to change the number of focus steps

Multi encoder

The number of steps decreases.

Figure 3.14-5 Changing the number of focus steps

The interval is greater.

# Focus Width

Start of the operation to change the interval between focus steps

Multi encoder

The interval is less.

Figure 3.14-6 Changing the interval between focus steps

40

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 3 - B Mode

(16) Rotating images 90°: Rotate screen button , the image rotates 90°.

Each time you press the Rotate screen button

Figure 3.14-7 Rotating an image (17) Steering images: Image Steering screen button To steer the image, press the Image Steering screen button

and then use the

trackball. If you want to return the steering position to the center, press the UNDO key

UNDO

.

Image Steering

Start of the steering operation

Trackball

Figure 3.14-8 Steering an image (18) Changing the viewing angle and the display width: Angle screen button If you are using a sector probe or convex probe, use the Angle screen button to change the viewing angle of B-mode images. If you are using a linear probe, use the Angle screen button to change the display width of B-mode images. To change the viewing angle or the display width, press the Angle screen button Multi . and then turn the Multi encoder encoder

View angle: 6 The angle widens. # Angle

Start of the operation to change the viewing angle

View angle: 1 Multi encoder

The angle narrows.

Figure 3.14-9 Changing the viewing angle of an image

Q1E-EA1203

41

Chapter 3 - B Mode

(19) Inverting images vertically: Invert U/L screen button Use the Invert U/L screen button to vertically invert a B-mode image.

Figure 3.14-10 Vertically inverting a B-mode image (20) Moving the view vertically: Up/Down Shift screen button To move the view to a greater or lesser depth, press the Up/Down Shift screen button and then use the trackball. To return to the original view depth, press the UNDO key

UNDO

. When you do this, the view

returns to the position set for the respective application. Deeper view Trackball Up/Down Shift

Start of the operation to move the view vertically

Shallower view

Figure 3.14-11 Vertically moving the view of an image (21) Selecting colors for B-mode images: B-Color screen button By using the color function, you can differentiate among subtler levels of brightness not possible in a black-and-white-display. To change the colors of the B-mode image and Gray scale(see Figure 3.1-1), including black and white, press the B-Color screen button

and then turn the Multi

Multi . encoder encoder

You can select different color settings for each of the B, M, and Doppler modes. (22) Selecting continuous playback: Review screen button Use the Review screen button to continuously play cine memory. For details, see 8.6 Playing images. (23) Changing the speed of continuous playback: Speed screen button Use the Speed screen button to select the speed at which cine memory is to be played. For details, see 8.6 Playing images. (24) Selecting ODM: ODM screen button Use the ODM screen button to start the cine memory ODM-mode. For details, see 4.2.6 Using the cine memory to create ODM-mode images.

42

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 3 - B Mode

3.15 Image adjustment screen buttons In B mode, the following screen buttons appear for adjusting images. and the Next

Use the top right and left screen buttons (the Prev. Page screen button ) to page through the menus.

Page screen button First page Prev. Page

Next Page

# B-Dyn

# PDC

# B-AGC

# Persistence

# Density

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

# γ

# Center

# Rejection

# Saturation

Texture;#

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

# B-Color

# Angle

# R-Filter

(17)

(18)

(19)

# B-Gray Map

HI REZ+

# B-Enhance # HI REZ+

(1)

(2)

(3) (4)

Second page Prev. Page

Next Page

Control;#

γ-Curve;#

(10)

Third page Prev. Page

Next Page

Compound;#

# BW-PRF

DGC Curve

DGC;#

Steering Mark

(20)

(21)

(22)

(23)

(24)

Depending on the situation, some screen buttons might not appear. Figure 3.15-1 Image adjustment screen buttons for B mode (1)

Changing the B dynamic range: B-Dynamic Range screen button To change the dynamic range for B-mode images, press the B-Dynamic Range screen button

Multi . When the dynamic range changes, and then turn the Multi encoder encoder

the tone of the images also changes. 90 dB: Image with fine gradation

# B-Dyn

Start of the operation Multi encoder to change the B dynamic range 45 dB: Image with clear contrast

Figure 3.15-2 Changing the B dynamic range

Q1E-EA1203

43

Chapter 3 - B Mode

(2)

Changing the B gray map: B-Gray Map screen button To change the gray map of B-mode images, press the B-Gray Map screen button Multi . Select a map for the gradation you want and then turn the Multi encoder encoder

from eight gray maps. (3)

Selecting the HI REZ+ function: HI REZ+ screen button Use the HI REZ+ screen button to turn the HI REZ+ adapting imaging function on or off. The HI REZ+ function changes the filter characteristics depending on the input signals.

(4)

Changing the level of B enhancement: B-Enhance screen button Use the B-Enhance screen button to change the level of enhancement for the contours of images if the HI REZ+ function is not selected. To change the level of enhancement for B-mode images, press the B-Enhance screen Multi . and then turn the Multi encoder encoder

button

4: Strong enhancement of contours # B-Enhance

Start of the operation to change the B enhancement level

Multi encoder

1: Weak enhancement of contours

Figure 3.15-3 Changing the level of B enhancement (5)

Changing the level of HI REZ+: HI REZ+ level screen button Use the HI REZ+ level screen button to change the level of enhancement for the contours of images if the HI REZ+ function is selected. To change the HI REZ+ level, press the HI REZ+ level screen button

and then

Multi . turn the Multi encoder encoder

4: Strong HI REZ+ level # HI REZ+

Start of the operation Multi encoder to change the HI 1: Weak HI REZ+ level REZ+ level

Figure 3.15-4 Changing the HI REZ+ level (6)

Changing PDC(Patient Dependent Compensation): PDC screen button The values of the acoustic parameters of patients, such as fat, muscle, and organs, differ for each patient. You can use PDC to change the values of the acoustic parameters specified for the equipment to acquire optimum images. To change the PDC level, press the PDC screen button Multi . encoder encoder

44

Q1E-EA1203

and then turn the Multi

Chapter 3 - B Mode

29 # PDC

14 Start of the operation to change the PDC level

1

Multi encoder

Figure 3.15-5 Changing the PDC level (7)

Changing B-AGC: B-AGC screen button To change the automatic gain control (AGC) value of B-mode images, press the B-AGC Multi . Use the B-AGC screen and then turn the Multi encoder encoder

screen button

button to suppress the excessive echo level of images to enable the observation of areas that tend to be highly bright. 3： High automatic gain control level # B-AGC

1： Low automatic gain control level Start of the operation to change B-AGC 0: Automatic gain control is turned off.

Multi encoder

Figure 3.15-6 Changing the AGC value (8)

Changing persistence: Persistence screen button The persistence function calculates the correlation between the frames of an image to provide smoother, softer images. To change the persistence, press the Persistence screen button

and then turn

Multi . the Multi encoder encoder

7: High level # Persistence

Start of the operation to change persistence

1: Low level 0: Persistence processing is turned off.

Multi encoder

Figure 3.15-7 Changing the persistence value (9)

Changing scan line density: Density screen button To change the number of scan lines in a B-mode image, press the Density screen button Multi . and then turn the Multi encoder encoder

ƒ

High density mode In this mode, you can acquire high-definition images with double scan lines. However, the frame rate is low.

ƒ

High frame rate mode In this mode, images are scanned at a high frame rate, which is suitable for moving parts. Although the frame rate is high, the scan line density is low. Q1E-EA1203

45

Chapter 3 - B Mode

4: High density mode # Density

Start of the operation to change the scan line density

Multi encoder

1: High frame rate mode

Figure 3.15-8 Changing the scan line density (10) Selecting the image whose gamma curve is to be adjusted: Control screen button Use the Control screen button to adjust the gamma curve for B mode, M mode, and Doppler mode. for B

To change the gamma curve for B mode, press the Control screen button mode. (11) Selecting a gamma curve: γ-Curve screen button

You can select one of four basic gamma curve types. Press the screen button for the desired gamma curve. The gamma curve you select appears on the screen.

Figure 3.15-9 Types of gamma curves (12) Changing the gamma coefficient:γ screen button To change the gamma coefficient, press the γ screen button Multi . Multi encoder encoder γ= small

γ= large

γ= large γ= small γ= large

γ= small

Figure 3.15-10 Changing the gamma coefficient

46

Q1E-EA1203

and then turn the

Chapter 3 - B Mode

(13) Changing the center of the S curve: Center screen button Use the Center screen button to change the center of the S curve that you select. and then

To change the center of the S curve, press the Center screen button Multi . turn the Multi encoder encoder

Figure 3.15-11 Changing the center of an S curve (14) Changing the rejection range: Rejection screen button Use the Rejection screen button to adjust the gradation steps from which low level echoes are to be eliminated. and then turn

To change the rejection range, press the Rejection screen button Multi . the Multi encoder encoder

256 gradation steps

Output signal

Rejection range

Input signal

Figure 3.15-12 Changing the rejection range (15) Changing the saturation range: Saturation screen button Use the Saturation screen button to adjust the gradation steps for which high level echoes are to be saturated to the maximum brightness. To change the saturation range, press the Saturation screen button

and then

Multi . turn the Multi encoder encoder

256 gradation steps Output signal

Saturation range

Input signal

Figure 3.15-13 Changing the saturation range

Q1E-EA1203

47

Chapter 3 - B Mode

(16) Changing the texture: Texture screen button Use the Texture screen button to change the texture for B-mode images. The texture changes each time you click the Texture screen button

.

(17) Selecting the B color function: B-Color screen button To change the B color settings, press the B-Color screen button

and then turn

Multi . the Multi encoder encoder

(18) Changing the view angle and display width: Angle screen button To change the view angle or the display width, press the Angle screen button Multi . and then turn the Multi encoder encoder

(19) Changing the receiving filter: R-Filter screen button To change the receiving filter, so you can adjust the image quality, press the R-Filter screen button

Multi . and then turn the Multi encoder encoder

A: High resolution mode B: Standard mode C: Depth scan mode (20) Changing the number of superimposed images for the HI Com function: Compound screen button Use the Compound screen button to change the number of images to be superimposed if the HI Com function is used. For details, see 3.6 HI Com function. (21) Changing the transmission frequency: BW-PRF screen button To change the transmission frequency of ultrasound waves, press the BW-PRF screen button

Multi . and then turn the Multi encoder encoder

If you select a low frequency, you can acquire images with superior penetration. If you select a high frequency, you can acquire images with superior axial resolution. (22) Selecting whether to show the depth-dependent gain curve: DGC Curve screen button Use the DGC Curve screen button to display, on the right side of the screen, a range of depth-dependent gain values that you have set with the depth gain sliders. ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・

Depth-dependent gain curve

Figure 3.15-14 Displaying a depth-dependent gain curve

48

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 3 - B Mode

When the automatic gain adjustment function starts, the displayed depth-dependent gain and depth-dependent gain curve become flat. Also note that while the automatic gain adjustment function is enabled, the depth-dependent gain and depth-dependent gain curve are displayed based on the flat status they acquired when the automatic gain adjustment function started.

(23) Changing the assignment of depth gain sliders: DGC screen button Use the DGC screen button to choose whether to fix the assignment of the depth gain sliders to depth or to the window. If you choose Fixed, the assignment of the depth gain sliders is fixed to depth, and the control depth of each slider is fixed to a certain depth level. In this case, the gain for each depth level does not change when the display depth changes. If you choose Variable, the assignment of the slider is fixed to the window, and the depth level for the entire image is divided equally among the sliders. In this case, the gain for each depth level changes when the display depth changes. (24) Selecting whether to show the steering mark: Steering Mark screen button If you are using a convex probe for a wide view, you can use the Steering Mark screen button to display the steering mark that shows the relationship between the displayed image and the scan area. If you select the Display ON check box, the steering mark appears in the the window.

Steering Mark In B-mode single display

In B-mode dual display

Figure 3.15-15 Displaying the steering mark

Q1E-EA1203

49

Chapter 3 - B Mode

3.16 Applying the ALARA principle in B mode When you press the B mode selection key

B

while the FREEZE key is switched off, a window

for B mode appears. This window contains the label MI and the value of the MI (mechanical index). (For details about the format of the window for B mode, see 3.1 Displaying B-mode images. For details about the possible bio-effects indicated by the MI, see the subsection Acoustic output indices in the chapter Operation Procedures in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation.) In consideration of the ALARA principle, ultrasound output should be controlled and set to the minimum level required to create the images that are usually created under normal circumstances. In addition, the length of time a patient is exposed to ultrasound energy should be kept at a minimum by using the FREEZE key. An exception occurs, however, when the image data needs to be collected for specific purposes.

50

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 4 - M Mode

Chapter 4 - M Mode The HI VISION Avius offers two types of M mode: normal M mode and omni-directional M mode. In omni-directional M mode, an M-mode image is displayed along a desired line in a B-mode image.

4.1 Displaying M-mode images To start M mode, press the M mode selection key

M

(center of the knob) while freeze mode

is not activated. A B-mode image with the M cursor (Figure 4.1-1) or a B/M-mode image (Figure 4.1-2) appears. Specify the initial type of display you want by using the application function. For details about how to specify the initial type of display by using the application function, see Cursor in (1) M page in 14.2.3 M item tabbed page. The M cursor is displayed.

M cursor

B mode

M mode

Figure 4.1-1 Result of pressing the M mode selection key: When single display with the M cursor is enabled M cursor

B mode

M mode

Figure 4.1-2 Result of pressing the M mode selection key: When single display with the M cursor is disabled While the M cursor is displayed in yellow, roll the trackball to specify the position of the M cursor. When the trackball symbol at the bottom of the window indicates that M mode beam line is assigned to the trackball, use the trackball to move the M cursor. To switch the functions assigned to the trackball, press the TRACK BALL key

TRACK BALL

. Q1E-EA1203

51

Chapter 4 - M Mode

When you press the UPDATE(NEXT) key Thereafter, use the UPDATE(NEXT) key

UPDATE (NEXT)

UPDATE (NEXT)

, the M-mode image is displayed in real time. to switch real-time display between the B-mode

image and the M-mode image. Whether or not the Simultaneous screen button

has been chosen determines the

type of images that are displayed in real time when the UPDATE(NEXT) key

When

UPDATE (NEXT)

is pressed.

Real time

Frozen

Frozen

Real time

B mode

M mode

B mode

M mode

Real time

Real time

Frozen

Real time

B mode

M mode

B mode

M mode

Simult.

not chosen

When

Simult.

chosen

Figure 4.1-3 Using the UPDATE(NEXT) key to select the image to be displayed in real time The parameters for an M-mode image appear in the window as shown in the following figure. Thermal Index

B-mode image

M-mode image

M cursor

Gain for M mode M dynamic range

Sweep speed (Interval between scales 200ms)

Figure 4.1-4 Parameters displayed for an M-mode image Pressing the M mode selection key

52

Q1E-EA1203

M

again turns off M mode.

Chapter 4 - M Mode

4.2 Optional Displaying omni-directional M (ODM)-mode images An optional ODM software is required to use the displaying ODM-mode images.

4.2.1 Overview of omni-directional M (ODM) mode ·········································· In omni-directional M (ODM) mode, you can display an M-mode image along a desired line in a B-mode image, allowing you to measure the volume of the left ventricle more accurately. You can create and display ODM-mode images by using B-mode images in real time or by reading frozen B-mode images from the cine memory. You can display ODM-mode images for one ODM cursor or two ODM cursors. This function is available only when you are using an ODM-enabled probe. For details about ODM-enabled probes, see Applicable Probes in the section Omni-directional M mode display function in the chapter Specifications in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation.

4.2.2 Displaying real-time ODM-mode images·················································· You can create and display ODM-mode images from the B-mode images that are being scanned in real time. Pressing the ODM mode-specific screen button

when the following requirements

are satisfied starts the real-time ODM-mode. Requirements for starting the real-time ODM-mode z

An ODM-enabled probe selected

z

In B/M simultaneous real-time mode

z

Not in CFM mode

In ODM mode, the window changes as shown in the following figure. The M cursor changes to the ODM cursor (the tip of the ODM cursor is an arrow and the center of the ODM cursor is indicated by a circle).

Center Center of the ODM cursor

The center of the ODM cursor appears in the center of the ODM-mode image.

ODM cursor

Figure 4.2-1 ODM-mode window Q1E-EA1203

53

Chapter 4 - M Mode

4.2.3 Rotating and moving the ODM cursor ······················································ When you turn the Angle encoder

ODM

while the ODM cursor is displayed in yellow, the ODM

cursor rotates through a range from -90° to +90° around the center of the ODM cursor. When you press the Angle encoder

ODM

, the angle changes from 45° to 90° to -45° to 0° to 45°.

You can move the location of the ODM cursor by rolling the trackball. When the trackball priority displayed at the bottom of the window is M mode beam line

,

rolling the trackball moves the M cursor. To change the trackball priority, press the TRACK BALL key

TRACK BALL

.

4.2.4 Displaying single-directional/dual-directional ODM-mode images············ ODM mode has two settings: single-directional ODM mode, in which an ODM-mode image is displayed for one ODM cursor, and dual-directional ODM mode, in which ODM-mode images are displayed for two ODM cursors in different directions. To switch between single-directional ODM mode and bi-directional ODM mode, use the Dual ODM mode-specific screen button

.

In bi-directional ODM mode, the window is displayed as follows: ODM cursor 1:

The ODM symbol

indicates an ODM cursor, and the corresponding

ODM-mode image appears at the top. ODM cursor 2:

The ODM symbol

indicates the other ODM cursor, and the

corresponding ODM-mode image appears at the bottom.

。

ODM cursor 1

ODM cursor 2

ODM-mode image corresponding to ODM cursor 1 ・

・

ODM symbols

・

ODM-mode image corresponding to ODM cursor 2

Figure 4.2-2 Dual-directional ODM-mode image Use the Setup tab menu to show or hide ODM symbols. (See (11) ODM page of the M item in 13.2.3 Region Data Setting.)

54

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 4 - M Mode

4.2.5 Controlling the center of the ODM cursors in bi-directional ODM mode · In bi-directional ODM mode, you can select either of two options: the common center option, in which the center of two ODM cursors is the same, and the independent center option, in which each ODM cursor has an independent center. To choose an option, use the Independent mode-specific screen button While the function assigned to the trackball is ODM cursor

.

, pressing the UNDO key

UNDO

switches the ODM cursor that can be rotated and moved. The ODM cursor that can be rotated and moved is displayed in yellow. If the common center option is used: Both ODM cursors 1 and 2

ODM cursor 1 only

ODM cursor 2 only

If the independent center option is used: ODM cursor 1 only

ODM cursor 2 only

Figure 4.2-3 Using the UNDO key to select the ODM cursor that you can rotate and move

Q1E-EA1203

55

Chapter 4 - M Mode

4.2.6 Using the cine memory to create ODM-mode images······························ In freeze mode, you can call B-mode images from the cine memory to create and display ODM-mode images. To create ODM-mode images using the cine memory, press the ODM mode-specific screen button

while the following requirements are satisfied.

Requirements for creating ODM-mode images using the cine memory z

An ODM-enabled probe selected

z

Scanning is performed in B mode.

z

Scanning is not performed in CFM mode.

z

Cine memory playback is possible.

z

The scan line density is 1.

z

The number of focus steps is 1.

z

The cine memory is not divided into two parts to record B-mode images. Blank areas appear in the ODM-mode image as shown below. These areas indicate the edges of the cine memory. Do not perform measurements beyond these blank areas.

。

Blank areas

Figure 4.2-4 Blank areas in the ODM-mode image When you display ODM-mode images created by using the cine memory, the images might be blurred. This problem is due to the characteristics of LCD monitors.

56

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 4 - M Mode

4.3 Adjusting the gain Use the Gain encoder

M

(rim of the knob) to adjust the gain of an entire M-mode image. You

can adjust the gain of M-mode images regardless of whether the freeze function is on or off. In B/M mode, when you adjust depth-dependent gain, the gain of both B-mode and M-mode images is adjusted simultaneously. This allows you to adjust the gain for each specific depth (see 3.2 Adjusting the gain). Brighter

Darker

Figure 4.3-1 Adjusting the gain

4.4 Changing the display for M-mode images If you press the MULTI/SINGLE key

DUAL SINGLE

while a B/M-mode image is displayed, an M-mode

image appears in single display. If you press the MULTI/SINGLE key

DUAL SINGLE

one more time, the

B/M-mode image appears again. If you press the L(U) key

L(U)

while an M-mode image is displayed in single display, a

B-mode image appears in single display. If you then press the R(D) key

R(D)

, the M-mode image

reappears in single display.

M-mode image

M-mode image

B-mode image

Figure 4.4-1 Changing the display of an M-mode image

Q1E-EA1203

57

Chapter 4 - M Mode

4.5 Changing the display depth Use the DEPTH(MAG.) encoder to change the display depth in 5-mm steps.

Deeper

DEPTH (MAG.)

Shallower

Figure 4.5-1 Changing the display depth of an M-mode image

4.6 Changing the focus position This operation is the same as in B mode. (See 3.3 Changing the focus position (for all modes).)

4.7 Changing the sweep speed You can change the sweep speed (the length of time it takes to go from the left edge of an image to the right edge in the display area). When you move the SWEEP SPEED toggle switch down, the sweep is slower. When you move the toggle switch up, the sweep is faster. You can change the sweep speed after the image is frozen. For details, see 8.4 Changing the time display range for M mode and Doppler mode. Fast

SWEEP SPEED

Slow

Figure 4.7-1 Changing the sweep speed for M-mode images

58

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 4 - M Mode

4.8 PSS function When you turn the PSS encoder

PSS encoder

, you can select a preset from a maximum of eight

combinations of the preset values for image quality adjustment parameters that are sequentially called. For details about the parameters you can specify and how to register values for the parameters, see 3.13 PSS function.

4.9 Mode-specific screen buttons In B/M-mode, the following mode-specific screen buttons appear at the bottom of the screen by default as a menu for operating the ultrasound diagnostic scanner. If freeze mode is not activated: (1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Body Mark

Independent

M Simult.

Split;#

User Define

Measurement

ODM

Dual ODM

Split Ratio;#

Display Set.

Menu;#

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(16)

(12)

If the Display Setting menu screen button is chosen: (15)

(14)

(13)

# M-Blanking

# Angle

Image Steering

# M-Color

Up/Down Shift

(19)

(18)

Display Set.

(17)

(10)

If freeze mode is activated: (1)

(20)

(21)

(4)

(5)

Body Mark

Review

# Speed

Split;#

User Define

Measurement

Split Ratio;#

Display Set.

Menu;#

(6)

(9)

(10)

(11)

Depending on the situation, some screen buttons might not appear. Figure 4.9-1 Mode-specific screen buttons for M mode

Q1E-EA1203

59

Chapter 4 - M Mode

(1)

Displaying a menu for body marks: Body Mark menu screen button Use the Body Mark screen button to display the screen buttons for selecting body marks. For details, see 12.2.7 Using screen buttons to change settings.

(2)

Selecting how to control the center of ODM cursors for bi-directional ODM mode: Independent screen button While bi-directional ODM mode is selected, use the Independent screen button to select whether to use a common center for the two ODM cursors or to use a different center for each ODM cursor.

(3)

Selecting simultaneous real-time display: Simultaneous screen button Use the Simultaneous screen button to display both a B-mode image and an M-mode image in real time.

(4)

Changing the direction of a split screen (vertical or horizontal): Split screen button Use the Split screen button to select whether to display a B-mode image and an M-mode image on a vertically split screen or on a horizontally split screen.

Vertical split

Horizontal split

Figure 4.9-2 Types of split screen (5)

Displaying a menu of user-defined screen buttons: User Define menu screen button Use the User Define menu screen button to display the user-defined screen buttons. For details about how to specify user-defined screen buttons, see 13.2.10 Screen Button.

(6)

Displaying a menu of measurement screen buttons: Measurement screen button Use the Measurement screen button to display the screen buttons for performing measurements. For details, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Measurement.

(7)

Selecting ODM mode: ODM screen button Use the ODM screen button to start ODM mode. For details, see 4.2 Optional Displaying omni-directional M (ODM)-mode images.

60

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 4 - M Mode

(8)

Selecting uni- or bi-directional ODM mode: Dual ODM screen button While ODM mode is selected, use the Dual ODM screen button to select bi-directional ODM mode.

(9)

Changing the ratio of a horizontally split screen: Split Ratio screen button While displaying a B-mode image and an M-mode image on a horizontally split screen, use the Split Ratio screen button to change the display ratio of the B-mode and M-mode images (B-mode image: M-mode image). B

B

B

M

M

M

1:2

1:1

2:1

Figure 4.9-3 Changing the display ratio on a horizontally split screen (10) Displaying a menu of display settings: Display Setting menu screen button Use the Display Setting menu screen button to display the screen buttons for changing the parameters related to image display, such as M-Blanking and Up/Down Shift. (See If the Display Setting menu screen button is chosen in Figure 4.9-1 Mode-specific screen buttons for M mode.) (11) Switching menus: Menu screen button Use the Menu screen button to display the menus for operating optional functions, such as the Stress Echo Software. The menu that appears differs depending on the enabled option. (12) Rotating images 90°: Rotate screen button Each time you press the Rotate screen button

, the image rotates 90°.

Figure 4.9-4 Rotating an image (13) Steering images: Image Steering screen button This screen button allows you to steer B-mode images. After you press the Image Steering screen button

, you can use the trackball to steer the image. To return

the steering position to the center, press the UNDO key

UNDO

.

Q1E-EA1203

61

Chapter 4 - M Mode

(14) Changing the viewing angle and display width: Angle screen button While using a sector probe or convex probe, use the Angle screen button to change the viewing angle of B-mode images. While using a linear probe, use the Angle screen button to change the display width of B-mode images. Pressing the Angle screen button

and then turning the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

changes the viewing angle or display width. (15) Enabling or disabling blanking in M-mode images: M-Blanking screen button Use the M-Blanking screen button to create a blank area at the bottom of an M-mode image so that you can display ECG waveforms there for clearer viewing. If you press the M-Blanking screen button

, the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

on the

keyboard panel becomes available for enabling or disabling blanking in M-mode images. Turn the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

to enlarge or reduce the blank area.

Blank area

The blank area becomes larger.

# M-Blanking

Turn M blanking on.

Multi encoder The blank area becomes smaller.

Figure 4.9-5 Enabling blanking in an M-mode image (16) Vertically reversing images: Invert U/L screen button Use the Invert U/L screen button to vertically reverse the B-mode image display. (17) Horizontally reversing images: Invert L/R screen button Use the Invert L/R screen button to horizontally reverse the B-mode image display. (18) Vertically moving the view: Up/Down Shift screen button After you press the Up/Down Shift screen button

, you can use the trackball

to move the view to a deeper or shallower position. To return to the original view position, press the UNDO key respective application.

62

Q1E-EA1203

UNDO

. Pressing the key returns the view to the position set for the

Chapter 4 - M Mode

(19) Selecting colors for M-mode images: M-Color screen button Use this screen button to change the colors of M-mode images. If you press the M-Color screen button

, the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

on the keyboard panel becomes

available for selecting colors for M-mode images. Turn the encoder to change colors. (20) Selecting continuous playback: Review screen button Use the Review screen button to continuously play B-mode images when B-mode images are recorded in the cine memory. For details, see 8.6 Playing images. (21) Changing the speed of continuous playback: Speed screen button Use the Speed screen button to change the speed for continuously playing B-mode images when B-mode images are recorded in the cine memory. For details, see 8.6 Playing images.

Q1E-EA1203

63

Chapter 4 - M Mode

4.10 Image adjustment screen buttons In M mode, the following screen buttons appear as a menu for adjusting images. First page: Prev. Page

Next Page

# M-Dyn.

# M-Gray Map

# M-Enhance

# ODM-Dyn.

# ODM-Gray Map

# ODM-Enhance

(1) (6)

(2)

# M-AGC

# Density

(4)

(5)

(3)

(7)

(8)

Second page: Prev. Page

Next Page

Control;#

γ-Curve;#

# γ

# Center

# Rejection

# Saturation

Texture;#

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

Third page: Prev. Page

Next Page

# M-Color

# M-Blanking

Frame Rate;#

(16)

(17)

(18)

Depending on the situation, some screen buttons might not appear. Figure 4.10-1 Image adjustment screen buttons for M mode (1)

Changing the M dynamic range: M-Dynamic Range screen button and then turning the Multi

Pressing the M-Dynamic Range screen button encoder

Multi encoder

changes the dynamic range for M-mode images. When the dynamic range

changes, the tone of the images changes. (2)

Changing the M gray map: M-Gray Map screen button Pressing the M-Gray Map screen button Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi encoder

changes the gray map of M-mode images. Select a map of the desired gradation

from eight gray maps. (3)

Changing the level of M enhancement: M-Enhance screen button Pressing the M-Enhance screen button Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi encoder

changes the enhancement of M-mode images by allowing you to select a desired

level of enhancement for the contour of images. (4)

Changing M-AGC: M-AGC screen button Pressing the M-AGC screen button

and then turning the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

changes the automatic gain control (AGC) value of M-mode images. In this way, you can suppress the excessive echo level of images so that areas that tend to be very bright can be observed.

64

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 4 - M Mode

(5)

Changing scan line density: Density screen button and then turning the Multi encoder

Pressing the Density screen button

Multi encoder

allows you to change the number of scan lines in a B-mode image. (6)

Changing the ODM dynamic range: ODM-Dynamic Range screen button Pressing the ODM-Dynamic Range screen button Multi encoder

Multi encoder

and then turning the

changes the dynamic range for ODM-mode images. When the

dynamic range changes, the tone of the images changes. (7)

Changing the ODM gray map: ODM-Gray Map screen button Pressing the ODM-Gray Map screen button encoder

Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi

changes the gray map of ODM-mode images. Select a map of the desired

gradation from eight gray maps. (8)

Changing the level of ODM enhancement: ODM-Enhance screen button Pressing the ODM-Enhance screen button encoder

Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi

changes the enhancement of ODM-mode images by allowing you to select

the desired level of enhancement for image counters. (9)

Selecting an image whose gamma curve you want to adjust: Control screen button You can adjust the gamma curve for each of the B, M, and Doppler modes. To change the gamma curve for M mode, press the Control screen button and then choose M.

(10) Selecting a gamma curve: γ-Curve screen button You can select one of four basic types of gamma curves. Press the screen button to select a gamma curve. If you select a gamma curve, the selected gamma curve appears on the screen.

Figure 4.10-2 Types of gamma curves (11) Changing the gamma coefficient: γ screen button

(for moving the correction

area) Pressing the γ screen button

and then turning the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

allows you to change the gamma coefficient. γ = small γ = large

γ = large γ = small γ = large

γ = small

Figure 4.10-3 Changing the gamma coefficient Q1E-EA1203

65

Chapter 4 - M Mode

(12) Changing the center of the S curve: Center screen button

(center value of

the S curve) This screen button appears when an S curve is selected. Use the screen button to change the position of the center of the S curve. Pressing the Center screen button

and then turning the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

changes the center of the S curve.

Figure 4.10-4 Changing the center of an S curve (13) Changing the rejection range: Rejection screen button Use the Rejection screen button to adjust the gradation steps for eliminating low level echoes. Pressing the Rejection screen button Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi encoder

changes the rejection range.

256 gradation steps Output signal

Rejection range

Input signal

Figure 4.10-5 Changing the rejection range (14) Changing the saturation range: Saturation screen button Use the Saturation screen button to adjust the gradation steps for saturating high level echoes to the maximum brightness. Pressing the Saturation screen button Multi encoder

changes the saturation range.

256 gradation steps Output signal

Saturation range Input signal

Figure 4.10-6 Changing the saturation range

66

Q1E-EA1203

and then turning the Multi encoder

Chapter 4 - M Mode

(15) Changing the texture: Texture screen button Use the Texture screen button to change the texture for B-mode images. The texture .

changes each time you click the Texture screen button (16) Selecting colors for M-mode images: M-Color screen button

Use the M-Color screen button to change the colors of M-mode images. If you press the M-Color screen button

, the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

on the keyboard panel

becomes available for selecting colors for M-mode images. Turn the encoder to change colors. (17) Enabling or disabling blanking in M-mode images: M-Blanking screen button Pressing the M-Blanking screen button you allows to create a blank area at the bottom of an M-mode image so that you can display ECG waveforms there for clearer viewing. (18) Selecting a frame rate: Frame Rate screen button Use the Frame Rate screen button to change the frame rate for B-mode images.

Q1E-EA1203

67

Chapter 4 - M Mode

4.11 Applying the ALARA principle in M mode When you press the M mode selection key

M

, a window for B/M-mode images appears. This

window contains the thermal index (TI) for the probe you are using. (For details about the format of the window for B/M-mode images, see 4.1 Displaying M-mode images. For details about the possible bio-effects indicated by the TI, see the subsection Acoustic output indices in the chapter Operation Procedures in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation.) For probes that are not intended for transcranial scanning, the relevant indices are the TIS (Soft Tissue Thermal Index) and TIB (Bone Thermal Index). The index displayed by default is the TIS. You can choose to display the TIB by specifying the TIB from the Region Data Setting. For probes whose intended use includes transcranial scanning, the relevant indices are the TIS, TIB, and TIC(Cranial-bone Thermal Index). The index displayed by default is the TIS. You can choose to display the other indices (TIB or TIC or both) by specifying the indices from the Region Data Setting. In accordance with the ALARA principle, you should set the ultrasound output to the minimum level required to acquire images of the desired quality. In all HI VISION Avius modes, you will want to use the US POWER toggle switch directly control acoustic emission. The US POWER toggle switch

US POWER

US POWER

to

allows you to change

the output level in the range from 5% to 100% in 5% steps. With this encoder, you can adjust the ultrasound transmission level without changing other settings of the ultrasound diagnostic scanner. When you specify ultrasound output, note that the following parameters indirectly affect the TI values in M mode. Also note that the following parameters are the main ones you need to adjust to optimize B-mode images. Focus

Changing the depth of focus or ultrasound transmit aperture affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

Ultrasound output Changing the ultrasound output level affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC values. Frame rate

The frame rate changes when the viewing angle, scan line density, or display depth changes. A change in the frame rate affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

68

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode The HI VISION Avius includes three types of CFM mode: Color Flow Image (CFI) mode, which displays blood flow rate; Color Flow Angio (CFA) mode, which displays blood flow power; and Fine Flow mode, which displays blood flow power with higher definition than CFA mode.

5.1 Displaying CFM-mode images 5.1.1 CFI-mode images····················································································· When you press the CFI mode selection key

CFI

(center of the knob) while freeze mode is not

activated, a CFI-mode image appears on a B-mode or M-mode image. Pressing the CFI mode selection key

CFI

again turns CFI mode off.

Maximum flow rate detected in the forward direction in a color Doppler image in B mode

Thermal Index

Color scale

Maximum flow rate detected in the backward direction in a color Doppler image in B mode

CFM ROI

CFM gain CFM filter CFM PRF/REF

Figure 5.1-1 Parameter display about a CFI-mode image

5.1.2 Fine Flow-mode images and CFA-mode images ····································· If you press the Fine Flow/CFA mode key

Fine Flow CFA

while freeze mode is not activated, a Fine

Flow-mode image or CFA-mode image appears on a B-mode or M-mode image. In Fine Flow mode and CFA mode, power Doppler signals are also displayed, but the color map changes and the flow rate disappears. Pressing the Fine Flow/CFA mode key

Fine Flow CFA

again turns off Fine Flow mode or CFA mode.

You can use the Application Data Setting window to specify whether Fine Flow mode or CFA mode is to be applied initially when you press the Fine Flow/CFA mode key

Fine Flow CFA

. (See (1)

Operation page in 14.2.1 General item tabbed pages.) Q1E-EA1203

69

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

5.2 Specifying the CFM ROI range If the CFM ROI is displayed in yellow, you can adjust the size of the frame and the position of the CFM region of interest (ROI) in which CFM-mode images are displayed. If the CFM ROI is not displayed in yellow, press the TRACK BALL key CFM-ROI setting

TRACK BALL

to set

as the function assigned to the track ball, which is then indicated at the

bottom of the window.

5.2.1 Moving the CFM ROI ················································································ Rolling the trackball moves the CFM ROI. For sector probes and convex probes, moving the CFM ROI upward decreases the width and moving it downward increases the width.

Trackball

Figure 5.2-1 Moving the CFM ROI

5.2.2 Specifying the CFM ROI range ································································· When you press the ENTER key

ENTER

, z appears

at the lower right corner of the CFM ROI.

The z indicates the position of the trackball. When you roll the trackball, the CFM ROI frame expands or shrinks horizontally and vertically.

Trackball

70

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

When the display range is determined, press the ENTER key

ENTER

again or else do not touch the

trackball for about five seconds. The z disappears, and you can move the CFM ROI as described in 5.2.1 Moving the CFM ROI. Figure 5.2-2 Specifying the CFM ROI range

5.3 Adjusting the gain Turn the Gain encoder

CFI

to adjust the gain of the selected CFM-mode image.

Brighter

Darker

Figure 5.3-1 Adjusting gain

5.4 Changing the focus position How you can change the focus position in CFM-mode images and B-mode images differs as shown below depending on the control method (automatic or manual) selected for changing the focus position in CFM-mode images. Table 5.4-1 Specifying the focus position in CFM mode Control

Focus position in CFM-mode images

Focus position in B-mode

method Manual

images Within the CFM ROI, use the FOCUS toggle switch

FOCUS

The focus position cannot be

to change the focus position, which is indicated by a green changed. mark. Automatic

The focus position automatically changes according to the Use the FOCUS toggle switch to change the focus

position of the CFM ROI (the focus position is not

FOCUS

displayed).

position.

For details about specifying the control method (automatic or manual) for changing the focus position in CFM-mode images, see (13) CFM page of the CFM item in 13.2.3 Region Data Setting.

Q1E-EA1203

71

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

5.5 Changing the reference frequency You can select a different reference frequency (REF) for each frequency used by your probe. Moving the REF FREQ toggle switch upward selects high frequency. Moving the REF FREQ toggle switch downward selects low frequency. High frequency

REF FREQ

Low frequency

Figure 5.5-1 Selecting a reference frequency Some probes have fixed reference frequencies.

5.6 Velocity range (PRF) You can change the velocity range. Possible ranges differ according to the size of the CFM ROI. Moving the V-SCALE toggle switch upward selects high frequency, resulting in a higher maximum detection velocity. Moving the V-SCALE toggle switch downward selects low frequency, resulting in a lower maximum detection velocity. Higher maximum detection velocity V-SCALE

Lower maximum detection velocity

Figure 5.6-1 Changing the velocity range

72

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

5.7 Baseline You can adjust the baseline (line of velocity 0) of CFI-mode images vertically by using the BASELINE toggle switch

BASELINE

.

When a Doppler image is displayed, the BASELINE toggle switch adjusts the baseline of the Doppler image (see 6.8 Adjusting the baseline). Baseline (velocity 0) Baseline (velocity 0) BASELINE

Baseline (velocity 0)

Figure 5.7-1 Adjusting the baseline (when a CFI-mode image is displayed)

5.8 Oblique function (for linear probes only) If you are using a linear probe, you can tilt the ultrasound beams to create a CFM-mode image. To tilt the CFM ROI to the right, move the OBLIQUE toggle switch

OBLIQUE

to the right. To tilt

the CFM ROI to the left, move the toggle switch to the left.

CFM ROI

Figure 5.8-1 Using the oblique function

Q1E-EA1203

73

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

5.9 Zoom functions Use the PAN Zoom function and HI zoom function to enlarge a desired area in a CFM-mode image. Compared to the PAN Zoom function, the HI zoom function helps to display enlarged views with finer scan line density, improved frame rate, and higher definition. Use of the PAN Zoom function in CFM mode is the same as use of the PAN Zoom function in B mode. See 3.9 PAN Zoom function. Subsection 5.9.1 describes how to use the HI zoom function in CFM mode. If the angle of the CFM ROI is 180 degrees or greater, the method for using the HI zoom function is different (see 5.9.2).

5.9.1 HI zoom function (when the angle of the CFM ROI is less than 180 degrees)·································································································· Press the HI Zoom key

HI Zoom

.

The image within the CFM ROI is enlarged.

Use the DEPTH(MAG.) encoder change the magnification. DEPTH (MAG.)

74

Q1E-EA1203

DEPTH(MAG.)

to

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

When the function assigned to the trackball, which is indicated at the bottom of the window, is Zoom ROI setting

, you can use the trackball

to change the area to be enlarged. Trackball

Press the HI Zoom key

HI Zoom

again to end

zooming.

Figure 5.9-1 Using the HI zoom function (when the angle of the CFM ROI is less than 180 degrees)

5.9.2 HI zoom function (when the angle of the CFM ROI is 180 degrees or greater)··································································································· Press the HI Zoom key

HI Zoom

to display a

180-degree zoom ROI.

Roll the trackball to move the zoom ROI within the CFM ROI. Note that you will not be able to change the angle of the zoom ROI or the CFM ROI. Trackball

Q1E-EA1203

75

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

After you determine the region of interest, press the UPDATE(NEXT) key

UPDATE (NEXT)

to display an

enlarged view of the area enclosed in the zoom ROI. You can also display an enlarged view by pressing the DEPTH(MAG.) encoder

DEPTH(MAG.)

Use the DEPTH(MAG.) encoder

.

DEPTH(MAG.)

to

change the magnification. Note that you cannot decrease the magnification DEPTH (MAG.)

to a level lower than the magnification of the enlarged view shown in the zoom ROI.

When you have increased the magnification with the DEPTH(MAG.) encoder

DEPTH(MAG.)

, and the

function assigned to the trackball, which is indicated at the bottom of the window, is Zoom Trackball

ROI setting

, you can use the trackball to

move the image vertically and horizontally.

Press the HI Zoom key

HI Zoom

again to end

zooming.

Figure 5.9-2 Using the HI zoom function (when the angle of the CFM ROI is 180 degrees or greater)

76

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

5.10 CFM filter Use the FILTER toggle switch to change the color filter for CFM mode. H

FILTER

L

Figure 5.10-1 Changing the CFM filter

5.11 Mode-specific screen buttons In CFM mode, the following mode-specific screen buttons appear at the bottom of the screen by default for operating the ultrasound diagnostic scanner. If freeze mode is not activated: (1)

(2)

(3)

(5)

(4)

(6) (7) 360°/180°

Body Mark

Dual CFM

Measurement

To Fine Flow

Oblique Invert

PW Cursor

User Define

Plane;#

Flow Invert

Display Set.

Menu;#

(11)

(12)

(13)

To CFA

(8)

(9)

(10)

If the Display Setting menu screen button is chosen: (16)

(15)

Fixed-B

# Angle

(17)

# Color Map

Up/Down Shift

(20)

(19)

(14)

Display Set.

(18)

(12)

If freeze mode is activated: (1)

(21)

(22)

(7)

Body Mark

Review

# Speed

User Define

Measurement

Flow Invert

Display Set.

Menu;#

(8)

(11)

(12)

(13)

Depending on the situation, some screen buttons might not appear. Figure 5.11-1 Mode-specific screen buttons for CFM mode

Q1E-EA1203

77

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

(1)

Displaying a menu for body marks: Body Mark menu screen button Use the Body Mark menu screen button to display the screen buttons for selecting body marks. For details, see 12.2.7 Using screen buttons to change settings.

(2)

Selecting dual CFM mode: Dual CFM screen button Use the Dual CFM screen button to select dual CFM mode. In dual CFM mode, B-mode images appear in two windows simultaneously. In the left window, CFM mode is turned on. In the right window, CFM mode is turned off.

(3)

Changing the direction of oblique beams: Oblique Invert screen button The oblique function is enabled only when a linear probe is connected. The Oblique Invert screen button is available only when a linear probe is connected. Pressing the Oblique Invert screen button changes the direction of oblique beams from right to left or left to right. If you want to activate flow invert while oblique invert is executed, in the Region Data Setting, select When Oblique Invert is executed in Flow Invert. For details, see (12) D page of the D item in 13.2.3 Region Data Setting. ƒ

When When Oblique Invert is executed is cleared:

ƒ

When When Oblique Invert is executed is selected:

Figure 5.11-2 Changing the direction of oblique beams (4)

Displaying the PW cursor: PW Cursor screen button Use the PW Cursor screen button to display a Doppler cursor for PW mode.

(5)

Switching between vertical cross section and horizontal cross section: Plane screen button While you are using a probe with two scan planes at the tip of the probe, use the Plane screen button to change the scan plane between the vertical cross section and the horizontal cross section.

78

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

(6)

Switching between 360° and 180°: 360°/180° screen button While you are using a radial probe that can display 360°, use the 360°/180° screen button to change the display width of B-mode images between 360° display, lower 180° display (lower semicircle), and upper 180° display (upper semicircle).

(7)

Displaying a menu of user-defined screen buttons: User Define menu screen button Use the User Define menu screen button to display the user-defined screen buttons. For details about how to specify user-defined screen buttons, see 13.2.10 Screen Button.

(8)

Displaying a menu of measurement screen buttons: Measurement screen button Use the Measurement screen button to display the screen buttons for performing measurements. For details, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Measurement.

(9)

Displaying CFA-mode images: To CFA screen button Use the To CFA screen button to display CFA-mode images.

(10) Selecting Fine Flow mode: To Fine Flow screen button Use the To Fine Flow screen button to display Fine Flow-mode images. (11) Reversing the color map: Flow Invert screen button Use the Flow Invert screen button to reverse the color map. Red Blue

Blue Red

Figure 5.11-3 Reversing the color map (12) Displaying a menu of display settings: Display Setting menu screen button Use the Display Setting menu screen button to display the screen buttons for changing the parameters related to image display, such as the color map and rotation of images. (See If the Display Setting menu screen button is chosen in Figure 5.11-1 Mode-specific screen buttons for CFM mode.) (13) Switching menus: Menu screen button Use the Menu screen button to display the menus for operating optional functions, such as the Stress Echo Software. The menu that appears differs depending on the enabled option. (14) Rotating images 90°: Rotate screen button Each time you press the Rotate screen button

, the image rotates 90°. Q1E-EA1203

79

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

(15) Changing the viewing angle and display width: Angle screen button While using a sector probe or convex probe, use the Angle screen button to change the viewing angle of B-mode images. When you are using a linear probe, use the Angle screen button to change the display width of B-mode images. Pressing the Angle screen button

and then turning the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

changes the viewing angle or display width. (16) Fixing the display angle of B-mode images: Fixed-B screen button Use the Fixed-B screen button to display a B-mode image with the B-mode settings, regardless of the width of the CFM-mode image. The frame rate decreases as the B-mode image expands, but a more general view can be obtained.

Figure 5.11-4 Fixing the display angle of B-mode images (17) Vertically reversing images: Invert U/L screen button Use the Invert U/L screen button to vertically reverse the B-mode image display. (18) Horizontally reversing images: Invert L/R screen button Use the Invert L/R screen button to horizontally reverse the B-mode image display. (19) Vertically moving the view: Up/Down Shift screen button After you press the Up/Down Shift screen button

, you can use the trackball

to move the view to a deeper or shallower position. To return to the original view position, press the UNDO key

UNDO

. Pressing the key

ruturns the view to the position set for the respective application. (20) Changing the color map: Color Map screen button When you press the Color Map screen button Multi encoder

and turn the Multi encoder

, depending on the selected mode, one of the color maps is selected:

There are the following types of color maps: CFI mode

ƒ ・

Display of velocity

:

Displays the direction and velocity of blood flow.

・

・

Display of velocity and :

Displays the direction, velocity, and velocity

velocity variance

variance of blood flow.

Display of velocity variance

80

Q1E-EA1203

:

Displays the velocity variance.

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

CFA/Fine Flow mode

ƒ ・

Display of power

:

・

Display of direction and :

Displays the power of blood flow. Displays the direction and power of blood flow.

power of blood flow You can select one of the color maps voluntarily. For details, see 13.2.11 Color Map. (21) Selecting continuous playback: Review screen button Use the Review screen button to continuously play the cine memory. For details, see 8.6 Playing images. (22) Changing the speed of continuous playback: Speed screen button Use the Speed screen button to select the speed for playing the cine memory. For details, see 8.6 Playing images.

Q1E-EA1203

81

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

5.12 Image adjustment screen buttons When you start CFM mode in B mode, the following screen buttons appear for adjusting images. When you start CFM mode in M mode or Doppler mode, the following screen buttons appear. When CFM-mode images are displayed together with M-mode images, the screen buttons for M mode also appear. When CFM-mode images are displayed together with Doppler-mode images, the screen buttons for the appropriate Doppler mode also appear. For details about the screen buttons for M mode, see 4.10 Image adjustment screen buttons. For details about the screen buttons for Doppler mode, see 6.15 Image adjustment screen buttons. First page: Prev. Page

Next Page

# Variance # CFA-Dyn. # Fine Flow-Dyn.

# Color Map

# CFM Pref.

# Smoothing

# AS

# Packet

CFM Persistence

# Density

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

HI REZ+

# B-Enhance

# PDC

# B-AGC

# Persistence

Texture;#

(16)

(17)

(18)

(19)

(1)

(3)

#

(2)

Second page: Prev. Page # B-Dyn.

Next Page # B-Gray Map

# HI REZ+

(11)

(12)

(13) (14) (15)

Third page: Prev. Page Control;#

(20) (21)

Next Page Vel.Tag.

# ▼;■

# ▲;■

# Shift

# Rejection

γ-Curve;#

# γ

# Center

# Rejection

# Saturation

(22)

(22)

(22)

(23)

(24)

Fourth page: Prev. Page

Next Page

Peak Hold

# Peak Hold Intvl.

Unit(PW/CW);#

Unit(TDI);#

(25)

(26)

(27)

(28)

Depending on the situation, some screen buttons might not appear. Figure 5.12-1 Image adjustment screen buttons for CFM mode

82

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

(1)

Changing the level of variance mode display: Variance screen button This screen button appears in CFI mode. Use the Variance screen button to specify the level of variance mode display. and then turning the Multi encoder

Pressing the Variance screen button Multi encoder

(2)

changes the selected value.

Changing the dynamic range for CFA mode: CFA-Dynamic Range screen button This screen button appears in CFA mode. Use the CFA-Dynamic Range screen button to change the dynamic range for CFA mode. Pressing the CFA-Dynamic Range screen button encoder

Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi

changes the selected value. Level of CFA dynamic range: 8

# CFA-Dyn.

Start operation to change the dynamic range for CFA mode.

Multi encoder

Level of CFA dynamic range: 1

Figure 5.12-2 Changing the dynamic range for CFA mode (3)

Changing the dynamic range for Fine Flow mode: Fine Flow-Dynamic Range screen button This screen button appears in Fine Flow mode. Use the Fine Flow-Dynamic Range screen button to change the dynamic range for Fine Flow mode. and then turning the

Pressing the Fine Flow-Dynamic Range screen button Multi encoder (4)

Multi encoder

changes the selected value.

Selecting a color map: Color Map screen button Use the Color Map screen button to change color maps. Button operation is the same as for the Color Map mode-specific screen button. For details, see 5.11 Mode-specific screen buttons.

(5)

Changing the CFM preference: CFM-Preference screen button A CFM-mode image is superimposed on a B-mode image in the same window. This screen button allows you to change the display priority for the two modes. The current value set for the CFM preference is displayed as a green line on the gray scale at the left of the window. Within the CFM ROI, a B-mode image is displayed for the gray scale extending beyond the green line. A CFM-mode image is displayed for the gray scale below the green line. If the value of the CFM preference is small, the B-mode image gain is high. If the value of the CFM preference is large, the CFM-mode image gain is high.

Q1E-EA1203

83

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

Pressing the CFM-Preference screen button encoder

Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi

changes the selected value.

B-mode image Green line CFM-mode image

Figure 5.12-3 Changing the value of the CFM preference You cannot choose this screen button when the mode is set to Auto in the preference settings of the selected application. (6)

Changing the level of smoothing: Smoothing screen button You can apply smoothing to the displayed CFM-mode image. Pressing the Smoothing screen button Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi encoder

changes the selected value. Smoothing level: 3

# Smoothing

Turn smoothing on.

Multi encoder

Smoothing level: 1

Figure 5.12-4 Changing the level of smoothing (7)

Changing the level of artifact suppression: Artifact Suppression screen button Use the Artifact Suppression screen button to reduce the effects of artifacts and to improve the performance of color display. Pressing the Artifact Suppression screen button encoder

Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi

changes the selected value. 3: Strong artifact suppression

# AS

Multi Start operation to encoder change the level of artifact suppression. 1: Weak artifact suppression 0: Artifact suppression OFF

Figure 5.12-5 Artifact Suppression

84

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

(8)

Changing the packet size: Packet Size screen button When you change the packet size, the sensitivity and frame rate of CFM-mode images and turn the Multi encoder

changes. Press the Packet Size screen button to change the packet size.

Multi encoder

Large

: The frame rate decreases, but CFM-mode images with higher image quality are obtained.

Medium : Usually set the packet size to this setting. Small

: The frame rate increases, allowing CFM-mode images to be obtained more quickly, but the image quality decreases.

(9)

Changing the level of persistence: CFM Persistence screen button The CFM persistence function calculates the correlation between the frames of an image to display chronologically smoother CFM images. and then turning the Multi

Pressing the CFM Persistence screen button encoder

changes the selected value.

Multi encoder

Level of CFM Persistence: 7 # CFM Persistence

Turn CFM Persistence on.

Multi encoder

Level of CFM Persistence: 0

Figure 5.12-6 Changing the level of CFM Persistence (10) Changing the scan line density for CFM mode: Density screen button Use the Density screen button to change the scan line density for CFM-mode images. and then turning the Multi encoder

Pressing the Density screen button

Multi encoder

changes the selected value. Level of scan line density for CFM mode: 8 (fine) # Density

Turn density on.

Multi encoder

Level of scan line density for CFM mode: 1 (coarse)

Figure 5.12-7 Changing the scan line density for CFM mode (11) Changing the B dynamic range: B-Dynamic Range screen button Pressing the B-Dynamic Range screen button encoder

Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi

changes the dynamic range for B-mode images. When the dynamic range

changes, the tone of the images changes.

Q1E-EA1203

85

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

(12) Changing the B gray map: B-Gray Map screen button Pressing the B-Gray Map screen button Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi encoder

changes the gray map of B-mode images. Select a map of the desired gradation

from eight gray maps. (13) Selecting the HI REZ+ function: HI REZ+ screen button Use the HI REZ+ screen button to turn the HI REZ+ adaptive imaging function on and off. The HI REZ+ function changes the filter characteristics based on the input signals. (14) Changing the level of B enhancement: B-Enhance screen button Pressing the B-Enhance screen button Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi encoder

changes the level of enhancement for B-mode images by allowing you to select the

desired level of enhancement for image counters. (15) Changing the level of HI REZ+: HI REZ+ level screen button and then turning the Multi

Pressing the HI REZ+ level screen button encoder

Multi encoder

changes the level of enhancement performed by the HI REZ+ function.

(16) Changing PDC: PDC screen button The values of the acoustic parameters of patients, such as fat, muscle, and organs, differ for each patient. You can use PDC to change the values of the acoustic parameters specified for the equipment to obtain optimal images. Pressing the PDC screen button

and then turning the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

change the level of PDC. (17) Changing B-AGC: B-AGC screen button Automatic gain control (AGC) allows you to suppress the excessive echo levels in images so that areas that tend to be very bright can be observed. Pressing the B-AGC screen button

and then turning the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

changes the AGC value of B-mode images. (18) Changing persistence: Persistence screen button The persistence function calculates the correlation between the frames of an image to provide smoother, softer B-mode images. Pressing the Persistence screen button Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi encoder

changes the persistence.

(19) Changing the texture: Texture screen button Use the Texture screen button to change the texture for B-mode images. The texture changes each time you click the Texture screen button

.

(20) Selecting the target image: Control screen button ƒ

In CFI mode During dual display, use the Control screen button to select the target of velocity tagging and the area for which velocity-based rejection is to be performed.

86

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

In CFA mode and Fine Flow mode

ƒ

Use the Control screen button

to select the display mode for which

the gamma curve is to be adjusted. You can change the gamma curve for the B, M, and Doppler modes. (21) Selecting whether to perform velocity tagging: Velocity Tagging screen button You can use velocity tagging to extract only specific levels in the color scale in CFI mode to create a CFM-mode image. to enable velocity tagging and use

Press the Velocity Tagging screen button

the procedure described in (21) to specify the range of velocity tagging. (22) Specifying the range of velocity tagging: Velocity Tagging Range (upper) screen button , Velocity Tagging Range (lower) screen button

, Shift screen

button To perform velocity tagging, use these screen buttons as necessary and then turn the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

to specify the velocity tagging range.

Use the Velocity Tagging Range (upper) screen button Tagging Range (lower) screen button

and Velocity

to change the upper and lower limits

of tagging. Use the Shift screen button

to move the range of tagging

vertically. +21.9 Upper limit Range of tagging CFM baseline Rejection area Lower limit -21.9 cm/s

Figure 5.12-8 Specifying the range of velocity tagging (23) Changing the area of velocity-based rejection: Rejection screen button In CFI mode, use the Rejection screen button to specify the area you do not want to display above and below the CFM baseline (the upper and lower rejection areas must be equal). Pressing the Rejection screen button Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi encoder

changes the selected value.

(24) Adjusting the gamma curve In CFA mode and Fine Flow mode, you can adjust the gamma curve for the display mode that you select by clicking the Control screen button

.

For details about the items to be adjusted, see (11) to (15) in 3.15 Image adjustment screen buttons.

Q1E-EA1203

87

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

(25) Selecting whether to perform peak hold: Peak Hold screen button Peak hold allows you to stop rewriting a CFM-mode image for a specified length of time while leaving the points of high brightness. When you click the Peak Hold screen button , peak hold starts. Specify the length of peak hold as described in (25). This length is actually the interval between rewrites of a CFM-mode image. (26) Specifying the peak hold interval: Peak Hold Interval screen button Use the Peak Hold Interval screen button to specify the interval between rewrites of a CFM-mode image. If you choose ∞, CFM-mode images are not rewritten. Pressing the Peak Hold Interval screen button encoder

Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi

changes the selected value.

Rewrite interval (when ECG waveforms are not displayed) y

1 second to 8 seconds : The image is rewritten at the specified interval.

y

∞

: The image is not rewritten.

Rewrite interval (when ECG waveforms are displayed) y

1 heartbeat to 8 heartbeats : The image is rewritten at the specified interval.

y

∞

: The image is not rewritten. # Peak Hold Intvl.

Peak Hold

Start peak hold.

Start specification Multi encoder of the peak hold interval. Change the peak hold interval (rewrite interval).

Figure 5.12-9 Specifying the peak hold interval (27) Changing the flow rate unit: Unit(PW/CW) screen button Use the Unit(PW/CW) screen button to change the flow rate unit for PW-mode images and CW-mode images between m/s, cm/s, and kHz. The unit changes each time you click the Unit(PW/CW) screen button

.

(28) Changing the flow rate unit: Unit(TDI) screen button Use the Unit(TDI) screen button to change the flow rate unit for TDI-mode images between m/s, cm/s, and kHz. The unit changes each time you click the Unit(TDI) screen button

88

Q1E-EA1203

. For details about TDI mode, see Chapter 7 - TDI Mode.

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

5.13 Applying the ALARA principle in CFM mode When you press the CFI mode selection key

CFI

, a window for CFM-mode images appears.

This window contains the thermal index (TI) for the probe you are using. (For details about the format of the window for CFM-mode images, see 5.1 Displaying CFM-mode images. For details about the possible bio-effects indicated by the TI, see the subsection Acoustic output indices in the chapter Operation Procedures in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation.) For probes that are not intended for transcranial scanning, the relevant indices are the soft tissue thermal index (TIS) and bone thermal index (TIB). The index displayed by default is TIS. You can choose to display the TIB by specifying the TIB from the Region Data Setting. For probes whose intended use includes transcranial scanning, the relevant indices are the TIS, TIB, and TIC(Cranial-bone Thermal Index). The index displayed by default is the TIS. You can choose to display other indices (TIB or TIC or both) by specifying the indices from the Region Data Setting. In accordance with the ALARA principle, you should set the ultrasound output to the minimum level required to acquire images of the desired quality. In all HI VISION Avius modes, you will want to use the US POWER toggle switch directly control acoustic emission. The US POWER toggle switch

US POWER

US POWER

to

allows you to change

the output level in the range from 5% to 100% in 5% steps. With this encoder, you can adjust the ultrasound transmission level without changing any other system settings. When you specify ultrasound output, note that the following parameters indirectly affect the TI values in CFM mode. Also note that the following parameters are the main ones you need to adjust to optimize B-mode images and CFM-mode images. Focus

Changing the depth of focus or ultrasound transmit aperture affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

Reference frequency

Changing the reference frequency changes the frequency of ultrasound waves, affecting the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

Ultrasound output

Changing the ultrasound output level affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

Frame rate

The frame rate changes when the velocity range, viewing angle, scan line density, display depth, size of CFM ROI, or packet size changes. A change in the frame rate changes affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC values for B-mode images.

Note that changing the gain for CFM-mode images does not affect the TI values. Q1E-EA1203

89

Chapter 5 - CFM Mode

5.14 Applying the ALARA principle in CFM mode when used together with the M and PW modes Each window for CFM-B/M mode and CFM-PW mode contains the thermal index (TI) for the probe you are using. (For details about the format of the window for CFM-mode images, see 5.1 Displaying CFM-mode images. For details about the possible bio-effects indicated by the TI, see the subsection Acoustic output indices in the chapter Operation Procedures in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation.) For probes that are not intended for transcranial scanning, the relevant indices are the soft tissue thermal index (TIS) and bone thermal index (TIB). The index displayed by default is the TIS. You can choose to display the TIB by specifying the TIB from the Region Data Setting. For probes whose intended use includes transcranial scanning, the relevant indices are the TIS, TIB, and TIC(Cranial-bone Thermal Index). The index displayed by default is the TIS. You can choose to display other indices (TIB or TIC or both) by specifying the indices from the Region Data Setting. In accordance with the ALARA principle, you should set the ultrasound output to the minimum level required to acquire images of the desired quality. In all HI VISION Avius modes, you will want to use the US POWER toggle switch directly control acoustic emission. The US POWER toggle switch

US POWER

US POWER

to

allows you to change

the output level in the range from 5% to 100% in 5% steps. With this encoder, you can adjust the ultrasound transmission level without changing any other system settings. When you specify ultrasound output, note that the following parameters indirectly affect the TI values in the CFM, PW, and M modes. Also note that the following parameters are the main ones you need to adjust to optimize B-, CFM-, PW-, and M-mode images. Focus

Changing the depth of focus or ultrasound transmit aperture affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

Reference frequency

Changing the reference frequency changes the frequency of ultrasound waves changes, affecting the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

Ultrasound output

Changing the ultrasound output level affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

Frame rate

The frame rate changes when the velocity range, viewing angle, scan line density, display depth, size of CFM ROI, or packet size changes. A change in the frame rate changes the TIS, TIB, and TIC values for B-mode images.

Note that changing the gain for CFM-mode images or Doppler sampling gates does not affect the TI values.

90

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode The HI VISION Avius provides PW mode for displaying pulsed wave Doppler images, and CW mode for displaying continuous wave Doppler images.

6.1 Displaying PW-mode images To start PW mode, press the PW mode selection key

PW

(center of the knob) while freeze

mode is not activated. Pressing the key displays a B-mode image with the PW cursor (Figure 6.1-1) or a B/PW-mode image (Figure 6.1-2). Specify the initial type of display for each application. For details about how to select the type of display for each application, see (2) PW page in 14.2.4 D item tabbed pages. The PW cursor is displayed.

PW cursor

B mode

PW mode

Figure 6.1-1 Result of pressing the PW mode selection key: When single display with the PW cursor is enabled PW cursor

B mode

PW mode

Figure 6.1-2 Result of pressing the PW mode selection key: When single display with the PW cursor is disabled While the PW cursor is displayed in yellow, roll the trackball to specify the position of the PW cursor.

Q1E-EA1203

91

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

The trackball can be used to move the PW cursor if the trackball symbol displayed at the bottom of the window indicates that the function assigned to the trackball is Doppler mode sample point TRACK BALL

. To change the functions assigned to the trackball, press the TRACK BALL key

.

When you press the UPDATE(NEXT) key Thereafter, use the UPDATE(NEXT) key

UPDATE (NEXT)

UPDATE (NEXT)

, the PW-mode image appears in real time. to switch real-time display between the B-mode

image and PW-mode image. Whether the Simultaneous screen button has been chosen determines, the type of image that is displayed in real time when the UPDATE(NEXT) key is pressed. Frozen

Frozen

Real time

B mode

PW mode

B mode

PW mode

Real time

Real time

Frozen

Real time

B mode

PW mode

B mode

PW mode

Real time Simultaneous real-time display function OFF

Simultaneous real-time display function ON

Figure 6.1-3 Using the UPDATE(NEXT) key to select the image to be displayed in real time Pressing the PW mode selection key

PW

again turns off PW mode.

The parameters for a PW-mode image appear as shown in the following figure.

92

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

PW-mode image

B-mode image

PW cursor Doppler sample gate

Thermal Index Velocity marker

Flow rate detected in the forward direction (toward the probe)

Flow rate unit

Base line Flow rate detected in reverse direction (away from the probe)

Depth of doppler sample point

Sample width Wall filter Incident angle Doppler gain

Doppler mode (velocity range/frequency)

Figure 6.1-4 Parameters displayed for a PW-mode image Set a Doppler sample gate in the center of the target blood vessel as accurately as possible. If you set a Doppler sample gate in an area with high brightness, noise may occur.

Q1E-EA1203

93

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

6.2 Displaying CW-mode images To display CW-mode images, mount an optional CW unit on the HI VISION Avius, connect a probe for a CW unit, and then use the following procedure. First, start CW mode by pressing the CW mode key

while freeze mode is not activated.

A B-mode image with the CW cursor (Figure 6.2-1) or a CW-mode image (Figure 6.2-2) will appear. Specify the initial type of display for each application. For details about how to select the type of display for each application, see (3) CW page in 14.2.4 D item tabbed pages. The CW cursor is displayed.

CW cursor

B mode

CW mode

Figure 6.2-1 Result of pressing the CW mode key: When single display with the CW cursor is enabled CW cursor

B mode

CW mode

Figure 6.2-2 Result of pressing the CW mode key: When single display with the CW cursor is disabled While the CW cursor is displayed in yellow, roll the trackball to specify the position of the CW cursor. The trackball can be used to move the CW cursor if the trackball symbol at the bottom of the window indicates that the function assigned to the trackball is Doppler mode sample point To change the functions assigned to the trackball, press the TRACK BALL key Press the UPDATE(NEXT) key

UPDATE (NEXT)

94

Q1E-EA1203

.

.

to display a CW-mode image in real time.

Thereafter, use the UPDATE(NEXT) key image and the PW-mode image.

TRACK BALL

UPDATE (NEXT)

to switch real-time display between the B-mode

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

Real time

Frozen

B mode

CW mode

Frozen

Real time

B mode

CW mode

Figure 6.2-3 Using the UPDATE(NEXT) key to select the image to be displayed in real time Pressing the CW mode key

again turns off CW mode.

For details about the items displayed in the window, see the description of PW mode (Figure 6.1-4). Set a Doppler sample gate in the center of the target blood vessel as accurately as possible. If you set a Doppler sample gate in an area with high brightness, noise may occur.

6.3 Displaying Single Element CW-mode images To start this function, mount an optional pencil CW unit on the HI VISION Avius, and then connect a dedicated probe for continuous wave Doppler.

6.3.1 Connecting probes ··················································································· Connect a dedicated probe for continuous wave Doppler to the special connector on the right side of the HI VISION Avius. When you connect a dedicated probe for continuous wave Doppler, the HI VISION Avius is sometimes unable to recognize the probe. In such cases, remove the probe and then reconnect it.

6.3.2 Starting Single Element CW mode ··························································· Press the PROBE key

PROBE

to open the probe menu. Then either execute the default application

for dedicated probes for continuous wave Doppler, or select a specific application to start Single Element CW mode. In Single Element CW mode, only Doppler signals are displayed.

6.3.3 Notes on operations in Single Element CW mode ··································· The following two operations are not available in Single Element CW mode: z

Selecting functions related to B mode, such as adjusting the incident angle, changing the sample width, splitting the screen, and performing simultaneous real-time display

z

Changing the reference frequency Q1E-EA1203

95

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

6.4 Adjusting the gain You can use the Gain encoder

(rim of the knob) to adjust the gain of an entire Doppler

PW

image whether the freeze function is on or off. When you turn the Gain encoder the entire image becomes brighter. When you turn the Gain encoder

PW

PW

clockwise,

counterclockwise, the

entire image becomes darker. Brighter

Darker

Figure 6.4-1 Adjusting the gain If you turn the Gain encoder

PW

clockwise while the freeze functions is on, Δ appears in the

display area for Doppler gain and the entire image becomes brighter. If you turn the Gain encoder

PW

counterclockwise, ∇ appears and the entire image becomes darker.

DG:47 S Indicates turning of the Gain encoder DG:47 T Indicates turning of the Gain encoder

PW

clockwise while the freeze function is on.

PW

counterclockwise while the freeze function

is on.

This Gain encoder

PW

(rim of the knob) can also be used to play the cine memory

frame by frame while the freeze function is on. Each time you press the PW mode selection key

PW

(center of the knob), the function switches between gain

adjustment and frame-by-frame playback of the cine memory.

6.5 Adjusting the incident angle (1)

Pressing the Angle encoder

ODM

displays an angle correction bar over the Doppler cursor.

The angle on the angle correction bar is registered in an application. (See (1) Common page in 14.2.4 D item tabbed pages.) (1–a)

If you press the Angle encoder

ODM

while an angle correction bar is displayed,

the angle correction bar moves and appears on the other side of the Doppler cursor at the same angle. (1–b)

If you press the Angle encoder

disappears.

96

Q1E-EA1203

ODM

after step (1-a), the angle correction bar

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

(2)

Because the angle correction bar rotates when you turn the Angle encoder

ODM

, align the

incident angle to the direction of blood flow. The incident angle value displayed in the Doppler image changes as the angle of the angle correction bar changes. When the angle between the Doppler cursor and the angle correction bar becomes 0°, the angle correction bar disappears. As shown in the figure, the displayed angle indicates the angle between the angle correction bar and the Doppler cursor. The angle shown is between 0° and 80°. y

When the Angle encoder

ODM

is operated, the angle is temporarily displayed in

the upper right of the Doppler sample point. y

Note that the deviation from the actual flow rate becomes large when the angle between the blood vessel and the Doppler cursor is greater than 60°. When you set the angle between the angle correction bar and the blood vessel to 61° or more, the color of the bar changes to alert the user.

Doppler cursor

Angle correction bar Doppler sample gate

Direction of blood flow

Figure 6.5-1 Adjusting the incident angle

6.6 Other adjustments You can adjust the following items the same way you adjust them in M mode. For details, see 4.1 Displaying M-mode images through 4.7 Changing the sweep speed. z

Single display of PW-mode images

z

Moving the display location

z

Changing the focus position

z

Freezing PW-mode images

z

Sweep speed

Q1E-EA1203

97

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

6.7 Changing the reference frequency Use the REF FREQ toggle switch to select a reference frequency. When you move the toggle switch upward, high frequency is selected. When you move the toggle switch downward, low frequency is selected. High frequency

REF FREQ

Low frequency

Figure 6.7-1 Selecting a reference frequency y

You cannot change a reference frequency in CW mode.

y

Some probes have fixed reference frequencies.

6.8 Adjusting the baseline Use the BASELINE toggle switch to shift the baseline (0 m/s level) of Doppler images vertically to make it easier to view waveforms when too many signals appear in the upper or lower section. You can adjust the position of the baseline whether the freeze function is on or off. Use the Application function to specify the initial position of the baseline. (See 14.2.4 D item tabbed pages.) Doppler image

BASELINE

Figure 6.8-1 Adjusting the position of the baseline Pressing the HI-Support key

98

Q1E-EA1203

HISupport

automatically adjusts the baseline to the optimal position.

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

6.9 Velocity range (PRF) Use the V-SCALE toggle switch to change the velocity range. The velocity range you can specify differs depending on the type of Doppler mode you are using and the position of the Doppler sample point. When you move the toggle switch upward, high frequency is selected, resulting in a greater maximum detection velocity. When you move the toggle switch downward, low frequency is selected, resulting in a lower maximum detection velocity. High V-SCALE

Low

Figure 6.9-1 Changing the velocity range Pressing the HI-Support key

HISupport

automatically adjusts the velocity range to the optimal

value.

6.10 Oblique function (for linear probes only) If you are using a linear probe, you can activate Doppler mode and measure the blood flow obliquely. When you move the OBLIQUE toggle switch to the right, the beam tilts to the right (+ direction). When you move the toggle switch to the left, the beam tilts to the left (- direction). Each movement of the toggle switch changes the tilt angle five degrees. OBLIQUE

-

+ B-mode image

+ -

Tilt angle

Figure 6.10-1 Using the oblique function

Q1E-EA1203

99

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

6.11 Changing sample width Use the SAMPLE LENGTH toggle switch to change the sample width.

Wider

SAMPLE LENGTH

Narrower

Figure 6.11-1 Changing the width of a sample gate In TDI mode (see Chapter 7 - TDI Mode), sample gates are shown as rectangles. The length of the beam on the four sides of a rectangle is the sample width.

6.12 Wall filter Use the FILTER toggle switch to eliminate unnecessary signals caused by wall motion so that only blood flow signals are displayed. Higher frequency eliminated FILTER

Lower frequency eliminated

Figure 6.12-1 Using the wall filter

6.13 Automatic adjustments Use the HI-Support key

HISupport

to automatically adjust the gain, adjust the baseline, and adjust

the velocity range so that images can be displayed with the optimal quality. The HI-Support key

HISupport

might not work or the desired image quality might not

be obtained when, for example, the image contains too much noise.

100

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

6.14 Mode-specific screen buttons In Doppler mode, the following mode-specific screen buttons appear at the bottom of the screen by default as a menu for operating the ultrasound diagnostic scanner. If freeze mode is not activated (1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

Oblique Invert

Simult.

# Sound Volume

Split;#

User Define

Measurement

Flow Invert

Split Ratio;#

Display Set.

Menu;#

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(14)

(13)

(15)

(12)

# Angle

Image Steering

# D-Color

Up/Down Shift

(18)

(17)

Body Mark

PW/PW

If the Display Setting menu screen button is chosen

Display Set.

(16)

(10)

If freeze mode is activated (1)

(19)

(20)

(5)

(6)

Body Mark

Review

# Speed

Split;#

User Define

Measurement

Flow Invert

Split Ratio;#

Display Set.

Menu;#

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

Depending on the situation, some screen buttons might not appear. Figure 6.14-1 Mode-specific screen buttons for Doppler mode (1)

Displaying a menu of body marks: Body Mark menu screen button Use the Body Mark menu screen button to display the screen buttons for selecting body marks. For details, see 12.2.7 Using screen buttons to change settings.

(2)

Changing the direction of oblique Doppler cursor: Oblique Invert screen button The oblique function is enabled only when a linear probe is connected. The Oblique Invert screen button is available only when a linear probe is connected. (For details, see 6.10 Oblique function (for linear probes only).) Because the Oblique Invert screen button changes the direction of oblique Doppler cursor from left to right or right to left, the Doppler image reverses. If you want to activate flow invert while oblique invert is executed, in the Region Data Setting, select When Oblique Invert is executed in Flow Invert. For details, see (12) D page of the D item in 13.2.3 Region Data Setting.

Q1E-EA1203

101

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

ƒ

When When Oblique Invert is executed is cleared:

ƒ

When When Oblique Invert is executed is selected:

Figure 6.14-2 Changing the direction of oblique Doppler cursor (3)

Selecting simultaneous real-time display: Simultaneous screen button Use the Simultaneous screen button to display both a B-mode image and an PW-mode image in real time. The Simultaneous screen button is not available in CW mode.

(4)

Changing the speaker volume: Sound Volume screen button Pressing the Sound Volume screen button encoder

and then turning the Multi

adjusts the volume of the speaker.

Multi encoder

High # Sound Volume

Start adjustment of the volume of the speaker.

Multi encoder

Low

Figure 6.14-3 Adjusting the volume of the speaker (5)

Changing the direction of a split screen: Split screen button Use the Split screen button to select whether to display a B-mode image and a Doppler image in a vertically split dual display or in a horizontally split dual display.

Vertical split

Horizontal split

Figure 6.14-4 Changing the direction of a split screen

102

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

(6)

Displaying a menu of user-defined screen buttons: User Define menu screen button Use the User Define menu screen button to display the user-defined screen buttons. For details about how to specify user-defined screen buttons, see 13.2.10 Screen Button.

(7)

Displaying a menu of measurement screen buttons: Measurement screen button Use the Measurement screen button to display the screen buttons for performing measurements. For details, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Measurement.

(8)

Reversing Doppler images: Flow Invert screen button Use the Flow Invert screen button to display a Doppler image in the reverse direction. If the Flow Invert screen button is not chosen, the upper section shows the signals toward the probe and the lower section shows the signals away from the probe. If the Flow Invert screen button is chosen, the upper section shows the signals away from the probe and the lower section shows the signals toward the probe.

Figure 6.14-5 Reversing the display of a Doppler image (9)

Changing the horizontal split ratio: Split Ratio screen button While you are displaying a B-mode image and a Doppler image on a horizontally split screen, use the Split Ratio screen button to change the display ratio of the B-mode image and the Doppler image (B-mode image:Doppler image). B-mode image

Doppler image

1:2

B-mode image

Doppler image

1:1

B-mode image

Doppler image

2:1

Figure 6.14-6 Changing the horizontal split ratio (10) Displaying a menu of display settings: Display Setting menu screen button Use the Display Setting menu screen button to display the screen buttons for changing the parameters related to image display, such as selecting colors for Doppler images. (See If the Display Setting menu screen button is chosen in Figure 6.14-1 Mode-specific screen buttons for Doppler mode.)

Q1E-EA1203

103

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

(11) Switching menus: Menu screen button Use the Menu screen button to display the menus for operating optional functions, such as the Stress Echo Software. The menu that appears differs depending on the enabled option. (12) Rotating images 90°: Rotate screen button , the image rotates 90°.

Each time you press the Rotate screen button

Figure 6.14-7 Rotating an image (13) Steering images: Image Steering screen button Use the Image Steering screen button to steer B-mode images. After you press the Image Steering screen button

, you can use the trackball to steer the image. To return

the steering potion to the center, press the UNDO key

UNDO

.

(14) Changing the view angle and display width: Angle screen button If you are using a sector probe or convex probe, use the Angle screen button to change the viewing angle of B-mode images. If you are using a linear probe, use the Angle screen button to change the display width of B-mode images. and then turning the Multi encoder

Pressing the Angle screen button

Multi encoder

changes the viewing angle or display widths. (15) Vertically reversing images: Invert U/L screen button Use the Invert U/L screen button to vertically reverse the B-mode image display. (16) Horizontally reversing images: Invert L/R screen button Use the Invert L/R screen button to horizontally reverse the B-mode image display. (17) Vertically moving the view: Up/Down Shift screen button in Doppler mode.

You can not use the Up/Down Shift screen button (18) Selecting colors for Doppler images: D-Color screen button

Use the D-Color screen button to select colors for Doppler images. When you press the D-Color screen button

, the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

on the keyboard panel is set

for selecting colors for Doppler images. Turn the encoder to change the colors. (19) Selecting continuous playback: Review screen button If B-mode images are recorded in the cine memory, use the Review screen button to continuously play the B-mode images. For details, see 8.6 Playing images.

104

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

(20) Changing the speed of continuous playback: Speed screen button If B-mode images are recorded in the cine memory, use the Speed screen button to select the speed for continuously playing the B-mode images. For details, see 8.6 Playing images.

6.15 Image adjustment screen buttons In Doppler mode, the following screen buttons appear for adjusting images. First page Next Page

Prev. Page # FFT-γ

# Reso.

# Density

(1)

(2)

(3)

Second page Prev. Page

Next Page

Control;#

γ-Curve;#

# γ

(4)

(5)

(6)

# Center

# Rejection

# Saturation

Texture;#

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

Third page Prev. Page

Next Page

# D-Color

Display Scale

Unit(PW/CW);#

Unit(TDI);#

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

Depending on the situation, some screen buttons might not appear. Figure 6.15-1 Image adjustment screen buttons for PW mode (1)

Changing FFT-γ: FFT-γ screen button Pressing the FFT-γ screen button

and then turning the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

changes the gamma curve (FFT-γ) of the Doppler image.

8 # FFT-γ

Start changing of FFT-γ.

1

Multi encoder

Figure 6.15-2 Changing FFT-γ (2)

Changing the resolution: Resolution screen button Use the Resolution screen button to change the number of analysis points for detecting Doppler images. Pressing the Resolution screen button Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi encoder

changes the resolution.

Q1E-EA1203

105

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

H:

# Reso.

Allows you to acquire Doppler images with high resolution.

M Start changing of the resolution.

Multi encoder

L:

Increases the detection response rate for Doppler images, allowing you to acquire Doppler images with better response.

Figure 6.15-3 Changing the resolution (3)

Changing scan line density: Density screen button and then turning the Multi encoder

Pressing the Density screen button

Multi encoder

allows you to change the number of scan lines in a B-mode image. (4)

Selecting an image whose gamma curve you want to adjust: Control screen button You can adjust the gamma curve for each mode. To change the gamma curve for Doppler mode, press the Control screen button and then choose D.

(5)

Selecting a gamma curve: γ-Curve screen button You can select one of four basic types of gamma curves. Use this screen button to select a gamma curve. When you select a gamma curve, the selected gamma curve appears at the lower left corner of the image.

Figure 6.15-4 Types of gamma curves (6)

Changing the gamma coefficient: γ screen button

(for moving the correction

area) Pressing the γ screen button

and then turning the Multi encoder

allows you to change the gamma coefficient. γ = small γ = large

γ = large γ = small γ = large

γ = small

Figure 6.15-5 Changing the gamma coefficient

106

Q1E-EA1203

Multi encoder

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

(7)

Changing the center of the S curve: Center screen button

(center value of

the S curve) The Center screen button appears when an S curve is selected. Use the screen button to change the center of the S curve. Pressing the Center screen button

and then turning the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

changes the center of the S curve.

Figure 6.15-6 Changing the center of an S curve (8)

Changing the rejection area: Rejection screen button Use the Rejection screen button to adjust the gradation steps for eliminating low level echoes. Pressing the Rejection screen button Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi encoder

changes the rejection range.

256 gradation steps Output signal

Rejection range

Input signal

Figure 6.15-7 Changing the rejection range (9)

Changing the saturation range: Saturation screen button Use the Saturation screen button to adjust the gradation steps for saturating high level echoes to the maximum brightness. Pressing the Saturation screen button Multi encoder

and then turning the Multi encoder

changes the saturation range.

256 gradation steps Output signal

Saturation range

Input signal

Figure 6.15-8 Changing the saturation range Q1E-EA1203

107

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

(10) Changing the texture: Texture screen button Use the Texture screen button to change the texture for B-mode images. The texture .

changes each time you click the Texture screen button (11) Selecting colors for Doppler images: D-Color screen button

Use the D-Color screen button to select colors for Doppler images. When you press the D-Color screen button

, the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

on the keyboard panel

becomes available for selecting colors for Doppler images. Turn the encoder to change the colors. (12) Changing the scale: Display Scale screen button Use the Display Scale screen button to display a velocity scale in the middle of a Doppler image. (13) Changing the flow rate unit: Unit(PW/CW) screen button Use the Unit(PW/CW) screen button to change the flow rate unit for PW-mode images and CW-mode images between m/s, cm/s, and kHz. The unit changes each time you click the Unit(PW/CW) screen button

.

(14) Changing the flow rate unit: Unit(TDI) screen button Use the Unit(TDI) screen button to change the of flow rate unit for TDI-mode images between m/s, cm/s, and kHz. The unit changes each time you click the Unit(TDI) screen button

108

Q1E-EA1203

. For details about TDI mode, see Chapter 7 - TDI Mode.

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

6.16 Applying the ALARA principle in PW mode When you press the PW mode selection key

PW

, a window for B/PW-mode images appears.

This window contains the thermal index (TI) for the probe you are using. (For details about the format of the window for B/PW-mode images, see 6.1 Displaying PW-mode images. For details about the possible bio-effects indicated by the TI, see the subsection Acoustic output indices in the chapter Operation Procedures in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation.) For probes that are not intended for transcranial scanning, the relevant indices are the soft tissue thermal index (TIS) and bone thermal index (TIB). The index displayed by default is the TIS. You can choose to display the TIB by specifying the TIB from the Region Data Setting. For probes whose intended use includes transcranial scanning, the relevant indices are the TIS, TIB, and TIC(Cranial-bone Thermal Index). The index displayed by default is the TIS. You can choose to display other indices (TIB or TIC or both) by specifying the indices from the Region Data Setting. In accordance with the ALARA principle, you should set the ultrasound output to the minimum level required to acquire images of the desired quality. In all the HI VISION Avius modes, you will want to use the US POWER toggle switch to directly control acoustic emission. The US POWER toggle switch

US POWER

US POWER

allows you to

change the output level in the range from 5% to 100% in 5% steps. With this encoder, you can adjust the ultrasound transmission level without changing any other system settings. When you specify ultrasound output, note that the following parameters indirectly affect the TI values in PW mode. Also note that the following parameters are the main ones that you need to adjust to optimize B-mode images and Doppler images. Focus

Changing the depth of focus or ultrasound transmit aperture affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

Reference frequency

Changing the reference frequency changes the frequency of ultrasound waves, affecting the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

Velocity range

Changing the velocity range changes the pulse repetition frequency (PRF), affecting the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

Ultrasound output

Changing the ultrasound output level affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

Q1E-EA1203

109

Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode

Frame rate

The frame rate changes when the velocity range, scan line density, or display depth changes. A change in the frame rate changes affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

Note that changing the sample width does not affect the TI values.

6.17 Applying the ALARA principle in CW mode For probes that are not intended for transcranial scanning, the relevant indices are the soft tissue thermal index (TIS) and bone thermal index (TIB). The index displayed by default is the TIS. You can choose to display the TIB by specifying the TIB from the Region Data Setting. For probes whose intended use includes transcranial scanning, the relevant indices are the TIS, TIB, and TIC(Cranial-bone Thermal Index). The index displayed by default is the TIS. You can choose to display other indices (TIB or TIC or both) by specifying the indices from the Region Data Setting. In accordance with the ALARA principle, you should set the ultrasound output to the minimum level required to acquire images of the desired quality. In all HI VISION Avius modes, you will want to use the US POWER toggle switch directly control acoustic emission. The US POWER toggle switch

US POWER

US POWER

to

allows you to change

the output level in the range from 5% to 100% in 5% steps. With this encoder, you can adjust the ultrasound transmission level without changing any other system settings. When you specify ultrasound output, note that the following parameters indirectly affect the TI values in CW mode. Also note that the following parameters are the main ones you need to adjust to optimize B-mode images and Doppler images. Focus

Changing the depth of focus or ultrasound transmit aperture affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

Ultrasound output

Changing the ultrasound output level affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.

Note that changing the PRF (velocity range) does not affect the TI values.

110

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 7 - TDI Mode

Chapter 7 - TDI Mode 7.1 Basic features of TDI mode The tissue Doppler imaging (TDI) function superimposes the color images of the velocities of moving tissue (mainly heart muscle) on B-mode images or M-mode images, or displays the velocities of moving tissue as Doppler images. TDI mode has the following submodes and function: (1)

TDI-B submode Superimposes the color images of the velocities of moving tissue on B-mode images.

(2)

TDI-M submode Superimposes the color images of the velocities of moving tissue on M-mode images.

(3)

TDI-PW submode Displays the velocities of moving tissue as Doppler images.

(4)

Blend function Dims the B-mode image under a color image when a color image of the velocities of moving tissue is superimposed.

7.2 Selecting TDI submode If a TDI-enabled probe (sector probe) is selected, pressing the Elasto/TDI mode selection key Elasto TDI

while freeze mode is not activated starts TDI mode.

Pressing the Elasto/TDI mode selection key y

again turns off TDI mode.

If you press the CFI mode selection key Fine Flow CFA

y

Elasto TDI

CFI

or Fine Flow/CFA mode key

, the TDI function is turned off.

In TDI mode, the reference frequency is fixed to a value shown in the following table. TDI appears in the area of the window where the reference frequency is usually displayed. Table 7.2-1 The reference frequency in TDI mode probe frequency

reference frequency

4-2, 5-1

6-3.5, 7-3, 8-3

2.5MHz

3.5MHz

Q1E-EA1203

111

Chapter 7 - TDI Mode

7.2.1 Doppler cursor in TDI-PW submode························································· In TDI-PW submode, the Doppler cursor is displayed as shown in the following figure. TDI-PW cursor

TDI-B mode

TDI-PW mode

Figure 7.2-1 Doppler cursor in TDI-PW submode

7.3 Blend function The blend function dims the B-mode image under a color image when you superimpose a color image of the velocities of moving tissue. Use the Blend image adjustment screen button

to change the level of dimming.

7 : High dimming level # Blend

Multi encoder

Turn Blend on.

1 : Low dimming level 0 : No dimming Figure 7.3-1 Changing the level of dimming

7.4 Other operations For details about other operations in TDI mode, see Chapter 5 - CFM Mode. Depending on the currently selected mode, also see Chapter 4 - M Mode or Chapter 6 - Doppler Mode.

112

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 8 - Cine Memory Function

Chapter 8 - Cine Memory Function 8.1 About cine memory When memory is used for storing large quantities of image data in the HI VISION Avius, you can repeatedly record and play back images for a diagnosis with ease with no degradation of image quality. z

The cine memory continuously records a moving image in the specified mode. When you play back the moving image, you can play back the entire recorded image as a continuous loop (at variable speeds), and advance and rewind frame by frame.

z

When ECG is turned on, the cine memory simultaneously records ECG waveforms with the moving image. In this case, since the moving image between the first R wave and the last R wave is played back as a continuous loop, you can view a playback image with smoothly linked loop ends. As with continuous recording mode, you can advance and rewind frame by frame.

z

The cine memory records M-mode and D-mode moving images.

8.2 Recording images 8.2.1 Recording images in the cine memory ····················································· The images that appear in a window are always recorded in the cine memory even if doing so has not been specified. When you change the parameters of an image, such as display depth or display angle, the HI VISION Avius clears all the information in the cine memory and starts recording the image with the new parameters. Therefore, the cine memory always contains images that have the same parameters. Also note that recording stops when you press the FREEZE key

FREEZE

.

8.2.2 Number of recorded images····································································· The number of images recorded in the cine memory differs depending on the display angle (display width) of images. The narrower the display angle, the more images you can record. The number of recorded images also varies depending on the probe.

Q1E-EA1203

113

Chapter 8 - Cine Memory Function

Image memory area

Display angle: Wide

Display angle: Narrow

Figure 8.2-1 Difference in the number of recorded images based on the display angle

8.3 Changing the cine memory split ratio You can divide the cine memory into two parts and change the ratio of parts as needed.

8.3.1 If the cine memory has not been divided ·················································· If the cine memory has not been divided, one B-mode image can be recorded continuously for a long time.

8.3.2 Recording two B-mode images in two parts of the cine memory ············ You can divide the cine memory into two parts beforehand to record two B-mode images, each in its own part.

Right

Left Left image in freeze mode

Right image in freeze mode

Left

Right

Figure 8.3-1 Recording two B-mode images in two parts of the cine memory Specify whether to divide the cine memory by choosing the Tool tab and then Cine Memory. In the Image memory window that opens, select or clear the B split check box.

114

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 8 - Cine Memory Function

y

When you record two B-mode images that have different ECG sweep speeds in two parts of the cine memory, the unselected image in the cine memory cannot be played.

y

When you record two B-mode images in two parts of the cine memory and you change the mode to one of the following, the images recorded in both parts of the cine memory will be erased: x Dual CFM mode x B/x (such as B/M, B/PW) mode

8.3.3 Recording B- and M/Doppler-mode images in two parts of the cine memory ·································································································· If you divide the cine memory into two parts to record a B-mode image (left window) and an M-mode or Doppler image (right window), changing the ratio of the two images allows you to record one of the two images longer. On the Tool tab menu, choose Cine Memory to display the Image memory window. In the B:M/D split section of the window, change the ratio of the sizes of the two parts of the cine memory. B-mode images are recorded in the left window, and M-mode or Doppler images are recorded in the right window. (If M mode or Doppler mode is selected and performing simultaneous real-time display and when Freeze mode is not activated, you can change the ratio of B:M/D split.) - When B:M/D is 1:0

Only a B-mode image is recorded (the cine memory is not divided).

- When B:M/D is 3:1

A B-mode image is recorded longer than an M-mode (or Doppler) image.

- When B:M/D is 1:1

The recording times of a B-mode image and an M-mode (or Doppler) image are the same.

- When B:M/D is 1:3

An M-mode (or Doppler) image is recorded longer than a B-mode image.

- When B:M/D is 0:1

Only an M-mode (or Doppler) image is recorded (the cine memory is not divided).

The cine memory only records the images that have the same parameters. If you change the recording conditions, such as display mode or display depth, the images in the cine memory will be erased.

Q1E-EA1203

115

Chapter 8 - Cine Memory Function

8.4 Changing the time display range for M mode and Doppler mode In freeze mode, you can use the SWEEP SPEED toggle switch

SWEEP SPEED

to change the time

display range for the M-mode image or Doppler image being displayed. You cannot change the time display range in the following cases: y

When the B:M/D cine memory division ratio is 1:0

y

When prior to activating freeze mode, the target M-mode image or Doppler image was not displayed in real time

8.5 Continuous playback mode for normal images and playback mode for automatically detected heartbeats Continuous playback of the cine memory images consists of the following two modes: Continuous playback mode for

When you play normal images (without ECG waveforms),

normal images

the HI VISION Avius continuously plays all the frames in the cine memory.

Playback mode for

If an image in the cine memory contains an ECG

automatically detected

waveform, the HI VISION Avius automatically detects the

heartbeats

time phase frames between the first and last R waves in the cine memory to smoothly play the image between the two R waves. However, if the HI VISION Avius cannot detect R waves in the ECG waveform when the image contains an ECG waveform, the ultrasound diagnostic scanner uses the continuous playback mode for normal images. Adjust the size of ECG waveforms or make other necessary adjustments so that the HI VISION Avius can correctly detect R waves.

116

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 8 - Cine Memory Function

8.6 Playing images When you press the FREEZE key

FREEZE

, the HI VISION Avius starts to play images.

For playback, you can perform the following operations for the recorded images.

8.6.1 Continuous playback ················································································ When you click the Review mode-specific screen button

, the HI VISION Avius

repeatedly plays the images in the cine memory. In the continuous playback mode for normal images, the HI VISION Avius plays all the images in the cine memory in a loop. In the playback mode for automatically detected heartbeats, the HI VISION Avius plays only the images between the first and last R waves in the cine memory in a loop. To change the playback speed, press the Speed mode-specific screen button turn the Multi encoder

Multi encoder

and

.

～

Speed 1/1 Speed 0 ～

# Speed

Speed -1/1

Multi encoder

SPEED : 1 / 1

Playback speed

Figure 8.6-1 Changing the playback speed Pressing the Review mode-specific screen button

again stops continuous loop

playback.

8.6.2 Advancing and rewinding frame by frame ················································ If the freeze status is the normal status (continuous loop playback is not selected) and the function below the window assigned to the trackball is Image memory playback by frame , roll the trackball right and left to advance or rewind the recorded images frame by frame. If an image was recorded with an ECG waveform (playback mode for automatically detected heartbeats), time phase bars appear over the ECG waveform to indicate the time phases of the played image. Use the time phase bars to aid observation. (For details, see 1.1.4 Cine memory playback bar.)

Q1E-EA1203

117

Chapter 8 - Cine Memory Function

Notes on the images recorded in the cine memory and the time phase bars on ECG waveforms If you mount a physiological signal unit on the HI VISION Avius, time phase bars appear on ECG waveforms to indicate the time that the B-mode images were recorded so that you can understand the time phases in the ECG waveforms in the images recorded in the cine memory. The time phase bars are displayed based on the time that recording of the corresponding image began. See the figure below for details. The time required to record one frame of an ultrasound image is 1/frame-rate (seconds). For example, time phase bar 1 corresponds to the image that was recorded during the time indicated by the bold line. Specify as fast a sweep speed as possible for ECG waveforms. If the sweep speed is too slow, the time phase bars might not be correctly positioned in the cine memory.

Time phase bar for image No. 1

Freeze 1

1 3

2

4

5

6

ECG

Image recorded in the cine memory

1

2

3

4

5

6

Image start 1/FR(s) position Image display duration The M-mode or Doppler images recorded in the cine memory might be blurred when played. This problem is due to the characteristics of LCD monitors.

118

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 8 - Cine Memory Function

8.6.3 Displaying image numbers ······································································· If you set the playback speed to 0 (freezes the image) during playback, a number appears for the image. Image numbers are assigned in the sequence that the B-mode images are recorded in the cine memory. The largest number is assigned to the image recorded just before recording ends. Use the image numbers to aid observation. To specify whether to show or hide image numbers, choose Cine Memory on the Tool tab menu to display the Image memory window. In the window, select or clear the Frame No. check box.

8.6.4 Using gain encoders to play images frame by frame ······························· Gain encoders are usually used to adjust the gain. However, you can assign the frame-by-frame playback function of the cine memory to the gain encoders as follows: z

With freeze mode activated, press the mode selection key for the currently selected mode. You can then temporarily switch the function of the gain encoder between gain adjustment and frame-by-frame playback.

z

You can specify the initial function to be assigned to gain encoders. (See (2) Operation page of the General item in 13.2.3 Region Data Setting.)

Q1E-EA1203

119

Chapter 8 - Cine Memory Function

120

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 9 - Optional Physiological Signal Display Function

Chapter 9 - Optional Physiological Signal Display Function An optional physiological signal unit is required to use the physiological signal display function.

9.1 Connecting cables 9.1.1 Connecting cables to the main unit ·························································· Securely connect the ECG lead cable, heart-sound microphone cable, and other measurement cables to the dedicated connectors on the right side of the HI VISION Avius. z

ECG: Connector for the ECG lead cable (standard input)

z

PCG: PCG option is not supported.

z

EXT-ECG: Connector for an ECG lead cable (external input)

Figure 9.1-1 Location of connectors

Q1E-EA1203

121

Chapter 9 - Optional Physiological Signal Display Function

9.1.2 Keeping the ECG clip ··············································································· Please keep the ECG clip by hanging it on the hanger under the keyboard panel, when you do not use it.

Figure 9.1-2 Keeping the ECG clip

9.1.3 Attaching the ECG lead cable to the body················································ Make sure that the ECG lead cable is connected to the HI VISION Avius. Apply electrode gel to the electrodes inside the clips then and attach the clips to the patient using lead II (see the figure below). Check the colors of the terminals at the tip of the ECG lead cable. Connect each terminal to the correct clip. z

Red: Right hand

z

Black: Right leg

z

Green: Left foot

Red: Right hand (small clip)

Green: Left leg Black: Right leg To the main unit Terminal tip: Red/black/green

Electrode of the cable terminal

Figure 9.1-3 Attaching the ECG lead cable

122

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 9 - Optional Physiological Signal Display Function

9.1.4 Selecting a connector for inputting the physiological signal waveforms··· You can select the ECG connector (connector for the ECG lead cable for standard input) or the EXT-ECG connector (connector for an ECG lead cable for external input) to input physiological signal waveforms. (See Figure 9.1-1.) To select a connector, choose the Tool tab menu and then Physiology to display the Physio window. For details, see 13.1.10 Physiology. When you use both the standard input connector and the external input connector, make sure that you select the correct connector for inputting the physiological signal waveforms.

9.2 Displaying physiological signal waveforms To display the physiological signal screen buttons, press the PHYSIO key Adjust amplitude of waveforms

Adjusts positions.

Displays waveforms. # ECG Gain

ECG

Vertically reverses waveforms

# ECG Pos.

PHYSIO

.

Automatically adjusts ECG gain.

Adjusts filters.

ECG Invert

ECG Filter;#

# ECG A.Gain

Figure 9.2-1 Physiological signal screen buttons When you press the ECG screen button

, a green physiological signal waveform

appears in the window. ECG waveform

ON

ECG

OFF Figure 9.2-2 Starting ECG When an ECG waveform is displayed, if the HI VISION Avius recognizes the ECG waveform, the automatically measured heart rate appears in the upper right corner. Q1E-EA1203

123

Chapter 9 - Optional Physiological Signal Display Function

The display range of heart rate is 25 to 545 bpm. In other cases ERR is displayed. To enable continuous playback mode for automatically detected heartbeats for the cine memory, the HI VISION Avius needs to recognize the R waves on the ECG waveforms. When the HI VISION Avius recognizes R waves, the trigger mark in the upper right corner of the window flashes. Heart rate R wave trigger mark ・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

53

・

・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・

ECG waveform

Figure 9.2-3 Displaying the trigger mark and heart rate

9.3 Adjusting the position (height) of the displayed waveform To adjust the vertical position of the displayed waveform, press the ECG Position physiological Multi . You can adjust the signal screen button and then turn the Multi encoder encoder position of ECG waveforms whether the freeze function is on or off. ECG waveform

# ECG Pos.

ECG waveform

Figure 9.3-1 Adjusting the position of a displayed waveform When the Doppler baseline collides with an ECG, display precedence is given to the baseline. Change the display position of the baseline and ECG as necessary.

124

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 9 - Optional Physiological Signal Display Function

9.4 Changing the sweep speed Use the SWEEP SPEED toggle switch

SWEEP SPEED

to change the sweep speed (the length of time

it takes the left edge of a waveform to reach the right edge of the display area). If you move the toggle switch downward, the sweep is slower (longer). When you move the toggle switch upward, the sweep is faster (shorter).

9.5 Adjusting the waveform amplitude Use the ECG Gain physiological signal screen button

to change the waveform

amplitude. ECG waveform

# ECG Gain

Multi encoder

Figure 9.5-1 Adjusting the waveform amplitude

9.6 Vertically reversing waveforms Use the ECG Invert physiological signal screen button

to vertically reverse the

displayed waveform.

ECG Invert

Figure 9.6-1 Vertically reversing a waveform

Q1E-EA1203

125

Chapter 9 - Optional Physiological Signal Display Function

9.7 Automatically adjusting the ECG gain To display a waveform in the specified size (small, medium, or large), press the Auto Gain Multi . screen button (physiological signal) and then turn the Multi encoder encoder

L # ECG A.Gain

Multi encoder

M S OFF ； When you select OFF, the display size is the same as the display size that was selected before OFF was selected. If you use the ECG Gain screen button to automatically turn off automatic gain adjustment, the waveform is displayed based on the amplitude adjusted by using the ECG Gain screen button.

Figure 9.7-1 Automatically adjusting the gain

If you use the ECG Gain screen button

to manually adjust the gain while the Auto

Gain screen button is chosen, the Auto Gain screen button is disabled.

9.8 Adjusting filters To change the filter for the ECG, press the ECG Filter screen button (physiological signal) .

126

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 10 - Needle Guide Line

Chapter 10 - Needle Guide Line Pressing the GUIDE key

GUIDE

displays a dotted line called the needle guide line.

Needle guide line

Figure 10-1 Needle guide line for a convex probe 1 The equipment must be handled by doctors, radiologic technologists, ultrasonographers, clinical laboratory technologists, nurses, or other qualified personnel to whom safety precautions have been carefully explained. 2 If you want to display a needle guide line, you must register one for each probe. Ask the service personnel who installed your unit to register the necessary data. 3 If a needle guide line is displayed, the HI zoom function is not available. 4 When B-mode images are displayed in dual display, if the HI zoom function is executed in a frozen display and a needle guide line is displayed in the real-time display, you cannot use the PAN Zoom key

PAN Zoom

.

5 When a needle guide line is not displayed, if you execute the zoom function and then display a needle guide line, the zoom function is automatically canceled. 6 Needle guide lines give you a rough idea of the direction in which a puncture needle should go. When you insert a puncture needle, always use ultrasound images to check the actual position of the puncture needle. 7 The dotted line of a needle guide line does not start at the body surface. Do not make the mistake of thinking that the dotted line of the needle guide line indicates the required distance of needle puncture. 8 For details about how to install puncture needles and puncture needle support fixtures on probes, see the instruction manual for the probe you are using.

Q1E-EA1203

127

Chapter 10 - Needle Guide Line

The needle guide line differs depending on the probe you are using. You must register the necessary data beforehand to display needle guide lines. When you select a registered probe, the GUIDE key

GUIDE

is lit in white, indicating that a guide

line can be displayed. For some probes and probe adapters, you can change the puncture angle. If you are using that kind of probe or probe adapter, turn the Angle encoder

ODM

to change the

puncture angle. y

When you display a needle guide line, we recommend that you use single display mode.

y

When you insert a puncture needle, adjust the zoom position and view so that the needle guide line does not disappear from the window.

128

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 10 - Needle Guide Line

- Supplement When you use an EUP-U533 to perform brachytherapy for prostate cancer, you can display a grid over B-mode images. To display a grid, register the data for the display beforehand, select the convex side of the EUP-U533 , and press the GUIDE key z

GUIDE

.

The grid is displayed for the special tools for prostate cancer brachytherapy that are supplied exclusively for the equipment. For details about the special tools for prostate cancer brachytherapy that are supplied exclusively for the equipment, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation. Use only the special products for the equipment. If you use other products, the relation between the grid and the puncture needle might be incorrect.

z

Grid details are as follows: ƒ

Small dots (13 x 13) are displayed in a square at 5-mm intervals, as shown in the

ƒ

photograph. Labels A to G (D is the center) are displayed above the grid.

Figure 10-2 Displaying the Grid The grid should be used only as a guide. We will not be held responsible for the use of other manufacturers' products with this grid.

Q1E-EA1203

129

Chapter 10 - Needle Guide Line

1) The puncture needles used for brachytherapy come in different sizes (different diameters). If the diameter of the holes in the Brachygrid does not match the size of your puncture needle, the puncture needle might not correctly fit in a hole in the Brachygrid and the puncture needle might not be correctly displayed against the displayed grid. HI VISION Avius software displays the grid on the assumption that the diameter of the puncture needle is 1 to 1.2 mm. Do not use puncture needles of other sizes. 2) To display the grid, you must register the required data beforehand. Ask the service personnel who installed your unit to register the data. 3) Before you start brachytherapy for prostate cancer, you must display the grid and determine the positions of the EUP-U533, Brachystepper, puncture needle, and Brachygrid as follows: c Correctly install the probe on the Brachystepper. d Display the image of the convex side and determine the image display method (horizontally or vertically reversing the image). e Press the GUIDE key

GUIDE

.

f Align the position of the horizontal moving platform of the Brachystepper to the 60 tick. g Submerge the probe in a tank containing a saline solution and insert the puncture needle into the standard position (4D) of the Brachygrid holes. h Adjust the positions of the Brachystepper and Brachygrid so that the distance between the displayed puncture needle and the 4D dot in the grid is less than ±1 mm. Perform the above procedure correctly by following the instructions provided by the importer of the tools for brachytherapy for prostate cancer. If you fail to follow the importer's instructions, the grid and the puncture needle will not be correctly aligned. 4) The grid represents the transverse section obtained by the probe. Therefore, you cannot check the position of the puncture needle between the body surface and the transverse section. Depending on the insertion operation of the puncture needle, the position of the puncture needle might become incorrect.

130

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 11 - 360 Radial Display Mode

Chapter 11 - 360° Radial Display Mode 11.1 360° radial display When you select a probe that can display 360°, 360° radial display is enabled. (Hereafter, this mode will be called 360° radial display mode.) For details about the probe that can display 360°, see the subsection Field of View in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation. In 360° radial display mode, the window appears as follows: ・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・

Index mark

・ ・

Figure 11.1-1 360° radial display window Index mark

Indicates a specific location on the probe (see Figure 11.1-2). Displaying the index mark in the window makes it easier to understand the relationship between the image and the probe.

Direction of view

RROX or DISTAL is displayed at the bottom of the image display area. PROX indicates a view toward the probe axis. DISTAL indicates a view toward the insertion direction of the probe.

Index mark

Figure 11.1-2 Location of the index mark (EUP-R54AW-19, EUP-R54AW-33)

Q1E-EA1203

131

Chapter 11 - 360 Radial Display Mode

11.2 Special operations in 360° radial display mode This section describes the special operations in 360° radial display mode.

11.2.1 Changing the display width of B-mode images (360°/180°) ··················· You can use the 360°/180° screen button

to change the display width of B-mode

images. 360° display ・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・

360°/180°

360°/180°

・ ・ ・ ・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・ ・

・ ・

360°/180°

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

180° display (lower semicircle)

180° display (upper semicircle)

Figure 11.2-1 Changing the display width of a B-mode image (360°/180°)

11.2.2 Rotating and reversing images ······························································· If the display width of a B-mode image is 360°, you can use the Angle encoder

ODM

to rotate

the displayed image. You can also use the Invert L/R screen button

to change the viewing direction.

PROX. (view toward the probe axis)

DISTAL (view toward the insertion direction the probe)

Figure 11.2-2 Changing the viewing direction y

You cannot rotate images 90° or vertically reverse images. If you want to change the position of an image, use the Angle encoder

y

132

Q1E-EA1203

ODM

.

When the display width of an image is 180°, you cannot rotate the image.

Chapter 11 - 360 Radial Display Mode

11.2.3 Starting M mode or PW mode in 360° display mode ······························ When the display width of a B-mode image is 360°, pressing the M mode selection key PW mode selection key

M

or

while freeze mode is not activated displays the M cursor or PW

PW

cursor in the B-mode image. When you press the UPDATE(NEXT) key

UPDATE (NEXT)

, a B/M-mode

image or B/PW-mode image appears. At this time, the display width of the B-mode image changes to 180° with the M cursor or PW cursor positioned at the center. ・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

When the display width of a B-mode image is 360 degrees,

・ ・ ・

press the M mode selection key

M

.

・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

The M cursor appears in the B-mode image. Specify the ・ ・ ・ ・

position of the M cursor, and press the UPDATE(NEXT) key

UPDATE (NEXT)

.

・ ・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

M cursor

・

・

・

・

・

・

・ ・ ・

・

・

・

・ ・

・

・

・

・

The display width of the B-mode image changes to 180° with

・ ・ ・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・ ・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・ ・

now displayed.

・

・

・

the M cursor, positioned at the center. A B/M-mode image is

・

・ ・

・

・

・

・ ・

Figure 11.2-3 Starting M mode and PW mode in 360° display mode (example: M mode) If an image is displayed in 180°, the operation method is the same as that for normal display. Q1E-EA1203

133

Chapter 11 - 360 Radial Display Mode

11.2.4 Zoom function························································································· If freeze mode is activated, the ROI frame for the HI zoom function cannot move beyond the line where the end scan line of one frame and the start scan line of the next frame meet. Other operations are the same as in other modes. ・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・

・ ・ ・

Location of the index mark

・

90°

・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・

Line where the end scan line of one frame and the start scan line of the next frame meet

・ ・

Figure 11.2-4 Line where the end scan line of one frame and the start scan line of the next frame meet If the display width of a B-mode image is 360°, a time phase difference occurs near the line where the end scan line of one frame and the start scan line of the next frame meet. Avoid performing diagnosis near this area.

134

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks 12.1 Entering comments and annotations You can enter characters and arrows in the window. The following three basic methods are available: (1)

Direct entry Use the on-screen keyboard or an optional alphanumeric keyboard (both of which are collectively referred to as keyboard hereafter) to directly enter comments.

(2)

Entering annotations Select and then enter a desired annotation from the menu of annotations that have been registered beforehand.

(3)

Entering arrows Select and then enter an arrow from the menu of arrows.

To start entry, press the ANNOTATION key

ANNOTATION

. Doing so displays the comment cursor,

annotation entry menu, arrow menu, and on-screen keyboard (see HINT below) so that you can enter comments and annotations. If an optional alphanumeric keyboard is installed, press the Comment key on the alphanumeric keyboard to display the comment cursor so that you can directly enter comments. For details, see the following subsections. The on-screen keyboard does not appear if an optional alphanumeric keyboard is installed.

Q1E-EA1203

135

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

Annotation entry menu

Application

Comment cursor

Tool

Location Liver RHV MHV LHV ：

Clinical Cyst Mass Tumor

Annotation

:

Measure

Common Sitting Shadow

On-screen keyboard Arrow menu

: Arrow menu

Setup

# Size

Bold

Sort

Arrow Menu

Italic

Over Write

Move

Home Posi.

Figure 12.1-1 Window for entering comments and annotations In addition, you can use the Body mark key

PROBE MARK

to sequentially display the comments that

were registered together with body marks when you registered the body marks. In this case, the registered comments appear at the home position specified by using the Home Position screen button

. For details about how to specify the home position, see

13.2.14 Body Mark and 14.2.8 Body Mark item tabbed pages.

136

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

12.1.1 Using the keyboard to directly enter comments ····································· After you press the ANNOTATION key

ANNOTATION

on-screen keyboard. Press the ENTER key

, use the trackball to move the pointer over the

ENTER

to start entering characters. Press the A, B, and C keys. ABC

Moves the pointer

Figure 12.1-2 Using the on-screen keyboard to directly enter a comment If you want to move the comment cursor, press the TRACK BALL key Character input

TRACK BALL

and assign

to the trackball (the assigned function is displayed at the bottom of the

window). When you have determined the comment input position, press the TRACK BALL key

TRACK BALL

again and reassign Pointer

Changes to

to the trackball.

Changes to

Figure 12.1-3 Moving the comment cursor To enter lower-case characters and symbols, hold down the shft key and then press letter keys. When you hold down the ctrl key and then press letter keys corresponding to an arrow, you can enter one of the arrows shown on the keyboard. Letter keys corresponding to an arrow : I, O, K, L, C, V, B, N If an optional alphanumeric keyboard is installed When you press the Comment key, the comment cursor appears in the window. Enter characters from the keyboard.

Q1E-EA1203

137

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

12.1.2 Entering annotations··············································································· To display the annotation entry menu, press the ANNOTATION key

ANNOTATION

. Use the trackball to

move the pointer to the desired word in the menu and then press the ENTER key

ENTER

.

When a yellow frame encloses the selected word, use the trackball to move the word to the desired position and then press the ENTER key

ENTER

.

R-kidney R-kidney

R-kidney

R-kidney R-kidney

R-kidney

Figure 12.1-4 Entering an annotation

12.1.3 Entering arrows ······················································································ To display the arrow menu, press the ANNOTATION key

ANNOTATION

. Use the trackball to move the

pointer to the desired arrow in the arrow menu and then press the ENTER key

ENTER

.

The selected arrow appears in the window. Use the trackball to move the arrow to the desired position and then press the ENTER key

ENTER

.

R-kidney

Figure 12.1-5 Entering an arrow

138

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

12.1.4 Using screen buttons to change settings ··············································· Pressing the ANNOTATION key (1)

(2)

# Size

Bold

Sort

Arrow Menu

(6)

(7)

ANNOTATION

Italic

displays the following screen buttons. (3)

(4)

(5)

Over Write

Move

Home Posi.

Figure 12.1-6 Screen buttons displayed when the ANNOTATION key is pressed (1)

Changing the size of comments: Size screen button To change the size of the comment in four stages, press the Size screen button Multi . and then turn the Multi encoder encoder

(2)

Changing fonts: Bold screen button

, Italic screen button

You can change the character style of the comment you are entering. Press the Bold screen button

to display characters in bold. Press the Italic screen button

to display characters in italic. (3)

Changing the entry mode: Over Write screen button Use the Over Write screen button to switch between typing over existing characters and inserting characters without deleting any existing characters. Overtype mode ABCDE

X key

Insert mode Over Write

ABXDE

ABCDE

When Over Write is on

X key

ABXCDE

When Over Write is off

Figure 12.1-7 Changing the entry mode (4)

Moving comments: Move screen button After pressing the TRACK BALL key bottom of the window to Character input

TRACK BALL

to change the trackball priority at the and then moving the comment cursor to

an entered comment, press the Move screen button

or the ENTER key

ENTER

.

You can now move the comment by using the trackball to move the comment to a new position and pressing the ENTER key

ENTER

to fix the position.

ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

Figure 12.1-8 Moving a comment

Q1E-EA1203

139

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

(5)

Specifying the home position: Home Position screen button Use this screen button to specify the position of the comment cursor that appears when you press the ANNOTATION key

ANNOTATION

or the Comment key.

After moving the comment cursor to the desired position, press the Home Position screen button

to register this position as the home position of the comment cursor.

The next time you press the ANNOTATION key

ANNOTATION

or the Comment key, the

comment cursor appears at the home position you have specified. (6)

Sorting the words in the annotation entry menu: Sort screen button Use the Sort screen button to sort the words in the annotation entry menu by name or by purpose (for example, by part of the body or symptom)

(7)

Displaying the arrow menu: Arrow Menu screen button Use the Arrow Menu screen button to show or hide the arrow menu.

Arrow menu

Arrow Menu

Arrow Menu displayed

Figure 12.1-9 Displaying the arrow menu

140

Q1E-EA1203

Arrow Menu hidden

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

12.1.5 Deleting comments················································································· (1)

Deleting all comments When you press the CLEAR key

(2)

CLEAR

, all displayed comments are deleted.

Deleting a character Place the comment cursor after the character you want to delete. On the on-screen keyboard, click the bksp button. On the optional alphanumeric keyboard, press the Backspace key. The character before the comment cursor is deleted. When the optional alphanumeric keyboard is installed, you can use the Del key to delete the character that is displayed after the comment cursor. To make fine adjustments to correctly position the comment cursor, use the arrow keys on the on-screen keyboard.

(3)

Deleting a selected comment (when the optional alphanumeric keyboard is installed) Place the comment cursor anywhere in the comment you want to delete and press the ENTER key

ENTER

to select the comment. On the alphanumeric keyboard, press the Del

key. The selected comment is deleted. bksp key or Del key

XYZ

XYZ

XYZ

ABCDE

ABCDE

Figure 12.1-10 Deleting a comment

(4)

Deleting a line (when the optional alphanumeric keyboard is installed) Place the comment cursor anywhere in the line you want to delete. On the alphanumeric keyboard, press the Del key while holding down the Shift key. The line in the comment is deleted.

12.1.6 Ending entry of comments······································································ After you have pressed the ANNOTATION key ANNOTATION key

ANNOTATION

ANNOTATION

to start entering comments, pressing the

again ends the entry process.

If you pressed the Comment key on an optional alphanumeric keyboard to start entering comments, then pressing the Comment key again ends the entry process.

Q1E-EA1203

141

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

12.1.7 Types of annotations··············································································· Each application uses a different set of annotations. You can change the registered annotations. For details about how to register annotations, see 13.2.13 Annotation and (4) Annotation page in 14.2.1 General item tabbed pages. The following tables list the annotations that are registered by default. Table 12.1-1 Annotations - 1 Region Abdomen

Category Location

Common

Clinical

142

Q1E-EA1203

Term

Full name

Liver

Liver

RHV

Right Hepatic Vein

MHV

Middle Hepatic Vein

LHV

Left Hepatic Vein

PV

Portal Vein

IVC

Inferior Vena Cava

Ao

Aorta

GB

Gall bladder

CBD

Common Bile Duct

BD

Bile Duct

SMA

Superior Mesenteric Artery

SMV

Superior Mesenteric Vein

CA

Celiac Artery

Pancreas

Pancreas

MPD

Main Pancreatic Duct

Spleen

Spleen

SPA

Splenic Artery

SPV

Splenic Vein

R-Kidney

Right Kidney

L-Kidney

Left Kidney

Stomach

Stomach

Bladder

Bladder

Prostate

Prostate

Uterus

Uterus

Sitting

Sitting

Shadow

Acoustic Shadow

Cyst

Cyst

Mass

Mass

Tumor

Tumor

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

Region

Category

Term

Full name

HCC

Hepatocellular Carcinoma

Met

Metastasis

Fatty

Fatty

Abscess

Abscess

Ascites

Ascites

Polyp

Polyp

Stone

Stone

Table 12.1-2 Annotations - 2 Region Cardiac

Category Location

Term

Full name

LA

Left Atrium

LV

Left Ventricle

RA

Right Atrium

RV

Right Ventricle

IVS

Interventricular Septum

LVPW

Posterior Wall of Left Ventricle

LAA

Left Atrial Appendage

LVOT

Left Ventricular Outflow Tract

LVIT

Left Ventricular Inflow Tract

RVOT

Right Ventricular Outflow Tract

RVIT

Right Ventricular Inflow Tract

MV

Mitral Valve

AML

Anterior Mitral Leaflet

PML

Posterior Mitral Leaflet

TV

Tricuspid Valve

AV

Aortic Valve

NCC

Non-Coronary Cusp

LCC

Left Coronary Cusp

RCC

Right Coronary Cusp

Ao

Aorta

AAo

Ascending Aorta

DAo

Descending Aorta

Arch

Aortic Arch

PV

Pulmonary Valve

PA

Pulmonary Artery

Q1E-EA1203

143

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

Region

Category

Common

Clinical

Stress

144

Q1E-EA1203

Term

Full name

SVC

Superior Vena Cava

IVC

Inferior Vena Cava

RCA

Right Coronary Artery

LCA

Left Coronary Artery

LMT

Left Main Truck Coronary Artery

LAD

Left Anterior Descending

LCX

Left Circumflex

Diastole

Diastole

Systole

Systole

SAx

Short Axis

LAx

Long Axis

Away

Away

Toward

Toward

Pre-Op.

Pre-Operation

Post-Op.

Post-Operation

PE

Pericardial Effusion

Vege.

Vegetation

Thrombus

Thrombus

Myxoma

Myxoma

Tumor

Tumor

SAM

Systolic Anterior Motion

Hypo

Hypokinesis

Akinesis

Akinesis

Aneurysm

Aneurysm

VSD

Ventricular Septal Defect

ASD

Atrial Septal Defect

PDA

Patent Ductus Arteriosus

Entry

Entry

Reentry

Reentry

TL

True Lumen

FL

False Lumen

IF

Intimal Flap

Rest

Rest

Exercise

Exercise

L-Dose

Low Dose

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

Region

Category

Term

Full name

H-Dose

High Dose

Peak

Peak Dose

Post

Post Dose

Recovery

Recovery

Table 12.1-3 Annotations - 3 Region

Category

Vascular (Head/Neck) Location

Common

Term

Full name

R-CCA

Right Common Carotid Artery

R-ICA

Right Internal Carotid Artery

R-ECA

Right External Carotid Artery

R-Bif.

Right Bifurcation

R-Bulb

Right Carotid Bulb

R-VA

Right Vertebral Artery

R-SA

Right Subclavian Artery

R-JV

Right Jugular Vein

R-MCA

Right Middle Cerebral Artery

R-ACA

Right Anterior Cerebral Artery

R-PCA

Right Posterior Cerebral Artery

R-OA

Right Ophtalmic Artery

L-CCA

Left Common Carotid Artery

L-ICA

Left Internal Carotid Artery

L-ECA

Left External Carotid Artery

L-Bif.

Left Bifurcation

L-Bulb

Left Carotid Bulb

L-VA

Left Vertebral Artery

L-SA

Left Subclavian Artery

L-JV

Left Jugular Vein

L-MCA

Left Middle Cerebral Artery

L-ACA

Left Anterior Cerebral Artery

L-PCA

Left Posterior Cerebral Artery

L-OA

Left Ophtalmic Artery

Basilar

Basilar Artery

VO

Vertebral Ostium

Dist.

Distal

Prox.

Proximal

Q1E-EA1203

145

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

Region

Category

Clinical

Term

Full name

IMC

Intimal Medial Compｌex

Echolucent

Echolucent

Echogenic

Echogenic

Plaque

Plaque

Calcif.

Calcification

Ulcer

Ulcer

Stenosis

Stenosis

LN

Lymph Node

Table 12.1-4 Annotations - 4 Region Peripheral Vascular

Category Location

(arterial)

Common

146

Q1E-EA1203

Term

Full name

Ao

Aorta

CIA

Common Iliac Artery

R-EIA

Right External Iliac Artery

R-IIA

Right Internal Iliac Artery

R-CFA

Right Common Femoral Artery

R-SFA

Right Superficial Femoral Artery

R-DFA

Right Deep Femoral Artery

R-Pop.A

Right Popliteal Artery

R-Peroneal A

Right Peroneal (Fibular)Veins

R-PTA

Right Posterior Tibial Artery

R-ATA

Right Anterior Tibial Artery

R-DPA

Right Dorsalis Pedis(Pedal) Artery

L-EIA

Left External Iliac Artery

L-IIA

Left Internal Iliac Artery

L-CFA

Left Common Femoral Artery

L-SFA

Left Superficial Femoral Artery

L-DFA

Left Deep Femoral Artery

L-Pop.A

Left Popliteal Artery

L-Peroneal A

Left Peroneal Artery

L-PTA

Left Posterior Tibial Artery

L-ATA

Left Anterior Tibial Artery

L-DPA

Left Dorsalis Pedis(Pedal) Artery

Dist.

Distal

Prox.

Proximal

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

Region

Category Clinical

Term

Full name

ASO

Arteriosclerosis Obliterans

TAO

Thromboangitis Obliterans

Stenosis

Stenosis

Calcif.

Calcification

Baker Cyst

Baker's Cyst

Table 12.1-5 Annotations - 5 Region Peripheral Vascular (venous)

Category Location

Term

Full name

IVC

Inferior Vena Cava

CIV

Common Iliac Vein

R-EIV

Right External Iliac Vein

R-IIV

Right Internal Iliac Vein

R-CFV

Right Common Femoral Vein

R-SFV

Right Superficial Femoral Vein

R-DFV

Right Deep Femoral Vein

R-Pop.V

Right Popliteal Vein

R-Peroneal V

Right Peroneal (Fibular)Veins

R-PTV

Right Posterior Tibial Veins

R-ATV

Right Anterior Tibial Veins

R-DPV

Right Dorsalis Pedis(Pedal) Veins

R-GSV

Right Great Saphenous Vein

R-LSV

Right Lesser Saphenous Vein

R-Gast.V

Right Gastrocnemius Veins

R-Sol.V

Right Soleus Veins

L-EIV

Left External Iliac Vein

L-IIV

Left Internal Iliac vein

L-CFV

Left Common Femoral Vein

L-SFV

Left Superficial Femoral Vein

L-DFV

Left Deep Femoral Vein

L-Pop.V

Left Popliteal Vein

L-Peroneal V

Left Peroneal (Fibular) Veins

L-PTV

Left Posterior Tibial Veins

L-ATV

Left Anterior Tibial Veins

L-DPV

Left Dorsalis Pedis(Pedal) Vein

L-GSV

Left Great Saphenous Vein

Q1E-EA1203

147

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

Region

Category

Common

Clinical

Term

Full name

L-LSV

Left Lesser Saphenous Vein

L-Gast.V

Left Gastrocnemius Veins

L-Sol.V

Left Soleus Veins

Dist.

Distal

Prox.

Proximal

Perforat.

Perforating Vein

Dodd

Dodd Perforating Vein

Hunter.

Hunterian Perforating Vein

Cockett's

Cockett's Perforating Vein

Boyd's

Boyd's Perforating Vein

Edema

Edema

Baker Cyst

Baker's Cyst

Table 12.1-6 Annotations - 6 Region

Category

Vascular (Upper limbs) Location

148

Q1E-EA1203

Term

Full name

IA

Innominate Artery

R-SA

Right Subcravian Artery

R-ITA

Right Internal Thoracic Artery

R-Axill.A

Right Axillary Artery

R-Brach.A

Right Brachial Artery

R-Radial A

Right Radial Artery

R-Ulnar A

Right Ulnar Artery

R-ITV

Right Internal Thoracic Vein

R-Axill.V

Right Axillary Vein

R-Brach.V

Right Brachial Veins

R-Radial V

Right Radial Veins

R-Ulnar V

Right Ulnar Veins

L-SA

Left Subclavian Artery

L-ITA

Left Internal Thoracic Artery

L-Axill.A

Left Axillary Artery

L-Brach.A

Left Brachial Artery

L-Radial A

Left Radial Artery

L-Ulnar A

Left Ulnar Artery

L-ITV

Left Internal Thoracic Vein

L-Axill.V

Left Axillary Vein

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

Region

Category

Common

Clinical

Term

Full name

L-Brach.V

Left Brachial Veins

L-Radial V

Left Radial Veins

L-Ulnar V

Left Ulnar Veins

Digital A

Digital Arteries

Digital V

Digital Veins

Dist.

Distal

Prox.

Proximal

A-V Shunt

Arteriovenous Shunt

Stenosis

Stenosis

Calcif.

Calcification

Table 12.1-7 Annotations - 7 Region OB / Gyn

Category Location

Term

Full name

Uterus

Uterus

GS

Gestational Sac

Yolk Sac

Yolk Sac

Placenta

Placenta

Cord

Umbilical Cord

UmA

Umbilical Artery

UmV

Umbilical Vein

Spine

Spine

Stomach

Stomach

Kidney

Kidney

Heart

Heart

Ao

Aorta

AAo

Ascending Aorta

DAo

Descending Aorta

DA

Ductus Arteriosus

PA

Pulmonary Artery

Cervix

Cervix

Fetus

Fetus

Bladder

Bladder

Fundus

Fundus

UA

Uterine Artery

Douglas

Douglas

Q1E-EA1203

149

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

Region

Category

Common

Clinical

Term

Full name

Ovary

Ovary

Follicle

Follicle

R-

Right-

L-

Left-

Ant.

Anterior

Post.

Posterior

Tumor

Tumor

Myoma

Myoma

Cyst

Cyst

Choco.Cyst

Chocolate Cyst

Dermoid

Dermoid

IUD

Intrauterine Device

Mole

Mole

Ectopic

Ectopic Pregnancy

IUGR

Intrauterine Growth Retardation

TwinA

Twin A

TwinB

Twin B

Table 12.1-8 Annotations - 8 Region Urology

Category Location

Common

150

Q1E-EA1203

Term

Full name

Prostate

Prostate

SV

Seminal Vesicle

Duct

Duct

Ej.Duct

Ejaculatory Duct

Testis

Testis

Scrotum

Scrotum

Penis

Penis

Urethra

Urethra

Bladder

Bladder

Kidney

Kidney

PB

Pubic Bone

Rectum

Rectum

R-

Right-

L-

Left-

Ant.

Anterior

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

Region

Category

Clinical

Term

Full name

Post.

Posterior

SAG

Sagittal

Trans.

Transverse

Pre-Op.

Pre-Operation

Post-Op.

Post-Operation

BPH

Benign Prostate Hypertrophy

PC

Prostatic Cancer

Tumor

Tumor

Mass

Mass

Cyst

Cyst

Amyloid

Amyloid

Table 12.1-9 Annotations - 9 Region Breast

Category Location

Common

Clinical

Term

Full name

Mamma

Mammary Gland

Nipple

Nipple

Duct

Duct

Cooper

Suspensory Ligament Of Cooper

Fat

Fat

Skin

Skin

Muscle

Greater Pectoral Muscle

Rib

Rib

LN

Lymph Node

R-

Right-

L-

Left-

Pre-Op.

Pre-Operation

Post-Op.

Post-Operation

Cyst

Cyst

Tumor

Tumor

Mass

Mass

FA

Fibroadenoma

Papilloma

Papilloma

Lymphoma

Lymphoma

Lipoma

Lipoma

IDC

Invasive Ductal Carcinoma

Q1E-EA1203

151

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

Region

Category

Term

Full name

DCIS

Ductal Carcinoma in Situ

Mastopathy

Mastopathy

Table 12.1-10 Annotations - 10 Region Thyroid

Category Location

Common

Clinical

152

Q1E-EA1203

Term

Full name

Thyroid

Thyroid

Trachea

Trachea

Esoph.

Esophagus

Parathyr.

Parathyroid

LN

Lymph Node

Thyr.A

Thyroid Artery

Thyr.V

Thyroid Vein

R-CCA

Right Common Carotid Artery

L-CCA

Left Common Carotid Artery

ICA

Internal Carotid Artery

R-

Right-

L-

Left-

Lobe

Lobe

Superior

Superior

Middle

Middle

Inferior

Inferior

Cyst

Cyst

Tumor

Tumor

Mass

Mass

Goiter

Goiter

Amyloid

Amyloid Goiter

Adenoma

Adenoma

Follicular

Follicular

Basedow

Basedow Disease

Hashimoto

Hashimoto Disease

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

Table 12.1-11 Annotations - 11 Region Orthopedics

Category Shoulder

Limb

Hand/Foot

Term

Full name

Shoulder

Shoulder

Supraspin.

Supraspinatus Muscle

SSpT

Supraspinatus Tendon

Infraspin.

Infraspinatous Muscle

ISpT

Infraspinatous Tendon

Subscap.

Subscapularis Muscle

SScT

Subscapularis Tendon

Biceps

Biceps Longus Brachii Tendon

CAL

Coraco Acromial Ligament

SDB

Subdeltoid Bursa

SAB

Subacromial Bursa

Rotator Cuff

Rotator Cuff

Hip

Hip

Arm

Arm

Thigh

Thigh

Knee

Knee

Calf

Calf

Patella

Patella

Pat.T

Patellar Tendon

Meniscus

Meniscus

Quadriceps

Quadriceps Tendon

MCL

Medial Collateral Ligament

Soleus

Soleus Muscle

MG

Medial Gastrocnemius Muscle

LG

Lateral Gastrocnemius Muscle

Fib.LT

Fibular(Peroneus) Longus Tendon

Fib.BT

Fibular(Peroneus) Brevis Tendon

Wrist

Wrist

Ankle

Ankle

TFT

Talus Fibula Tract

CFT

Calcaneal Fibula Tract

DL

Deltoid Ligament

FTL

Fibulotibial Ligament

TFL

Talofibular Ligament

Q1E-EA1203

153

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

Region

Category

Common

Clinical

154

Q1E-EA1203

Term

Full name

CT

Calcaneus Tendon

R-

Right-

L-

Left-

Internal

Internal

External

External

Medial

Medial

Lateral

Lateral

Muscle

Muscle

Ligament

Ligament

Tendon

Tendon

Aponeurosis

Aponeurosis

Cartilage

Cartilage

Joint

Joint

Nerve

Nerve

Rupture

Rupture

Laceration

Laceration

Tenosynovitis

Tenosynovitis

Calcifi.

Calcification

Effusion

Effusion

Nodule

Nodule

Hematoma

Hematoma

Baker cyst

Baker's Cyst

Ganglion

Ganglion

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

12.2 Entering body marks 12.2.1 Displaying body marks ··········································································· The following methods are for displaying body marks: (1)

Specifying the initial body mark You can specify the initial body mark that will be displayed when you select an application. To display the initial body mark, register the desired body mark when you register body marks. Then, on the Setup menu, choose Region Data Setting to display the Region Data Setting window. On the Body Mark page of the window, select the Display ON check box for Body Mark. For details about how to specify the initial body mark, see (15) Body Mark page of the Body Mark item in 13.2.3 Region Data Setting and 13.2.14 Body Mark.

(2)

Using the Body mark key Use the Body mark key

PROBE MARK

PROBE MARK

to display body marks (center of the knob) to sequentially display the registered

body marks. (3)

Using screen buttons to select body marks You can display a list of body marks as screen buttons so that you can select and display desired body marks.

12.2.2 Using the Body mark key to display body marks···································· You can register a maximum of 32 steps of body marks for the Body mark key press of the Body mark key

PROBE MARK

PROBE MARK

. Each

allows you to sequentially call a registered body mark.

You can also register comments for the Body mark key

PROBE MARK

at the same time. In this case,

when you display a body mark, the registered comment appears at the registered home position. For details about how to register body marks for the Body mark key, see 13.2.14 Body Mark and 14.2.8 Body Mark item tabbed pages. When you press the Body mark key When you press the Body mark key

PROBE MARK

, the registered body marks appear in sequence.

PROBE MARK

after the last registered step is displayed, the body

mark and the comment disappear. To specify whether to show or hide step numbers, on the Setup menu, choose Region Data Setting to display the Region Data Setting window. On the Body Mark page of the window, select or clear the Display ON check box for Step No. For details, see (15) Body Mark page of the Body Mark item in 13.2.3 Region Data Setting.

Q1E-EA1203

155

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

DEF

ABC NO.1

XYZ

NO.2

NO.8

Erased

Step No.

Figure 12.2-1 Using the Body mark key (when eight steps are registered)

12.2.3 Moving and rotating probe marks ··························································· When Probe mark

TRACK BALL

is assigned to the TRACK BALL key

, use the trackball to move

the probe mark inside a body mark to the desired position.

Trackball

Figure 12.2-2 Moving a probe mark To rotate a probe mark, turn the Probe mark encoder When Probe mark

TRACK BALL

PROBE MARK

(rim of the knob).

is assigned to the TRACK BALL key

probe mark by holding down the ENTER key

ENTER

, you can also rotate a

and rolling the trackball up and down.

PROBE MARK

Figure 12.2-3 Adjusting the angle of a probe mark Probe marks might not appear in some body marks for the heart.

156

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

12.2.4 Selecting the body mark subject to operation during dual display in B mode ······································································································ During dual display in B mode, you can usually perform an operation for the body mark in the image that was a bright orientation mark, such as the selecting body mark or the manipulating the probe mark. You can use the Body mark L key

L

and Body mark R key

R

to switch the body mark

or probe mark you want to manipulate. Orientation marks

A bright orientation mark Body mark you can manipulate (the one in the image with a bright orientation mark)

Figure 12.2-4 Selecting the body mark to be manipulated during dual display in B mode

12.2.5 Displaying the label UP in body marks ··················································· If an optional alphanumeric keyboard is installed and Probe mark

is assigned to the

trackball, pressing the U key displays the label UP in the upper left corner of the body mark. Pressing the U key again removes the label UP.

U

UP

ＵＰ

Figure 12.2-5 Displaying label UP in a body mark

12.2.6 Manipulating probe marks for a radial scan ··········································· When you select certain types of body marks and then turn the Probe mark encoder

PROBE MARK

, the

probe mark will be rotated for radial scanning. Note, however, that if you use the trackball to move the probe mark, the probe mark is reset for normal scanning. Pressing the UNDO key

UNDO

allows the probe mark to be rotated again for radial scanning.

Figure 12.2-6 Body marks for radial scanning Q1E-EA1203

157

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

12.2.7 Using screen buttons to change settings················································ Press the Body Mark mode-specific screen button

to perform the following

operations: z

Directly select registered body marks.

z

Display a group of body mark screen buttons for the desired part of the body and select a body mark from the group.

z

Move body marks.

z

Specify whether to show or hide body marks.

Pressing the Body Mark screen button displays the menu of body marks shown in the following figure. (1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Body Mark

▲

Mark.Move

BodyMark Region

▼

Mark.Disp

(6)

(5)

PosReset

Pressing the Body Parts screen button displays the list of body parts shown in the following figure. (1)

(7)

(3)

(4)

Body Mark

Abdomen

Breast

Head/Neck

Urology

Cardiovascular

▲

Mark.Move

BodyMark Region

Organ

Upper limb

Lower limb

Obstetrics

Gynecology

▼

Mark.Disp

(6)

(5)

PosReset

Choosing a body part displays the menu of body marks shown in the following figure. (1)

(8)

(3)

(4)

Body Mark

▲

Mark.Move

BodyMark Region

▼

Mark.Disp

(6)

(5)

PosReset

Figure 12.2-7 Screen buttons (1)

Returning to the Mode-specific screen buttons: Body Mark menu screen button Use the Body Mark menu screen button to return to the menu displayed before any body mark screens button were pressed.

(2)

Selecting body marks: Body mark screen buttons Pressing a body mark screen button allows you to directly select the corresponding registered body mark and comment. The number in the upper right corner of the body mark is the step number that was assigned when the body mark was registered. The screen buttons display the registered body marks.

158

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

(3)

Changing pages: Page scroll screen buttons Use these screen buttons to scroll through the pages listing body mark screen buttons that are displayed at the left.

(4)

Moving body marks: Mark Move screen button

, PosReset screen

button Use the Mark Move screen button

to enable you to use the trackball to

move the displayed body mark. When you have determined the position of the body mark, press the ENTER key

ENTER

. To cancel the operation, press the UNDO key

UNDO

to return

the body mark to the previous position. While a body mark is being moved, the PosReset screen button Pressing the PosReset

appears below the Mark Move screen button screen button

.

returns the body mark returns to the

initial position.

Mark.Move

Trackball

Figure 12.2-8 Moving a body mark (5)

Showing or hiding body marks: Mark Display screen button Use the Mark Display screen button to show or hide body marks.

Mark.Disp

Figure 12.2-9 Showing or hiding a body mark (6)

Displaying a menu of body parts: Body Mark Region screen button Use the Body Mark Region screen button to select a body mark from a list to display it. Choosing this screen button displays the menu of body parts. When you select a body part, the corresponding menu of body marks appears.

(7)

Selecting a body part to display body marks: Menu of body parts Select a body part for which you want to display a body mark. When you press the screen button for the desired body part, the list of related body mark screen buttons appears.

Q1E-EA1203

159

Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks

(8)

Selecting body marks: Menu of body marks Pressing the screen button for a body mark displays the body mark in the window. The body marks for a fetus come in two layers. When you press a body mark screen button in the second layer, the body mark appears in the window.

160

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

Chapter 13 - Tab menus The tab menus are set of menus used to select functionality that does not have a dedicated key on the keyboard panel and to specify settings. The tab menus are usually hidden at the left side of the screen, and only the tabs, each marked X, are displayed. If you press the POINTER key

POINTER

to display the pointer and then move the pointer over a tab

(X), the group name of that tab menu is displayed on its tab. If you then press the ENTER key ENTER

, the contents of the tab menu are displayed.

This section describes how to set up the ultrasound diagnostic scanner. For details about other items, see corresponding explanation sections.

Application

Application Choose this tab to switch the application you are using for diagnosis. For details, see Chapter 14 - Application Function.

Tool

Tool Choose this tab to display the Tool menu. For details, see 13.1 Tool tab menu.

Measure Annotation

Measure Choose this tab to select and initiate measurement. For details, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Measurement. Annotation Choose this tab to enter text. For details, see 12.1 Entering comments and annotations.

Setup

Setup Choose this tab to display the Setup menu. For details, see 13.2 Setup tab menu.

Figure 13-1 Tab menu groups

Q1E-EA1203

161

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

13.1 Tool tab menu The following figure shows the expanded Tool tab menu.

Remove Hardware Simplified Transfer

Video/ORIG

Annotation

Physiology

Measure

DVD-RAM USB Memory USB HDD Filing Cine Memory Display

Tool

See 13.1.7. See 13.1.8. See 13.1.9. See 13.1.10. See 13.1.11.

Manual Edit Patient Mode Adjust Media

Application

See 13.1.1. See 13.1.2. See 13.1.3. See 13.1.4. See 13.1.5. See 13.1.6.

Setup

Figure 13.1-1 Tool tab menu

13.1.1 Manual···································································································· Choose Manual to display an instruction manual on the screen. Select the instruction manual you want to display in the Instruction Manual Selection window, and then press the Open button. For details about the viewing of the Instruction Manual, see the section Viewing instruction manuals in the chapter Operation Procedures in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation.

13.1.2 Edit Patient ····························································································· Choose Edit Patient to edit the patient information during an examination. When the Patient Information window appears, edit the necessary items. After editing, press the Save button and then the Close button. For details about the Patient Information window, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation.

13.1.3 Mode Adjust···························································································· Choose Mode Adjust to start the functionality for adjusting modes. For details, see 15.5.5 Mode adjust function.

162

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

13.1.4 Media······································································································ (1)

Media window Displays disk information for each medium.

[1]

[2]

Figure 13.1-2 Media window (when “Media” is selected)

[3]

[4]

Figure 13.1-3 Media window (when a drive or external medium is selected)

Q1E-EA1203

163

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

Table 13.1-1 Setting items in the Media window No [1]

Item Folder

Description Displays connected media. To display the sub-contents, click the plus mark at the beginning of each item or double-click the item. If there is no medium in the drive, no information is displayed in the Media window. Network folders and DICOM folders are not displayed.

[2]

Details

Displays detail information of each connected medium.

(when “Media” is

1. Name

selected)

2. Avail. Images/Clips/Volumes/Time The approximate number of Single Images (images), Multi Images (clips), and 3D Volume Data (volumes), and time for long time recording (option) that can be saved using the currently selected format. 3. Free Space 4. Total Size

[3]

Details

Displays the contents of the selected drive or medium.

(when a drive or

1. Name

external medium is

2. Type

selected)

3. Size 4. Modified 5. Attributes

[4]

(2)

Format Media

Used to format a connected external media.

Format window It is possible to format a DVD, USB memory device, or USB HDD that is connected to the ultrasound diagnostic scanner. For the details, see the procedure below. y

When you format a DVD, USB memory device, or USB HDD, all the data will be erased.

y

Do not turn off the equipment while you are formatting a medium. If you do, the DVD, USB memory device, or USB HDD being formatted may become unusable.

164

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

„ Procedure for formatting a DVD 1 Insert the DVD-RAM into the drive. Press the EJECT key

EJECT

to expose the tray and place the DVD on the tray.

2 Open the Media window and select the DVD-RAM. Then, press the Format Media button. 3 When the DVD format window appears, perform the following operations: Drive

:

Check whether the Drive Name is correctly displayed.

Format Type

:

Select UDF 2.00.

Volume label

:

Enter a volume name (for example, DVD).

Execute physical

:

Select this check box.

format

Figure 13.1-4 Window for formatting a DVD

4 Press the Start button. A confirmation dialog box asking you whether you want to format the DVD appears.

5 In the dialog box, press the Yes button. Formatting, which takes about 35 to 55 minutes, begins.

6 When the DVD is successfully formatted, press the Close button. Q1E-EA1203

165

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

„ Procedure for formatting a USB memory device and a USB HDD 1 Connect the USB memory device or USB HDD you want to format to the equipment. 2 Open the Media window. 3 Select the USB memory or USB HDD. Then, press the Format Media button. 4 The USB memory format window or USB HDD format window appears. Perform the following operations: Capacity

:

Check whether the size of the connected USB memory or USB HDD is correctly displayed.

File system

:

Select FAT32.

Allocation unit size

:

Select Default allocation size.

Volume label

:

Enter a volume name (for example, USB1).

Quick Format

:

Clear this check box.

Figure 13.1-5 Window for formatting a USB memory device and a USB HDD

5 Press the Start button. Formatting begins.

166

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

6 When the USB memory or USB HDD is successfully formatted, press the Close button.

13.1.5 Remove Hardware ················································································· Choose Remove Hardware to remove a USB memory devcie or USB HDD. When the Safely Remove Hardware window appears, perform the following procedure:

1

In the Safely Remove Hardware window, select the hardware device you want to remove from the list, and then choose the Stop button. The Stop a Hardware device window appears.

2

In the Stop a Hardware device window, choose the OK button. The hardware device can now be removed.

3

Choose the Close button to close the window.

13.1.6 Simplified Transfer·················································································· When DVD-RAM, USB Memory, or USB HDD is selected, the current screen is transferred to the specified destination and saved as a Single Image. This function can be selected regardless of the Freeze mode setting (On or Off). Application Tool Measure Annotation

Transfer destination

Simplified Transfer DVD-RAM USB Memory USB HDD

Setup

Figure 13.1-6 Simplified Transfer

Q1E-EA1203

167

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

13.1.7 Filing ······································································································· Choose Filing to temporarily change the filing settings. For details, see (4) Temporarily changing settings in 15.3 Saving examination data. If you do not change the settings on this menu, data is saved using the settings specified in the Set Up Filing window (Expand the Setup tab menu and then choose Filing).

13.1.8 Cine Memory ·························································································· Choose Cine Memory to specify the cine memory settings. (3)

(1) (2)

Figure 13.1-7 Cine Memory window Table 13.1-2 Setting items in the Cine Memory window No (1)

Item B split

Description This item, which is enabled for B mode, allows you to select how to use the amount of cine memory. One option is to split the window vertically and to use the capacity for independent recording or review in each window. The other option is to use the capacity for a single window that has not been split.

(2)

Frame No.

Displays the frame number of the cine memory.

(3)

B:M/D split

Select the ratio between the cine memory for a B-mode image, and M-mode and Doppler mode images.

168

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

13.1.9 Display···································································································· Choose Display to specify reverse video mode (negative or positive) and the background brightness level. (1)

(2)

Figure 13.1-8 Display window Table 13.1-3 Setting items in the Display window No

Item

(1)

Gray Invert

Description Switch the display mode between negative and positive by selecting the Negative or Positive radio button.

Negative (2)

Background Level

Positive

Change the background brightness level by selecting the appropriate radio button.

Q1E-EA1203

169

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

13.1.10 Physiology ···························································································· Select standard input (HI VISION Avius) or external input (external device) as the input source for the physiological signal waveforms.

Figure 13.1-9 Physio window

13.1.11 Video/ORIG ························································································· It displays DVD video recorder Playback Window. The screen button for DVD video recorder is displayed, allowing you to remotely control the DVD video recorder. Playback mode ends if you choose this item again during playback. For details, see Chapter 17 - Optional DVD Video Recorder.

170

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

13.2 Setup tab menu The following figure shows the expanded Setup tab menu.

●Right

See 13.2.10. See 13.2.11. See 13.2.12. See 13.2.13. See 13.2.14. See 13.2.15. See 13.2.16.

Screen Button Color Map Biopsy Guide Annotation Body Mark Data Backup Entry Option

Measure Annotation

○Left

Tool

System Application Region Data Setting Measure Filing REC Key/FootSW Recorder Auto Freeze Comp. Window

Application

See 13.2.1. See 13.2.2. See 13.2.3. See 13.2.4. See 13.2.5. See 13.2.6. See 13.2.7. See 13.2.8. See 13.2.9.

Setup

Figure 13.2-1 Setup tab menu

Q1E-EA1203

171

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

13.2.1 System···································································································· Choose System to specify device settings. Settings are specified in several windows. The following describes the settings available in each window. (1)

Basic Setting [1]

[2]

[3] [4] [5]

[9] [10]

[11]

[12]

[6]

[13] [7] [8]

Figure 13.2-2 Basic Setting section of the System Settings window Table 13.2-1 Setting items in the Basic Setting section in the System Settings window No

Item

Description

[1]

Set Date Format

Select the date format.

[2]

Date and Time

Choosing this button displays the Date and Time Property window. Enter the date and time.

[3]

Screensaver Use Screensaver

Selecting this checkbox enables the screensaver function.

[4]

Preview

Choosing this button starts the screensaver function. To stop the screensaver function, press the UNDO key

[5] [6]

172

Wait Hospital Name

Q1E-EA1203

UNDO

.

Specify the wait time for the screensaver. Enter the name of the hospital.

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

No

[7]

Item Logo Mark Display

Description Select On or Off to either display or hide the logo at the top left of the window.

[8]

Key Click Sound

Select On or Off to either turn on or turn off the beep that sounds when you press a key on the keyboard.

Frequency Range

Choosing this button displays Frequency Range.

[10] Brightness Setting

Specify the level of brightness for characters and

[9]

the background. [11]

Character Clear

Specify whether to delete comments entered on the screen in the following situations: - The Freeze mode is released. - The application is changed.

[12] Shutdown

If the button is

Specify either of the following: whether the system

pushed, the system

automatically shuts down after the specified period

shuts down

of time after the ON/STANDBY key

automatically

pressed or whether the system continues to run

is

until the OK button is chosen in the Shutdown window. [13]

Wait

Enter the length of time that the system waits before it automatically shuts down.

About the screensaver function The screensaver starts when no operations have been performed for the specified period of time since the last time the FREEZE key

FREEZE

was pressed.

To stop the screensaver function, press the UNDO key

UNDO

. The screensaver closes, and

the screen displayed before the screensaver started reappears. Regardless of the screensaver settings, the screensaver does not start in the following cases: y

The measurement function is started

y

The option below is started. Stress Echo Software, TIC function (Software Specified for Contrast Agents), DICOM Software (Query/Retrieve), Extended measurement function, DVD video playback mode

Q1E-EA1203

173

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(2)

Trackball [2]

[1]

Figure 13.2-3 Trackball section of the System Settings window Table 13.2-2 Setting items in the Trackball section of the System Settings window No

[1]

Item Sensitivity

Description Select the sensitivity of the trackball for each function that uses the trackball.

[2]

Button

You can switch the ENTER key

ENTER

and UNDO key

functions between the left and right buttons.

174

Q1E-EA1203

UNDO

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(3)

Network (When an optional network interface unit is not released, it is not displayed.) [1]

[2]

Figure 13.2-4 Network section of the System Settings window [3]

[7]

[4] [5]

[6]

[8]

Figure 13.2-5 Network-Adapter section of the System Settings window

Q1E-EA1203

175

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

Table 13.2-3 Setting items in the Network sections of the System Settings window No

[1]

Item Computer Name

Description Name of the ultrasound diagnostic scanner. If there is more than one system, change the name.

[2]

Work group

Specify the workgroup name of the network environment of the ultrasound diagnostic scanner.

[3]

Adapter Name

The device name of the network adapter is displayed.

[4]

Obtain an IP address

Select this radio button to obtain the IP address from the

from a DHCP server

DHCP server (See HINT 1 below).

Specify an IP address

Select this radio button to specify the IP address. Enter values

[5]

provided by the network administrator in the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway text boxes.

[6]

DNS Server

If necessary, specify the value provided by the network administrator.

[7]

WINS Address

If necessary, specify the value provided by the network administrator.

[8]

Response check

Use this button to check response from the destination PC. When you choose this button, the Response check window appears. Enter the IP address of the destination PC and choose the Check button. A response check is performed, and the result is displayed. If the check indicates failure, check the network connection status after referring to the notes provided below, and then run the response check again.

176

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

1 When you enter an address such as an IP address, do not add any leading zeroes to the digit groups (separated by periods) in the address to make them three digits. Incorrect: 192.168.010.002. Correct: 192.168.10.2 2 About the Computer Name box ・

Do not leave this box blank. Always enter a name.

・

The name you enter must not consist of only numbers (for example, 12345).

・

You cannot specify the work group name.

3 About the Work group box You cannot enter the computer name. 4 About the IP Address section ・

When you click Specify an IP address, you must enter values in both the IP Address box and Subnet Mask box. Neither box must be left blank.

・

If you select the Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server radio button, the ultrasound diagnostic scanner accesses the DHCP server to obtain an IP address when the system is started. Before starting the ultrasound diagnostic scanner, start the DHCP server so that the system can access the server when it starts. If the ultrasound diagnostic scanner cannot access the server, the ultrasound diagnostic scanner might not start.

・

When 0.0.0.0 appears in the IP Address box and Subnet Mask box, a problem might have occurred in the network environment or the settings might be incorrect. Check whether the network cable is correctly connected, the entered address is correct, and other such items. Correct any mistakes you find, and then restart the ultrasound diagnostic scanner.

5 About the DNS Server section ・

If you click Specify DNS server addresses, you cannot specify the same address in the Preferred DNS server box and Alternate DNS server box.

6 About the WINS Address section ・

You cannot specify the same address in the Preferred WINS Server box and Alternate WINS Server box.

7 You cannot check response immediately after setting or changing the IP address. Before checking response, restart the system. 8 In the rare cases that connection to the LAN fails, shut down the system, turn off the breaker, wait for 30 seconds, and then restart the system.

Q1E-EA1203

177

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(4)

Soft option This window displays the registered software options.

Figure 13.2-6 Soft Option section of the System Settings window

178

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

13.2.2 Application······························································································ Choose Application to display a menu for specifying application settings. For details, see Chapter 14 - Application Function.

13.2.3 Region Data Setting ··············································································· Choose Region Data Setting to register the common settings for a region. If a region for which settings have been registered here is specified in an application, the system is initialized to the settings specified here when the application is switched. [8]

[9] [1]

[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

Figure 13.2-7 Region Data Setting window Table 13.2-4 Setting items in the Region Data Setting window No

Item

Description

[1]

Region

Select a region to register settings for it.

[2]

Copy button

Use this button to copy the selected region.

[3]

Paste button

Use this button to paste a copied region.

[4]

Delete button

Use this button to delete the selected region.

[5]

Factory data button

Reset the selected region to the factory default values.

[6]

Edit Name button

Change the name of the selected region.

[7]

Export/Import button

Use this button to display the Region data setting Export/Import window.

Q1E-EA1203

179

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

No

[8]

Item

Description Select the category of the function to be registered. The items to be

Item View

registered in the selected category appear in the registered items section.

[9]

Tabbed pages

Specify settings for each function. Depending on the item selected in Item View, settings might be divided into tabbed pages. To switch pages, choose another tab above the currently open page. For details about the selections available for each page, see (2) to (15) below.

(1)

Region data setting Export/Import window [1]

[2]

[3]

[4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

[9]

Figure 13.2-8 Region data setting Export/Import window Table 13.2-5 Setting items in the Region data setting Export/Import window No

[1]

180

Item

Description

Region (in the

The regions saved in the system are displayed.

system)

Select a region for export.

[2]

Media

Select the media that will be used for export or import.

[3]

Region (on the

The regions saved on the selected media are displayed.

selected media)

Select a region for import.

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

No

[4]

Item Export button

Description Use this button to add a region selected in the left Region area to the right Region area. To save the data of the added region to the media, choose the Save To Media button.

[5]

Import button

Use this button to import a region selected in the right Region area.

[6]

Edit Name button

Use this button to change the name of the selected region.

[7]

Delete button

Use this button to delete the selected region.

[8]

Save To Media

Use this button to save the data added to the right Region area to the media.

button

[9]

Close button

Use this button to close the Region data setting Export/Import window and return to the Region Data Setting window.

Q1E-EA1203

181

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(2)

Operation page of the General item

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

Figure 13.2-9 Operation page of the General item Table 13.2-6 Setting items on the Operation page of the General item No

[1]

Item Trackball Priority

Description Specify the function given trackball priority for In Frozen (CFM ON) and for In Frozen (CFM OFF). IN CFM OFF, the function given trackball priority in freeze-off mode is reset to the function given trackball priority during the last freeze-off session.

[2]

Gain Encoder in Frozen

Use these radio buttons to specify whether to change gain by using the encoder or to perform a cine review when Freeze mode is turned on.

[3]

Start Exam

Execute

Specify whether to execute an application when the

Application

Start Exam button is selected in the Patient Information Display section.

[4]

End Exam

Auto save

Specify whether to automatically save the results of

or New

Measurement

measurement when End Exam key

Patient

End Exam

or when the Start Exam button is selected in the Patient Information Display section.

182

Q1E-EA1203

is pressed

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(3)

Display page of the General item

[1] [2]

[3]

Figure 13.2-10 Display page of the General item Table 13.2-7 Setting items on the Display page of the General item No

Item

Description

[1]

Background Level

Specify the brightness of the background for B-mode images.

[2]

Gray Invert

Specify the reverse video mode (positive or negative) of an image.

[3]

ϒ Curve

Select the Display ON check box to display the gamma curve in the window.

Q1E-EA1203

183

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(4)

Cine Memory page of General

[1] [2] [3]

Figure 13.2-11 Cine Memory page of the General item Table 13.2-8 Setting items on the Cine Memory page of the General item No [1]

Item Cine Memory

B Mode

Description Specify whether to split the screen vertically and to use the cine memory capacity for independent recording and

Allocation

review in each window.

[2]

B:M/D Mode

Select the ratio between the cine memory used for the B-mode image and the cine memory used for M-mode and Doppler images.

[3]

Frame No.

Specify whether to display the frame number of the cine memory.

184

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(5)

US Power page of the General item

[1]

Figure 13.2-12 US Power page of the General item Table 13.2-9 Setting items on the US Power page of the General item No

[1]

Item Thermal Index Display

Description Select the Thermal Index item to be displayed in the window.

Q1E-EA1203

185

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(6)

Physiology page of the General item Use this page to specify the ECG settings. The settings are enabled when the optional physiological signal display unit is connected.

[1] [2] [3]

[5]

[4] [6] [7]

Figure 13.2-13 Physiology page of the General item Table 13.2-10 Setting items on the Physiology page of the General item No

Item

Description

[1]

Sweep Speed(s)

Select the sweep speed.

[2]

Display ON

Select Display ON to display the ECG waveform.

[3]

Position L/R

When the screen is vertically split, specify the display location of the ECG waveform.

[4]

Position U/D

When the screen is horizontally split, specify the display location of the ECG waveform for each horizontal split ratio.

[5]

Gain

Specify the ECG gain.

[6]

Auto Gain

Select the ECG auto gain setting from S (small), M (medium), L (large), and OFF.

[7]

186

Filter

Q1E-EA1203

Select the level of filter for the ECG waveform display.

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(7)

Image Filing page of the General item

[1]

Figure 13.2-14 Image Filing page of the General item Table 13.2-11 Setting items on the Image Filing page of the General item No

[1]

Item Image Filing M-Write

Description Specify the preset that you specified for Recording Multi Image in the Set Up Filing window.

Q1E-EA1203

187

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(8)

Annotation page of the General item

[1] [2]

Figure 13.2-15 Annotation page of the General item Table 13.2-12 Setting items on the Annotation page of the General item No [1]

Item Ordering

Description Specify how to display the terms appearing on the Annotation menu. You can select either Alphabetical (alphabetical order by name) or Purposeful (by region or by case).

[2]

188

Arrow Menu

Q1E-EA1203

Select Display ON to display the arrow menu.

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(9)

B page of the B item

[1]

[2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

Figure 13.2-16 B page of the B item Table 13.2-13 Setting items on the B page of the B item No

[1]

Item Scan Orientation

Description Specify the vertical and horizontal orientations of a B-mode image. Biplane-T and Biplane-L are settings for cross-sectional views of the biplane probe.

[2]

Setting Initial Display

Specify the number of windows initially displayed for displaying B-mode images. Select Single for displaying in one window. Select Dual for display in two windows.

[3]

Depth Gain Curve

Select Display ON to display the depth gain curve in the window.

[4]

Steering Mark

Select Display ON to display the steering mark, which indicates the operating range of a wide viewing angle for a convex scan type probe that has coverage of 180 degrees or less.

[5] [6]

Gray Scale in dual

Select to display or hide the gray scale when a B-mode image is

display

displayed in either window during dual display.

Combine Control

Select this option to execute the function that combines the two windows for a B-mode image by removing the gap between them. Selecting this option makes it possible to display a pseudo wide viewing angle image. Q1E-EA1203

189

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(10) M page of the M item

[1] [2] [3]

Figure 13.2-17 M page of the M item Table 13.2-14 Setting items on the M page of the M item No

Item

Description

[1]

Initial Mode

As the initial mode when the M mode selection key M is pressed, select M to start M mode, or select ODM to start ODM mode.

[2]

Depth Range Control

Select B+M to switch the display depth of B-mode and M-mode images at the same time. Select M to switch the display depth of M-mode images only.

[3]

M Blanking

Specify the height of the non-display area at the bottom of an M-mode image.

190

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(11) ODM page of the M item

[1] [2] [3]

Figure 13.2-18 ODM page of the M item Table 13.2-15 Setting items on the ODM page of the M item No [1]

Item ODM Mode

Description As the initial mode when ODM mode starts, select Single ODM to start single-direction ODM mode, or select Dual ODM to start dual-direction ODM mode.

[2]

Beam Center Control

When dual-direction ODM mode is selected, select either Common or Independent as the type of the center of the ODM cursor.

[3]

ODM Mark

Select Display ON to display the ODM mark.

Q1E-EA1203

191

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(12) D page of the D item

[1] [2] [3]

[4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

Figure 13.2-19 D page of the D item Table 13.2-16 Setting items on the D page of the D item No [1]

Item Flow

ON

Description Select whether to invert the forward or reverse direction of Doppler images.

Invert When

Flow invert is performed when oblique invert is executed.

Oblique Invert is executed [2]

Scale Mark

Select Display ON to display the scale mark (velocity marker) in the center of a Doppler image.

[3]

Setting Cursor

Select Dop-On to output the Doppler sound while the Doppler cursor is moving. Select Dop-Off to mute the sound.

[4]

Trace Line

This is to adjust the position of Doppler waveform to be traced. Peak&Mean : This is for performing the trace along both peak and meanvalues of Doppler waveform. Peak

: This is for performing the trace along peak values of Doppler waveform.

Mean

: This is for performing the trace along mean values of Doppler waveform.

192

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

No [5]

Item Threshold

Description Select the threshold level for the Doppler trace lines. The higher the value, the more high brightness parts are detected. There are 33 levels, from -16 to 16.

[6]

Average

The heart rate to be measured and displayed on an average is set.

[7]

Smooth Line

Turns smoothing on or off (in the direction of the time axis) of the Doppler tracelines. The smoothing process smooth out the Doppler trace line.

[8]

Heatbeat detection fot

Select the heartbeat detection for ECG.

ECG

At the time of ECG OFF, this setting is not used.

Q1E-EA1203

193

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(13) CFM page of the CFM item

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

Figure 13.2-20 CFM page of the CFM item Table 13.2-17 Setting items on the CFM page of the CFM item No [1]

Item Focus Control

Description Select Auto for automatic control of the CFM-mode image focus setting. Select Manual for manual control.

[2]

Specify the time for rewriting the CFM-mode image

Peak Hold

during peak hold. [3]

Color Rejection

Specify the hidden area of the CFM-mode image for color display.

[4]

Color ROI

Fixed-B

Select Fixed-B to use the same width for CFM-mode and B-mode images.

[5]

Display ON

Select Display ON to display a frame that indicates the display area of a CFM-mode image.

194

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(14) TDI page of the TDI item

[1]

Figure 13.2-21 TDI page of the TDI item Table 13.2-18 Setting items on the TDI page of the TDI item No [1]

Item Color ROI

Description Select Fixed-B to use the same width for TDI-mode and B-mode images.

Q1E-EA1203

195

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(15) Body Mark page of the Body Mark item

[1] [2]

Figure 13.2-22 Body Mark page of the Body Mark item Table 13.2-19 Setting items in the Body Mark page of the Body Mark item No [1]

Item Body Mark

Description Select Display ON to display the body mark and comment registered in the first step of the body mark setting when an application has been selected.

[2]

Step No.

Select Display ON to display the number of the step performed by the body mark setting at the upper left of the body mark.

196

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

13.2.4 Measure ································································································· Choose Measure to specify the measurement functionality settings. For details, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Measurement.

13.2.5 Filing······································································································· Choose Filing to specify the filing settings. For details, see 15.2 Settings in the Set Up Filing window.

13.2.6 REC Key/Foot SW·················································································· Choose REC Key/Foot SW to specify the functions you want to assign to REC keys 1 to 5 and the optional footswitch. For the footswitch, functions are assigned to the user pedal of the footswitch (there are two pedals: user and freeze). The operation of these functions is the same as REC keys 1 to 5. For details about the assigned functions, see the description of REC keys 1 to 5 in this manual. (1)

(2)

(3) (4)

(5)

Figure 13.2-23 REC Key/Foot SW window Table 13.2-20 Setting items in the REC Key/Foot SW window No (1)

Item REC1 to REC5,

Description Select a key or footswitch to set it.

and Foot SW (2)

Enable ***

Select the Enable *** checkbox to enable the applicable (***) setting.

Q1E-EA1203

197

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

No (3)

Item Assign function

Description Select the function you want to assign. The following describes each function you can assign: y

Record Single

Writes a Single Image.

Image y

Record Multi Image

Writes a Multi Image.

y

Longtime REC

Records an image for a long time.

y

DVD REC

Starts or stops recording an image to a DVD video recorder.

y

Printer (B/W)

Outputs an image to a black-and-white printer.

y

USB Printer

Outputs an image to a USB color printer.

y

Image Printer

Outputs an image to the printer that you specify in the image printer setting procedure (see Chapter 16 - Image Print Function).

y

Capture Start/Stop

For details, see Assignment of the Capture Start/Stop function following this table.

y

Probe Select

Changes the probe. (A change of Probe1 and Probe2.)

y

T/L Plane Change

Switches the cross-sectional view of the probe if the selected probe has two scan planes.

Functions that can be displayed vary depending on the installed options. If an option is selected when the device is not connected, the function is not enabled.

(4)

(5)

Concurrently

Select this check box to also record a Single Image when the key or

record image

footswitch is pressed.

Prioritize Capture

Select this check box to prioritize the function assigned when an REC key

Start/Stop

or footswitch is pressed according to the conditions described in Assignment of the Capture Start/Stop function following this table.

198

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

About the Concurrently record image check box When you select the Concurrently record image check box, the corresponding REC key is extinguished and the footswitch is disabled when Single Images cannot be recorded. If you want to print images in such a situation, clear the Concurrently record image check box. Assignment of the Capture Start/Stop function The Capture Start/Stop function is assigned as follows: (a)

Stress Echo Software or Wide View Software is used, a function that starts or stops image capture is assigned.

(b)

When Picture in Picture Software is used, functions that display/hide optical images and start/stop an optical image are assigned.

(c)

When the Three-Dimensional Display Unit (Real-Time) is used, this function is assigned to the operation for changing to HI Definition 3D mode, as well as operation for starting and canceling the HI Definition 3D swing.

Q1E-EA1203

199

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

13.2.7 Recorder································································································· Choose Recorder to specify the black-and-white printer, color printer, DVD, and video output settings. List of devices

Settings for the selected device

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Figure 13.2-24 Recorder window In the list of devices at the left of the window, select the recorder for which you want to specify settings. For B/W Printer (USB) and Color Printer (USB), choose ＋ next to the item and select one of the displayed model names. Selecting a recorder from the list displays the related settings in the right window panel. The following table shows the recorder settings. Table 13.2-21 Setting items in the Recorder window No (1)

Recorder B/W Printer (USB)

Item Select Printer

Description Black-and-white printers (USB) that can be connected are listed. Select the connected black and white printer (USB) from the list.

Sony UP-D897

Gray Scale

Adjust the color density of the gray scale.

Dark, Light

Adjust the tones of the dark-colored and light-colored portions.

MITSUBISHI P93D

200

Q1E-EA1203

Sharp

Adjust the outline of an image.

Gamma

Adjust the gray scale color..

Sharp

Adjust the outline of an image.

Contrast

Adjust the contrast level.

Brightness

Adjust the brightness level.

Gamma

Adjust the gray scale color..

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

No

Recorder

MITSUBISHI P95D

(2)

Color Printer (USB)

Item

Description

Paper Type

Specify the type of photographic paper.

Reset

Values are reset to the factory defaults.

Contrast

Adjust the contrast level.

Brightness

Adjust the brightness level.

Gamma

Adjust the gray scale color..

Paper Type

Specify the type of photographic paper.

Reset

Values are reset to the factory defaults.

Select Printer

Color printers (USB) that can be connected are listed. Select the connected color printer (USB) from the list.

MITSUBISHI

Red, Green, Blue Adjust the RGB level.

CP900D

Contrast

Adjust the contrast level.

Brightness

Adjust the brightness level.

Gamma

Adjust the gray scale color..

Print mode

Select a print quality: Fine : Better quality image can be printed as compared with Fast. Fast : Image can be printed at high speed.

Sony UP-D23MD

Copy

Specify the number of copies.

Reset

Values are reset to the factory defaults.

Red, Green, Blue Adjust the RGB level. Dark, Light

Adjust the tones of the dark-colored and light-colored portions.

Gamma

Adjust the gray scale color..

Sharp

Adjust the outline of an image.

Reset

Values are reset to the factory defaults.

MITSUBISHI

Red, Green, Blue Adjust the RGB level.

CP30D/DW

Contrast

Adjust the contrast level.

Brightness

Adjust the brightness level.

Gamma

Adjust the gray scale color..

Printing Mode

Standard : Better quality image can be printed as compared with Power save. Power save : Low power consumption printing.

Reset

Returns values to the factory defaults. Q1E-EA1203

201

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

No (3)

Recorder

Item Pause

DVD

Description Select the display method (field or frame) to be used when reviewing an image is paused.

Transfer Title

The patient ID is automatically assigned as the title of the image being recorded.

Status

The recording mode, the type of the disk currently being used, and the number of recordable titles are displayed. A maximum of 49 titles can be recorded on a DVD+RW disk. The remaining recording time and the approximate percentage of disk space used are displayed as progress bars.

(4)

VCR

Pause

no use

(5)

Video Output

Contrast

Specify the contrast value of the output signal.

Brightness

Specify the brightness level of the output signal.

Offset

Set the output level to Offset (if set to ON, the brightness level of black is increased). This item can be used only in NTSC.

Reset

y

The specified values are initialized.

If a peripheral device has adjustment functions, use its functions instead of using the ultrasound diagnostic scanner functions.

y

To use the above functions in a system with multiple peripheral devices connected, make sure that all the peripheral devices are operating correctly.

202

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

13.2.8 Auto Freeze···························································································· Choose Auto Freeze to enable (ON) and disable (OFF) the auto freeze function. If this function is set to ON and no panel operation is performed for 10 minutes after releases of the Freeze starts, the system automatically enters the Freeze state. For details, see the section Setting Auto Freeze Function in the chapter Operation Procedures in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation.

13.2.9 Comp. Window (Left, Right) ··································································· Choose Comp. Window to specify Left or Right for the display position of the Comparison window. Application Tool Measure Annotation

Comp. Window ○Left ●Right

Setup

Figure 13.2-25 Comp. Window

Q1E-EA1203

203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

13.2.10 Screen Button ······················································································· Choose Screen Button to register the screen buttons that appear when the User Define screen button

is pressed.

If you specify the preset name you register here in an application, the screen buttons you have registered are displayed. (1)

(2) (3)

(4)

(5) (6) (7) (8)

(9)

Figure 13.2-26 ScreenButton User definition window Table 13.2-22 Setting items in the ScreenButton User definition window No

Item

Description

(1)

Preset

Select a preset name.

(2)

Edit button

Use this button to edit the selected preset name.

(3)

Category

Select the category of the function to be registered.

(4)

Item

Select the function to be registered.

(5)

Assign button

Use this button to register the function selected in the Item section for the screen button you select in the Assign section.

(6)

Delete button

Use this button to delete the assignment of the screen button function you select in the Assign section.

204

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

No (7)

Item Delete All button

Description Select this button to delete all the assignments of functions registered in the Assign section.

(8)

Assign section

All the registered functions are listed here. A screen button you select here becomes the target of the Assign and Delete buttons. You can change the location of a button by dragging and dropping it.

(9)

Factory Default

Chose this button to reset all the settings to the factory default settings.

button

13.2.11 Color Map····························································································· Register the color map you want to use in CFI, CFA, and Fine Flow modes. If you specify the preset name you register here in an application, you can select the color map you have registered. (1) (6) (2) (7)

(3) (4) (5)

(8)

Figure 13.2-27 Setup Color Map window Table 13.2-23 Setting items in the Setup Color Map window No (1)

Item Mode

Description Select the color map to be registered from CFI, CFA, and Fine Flow modes.

(2)

Preset

Select a preset name.

(3)

Copy button

Use this button to copy the selected preset settings.

(4)

Paste button

Use this button to register the preset settings copied to the selected preset.

(5)

Rename button

Use this button to edit the selected preset name.

(6)

Color map to be changed

Select the color map that is to be changed. Q1E-EA1203

205

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

No

Item

Description

(7)

Registered color map list

All registered color maps are displayed.

(8)

Color map list

The color map you want to change is changed to the selected color map.

The preset settings for Abdo&Others and Cardiac cannot be changed.

13.2.12 Biopsy Guide ························································································ Choose Biopsy Guide to select the mark to be used as the biopsy guideline and the mark to be used in the seed implant grid.

Figure 13.2-28 Settings of biopsy guide window

13.2.13 Annotation····························································································· Choose Annotation to register an annotation. The annotation entry menu displayed by pressing the ANNOTATION key specifying the region registered on this Annotation menu in the application.

206

Q1E-EA1203

ANNOTATION

is set up by

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

(6)

(7)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Figure 13.2-29 Annotation Setting window Table 13.2-24 Setting items in the Annotation Setting window No (1)

Item Editing

Region

Select the region of the annotation you want to edit. The region name can also be edited.

Annotation (2)

Description

Category Select the category of the annotation you want to edit. The category name can also be edited.

(3)

Term

The annotations registered in the selected region and category are listed. The frame you select here becomes the target for items [4] to [6].

(4)

Edit button

Use this button to edit text in the frame selected in the Term section. Use the keyboard to enter the text.

(5)

Delete button

Use this button to delete text in the frame selected in the Term section.

(6)

Copy << button

Use this button to copy text selected in the Term section of the Registered Annotation section to the frame selected in the Term section of the Editting Annotation section.

(7)

Registered Annotation

All currently registered annotations are listed.

Q1E-EA1203

207

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

13.2.14 Body Mark ···························································································· Choose Body Mark to register the body mark settings. To use a registered body mark, specify the name you register here in an application. (1)

(4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (12)

(2) (3) (9)

(10) (13) (11)

Figure 13.2-30 Body Mark Setting window Table 13.2-25 Setting items in the Body Mark Setting window No (1)

Item

Description

Preset list

Select the preset that is to be registered.

(2)

Copy button

Use this button to copy the preset.

(3)

Delete button

Use this button to delete the preset.

Preset list

(4)

Name

Enter the name of the preset.

(5)

Registered body marks

Registered body marks and comments are displayed as lists. A maximum of 32 steps can be registered. You can change the location of a body mark by dragging and dropping it.

(6)

Comment list button

All comments on the 32 steps are displayed as a list. You can change the location of a comment by dragging and dropping it. The corresponding body mark is also moved.

208

(7)

Insert button

Use this button to insert an empty step for the selected step.

(8)

Delete button

Use this button to delete the selected step.

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

No

Item

Description

(9)

Registration

Region list

Select a body mark region.

(10)

Item

Body mark list

The body marks corresponding to the selected region are displayed as a list. To select a body mark, move the pointer to the body mark and then press the ENTER key

ENTER

.

(11)

Comment

Enter a comment to register it.

(12)

Set Probe Mark You can change the location and angle of the probe mark on a body mark. To do so, choose the Move or Rotate button, use the trackball to specify the location and angle, and then press the ENTER key

(13)

Register button

ENTER

.

Use this button to register the specified body mark and comments.

13.2.15 Data Backup························································································· Choose Data Backup to save the current settings to external media. (1)

(2)

(3)

Main window

(4)

(5)

Save window

(6)

(7)

Load window

Figure 13.2-31 Data backup Table 13.2-26 Data Backup Setting items No

Item

Description

(1)

Save button

Use this button to display the Save window for backing up data.

(2)

Load button

Use this button to display the Load window for loading backed up data.

(3) (4)

Save

Select

Select a location for saving the data.

Save Network

Select this check box to also save the network settings data.

Settings

(When an optional network interface unit is not installed, it is impossible to choose.)

Q1E-EA1203

209

Chapter 13 - Tab menus

No (5)

Item

Description

Select

Select the location from which the data is to be loaded.

(6)

Read button

Read the backed up data stored in the specified location.

(7)

Select backup

Select the data you want to read from the displayed list of backup

data

data.

Load

If network settings data was also saved as backup data, the check box for Network Settings is selected. If you do not want to read the network settings data, clear the check box.

13.2.16 Entry Option·························································································· Choose Entry Option to register software options.

210

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

Chapter 14 - Application Function The application function is used to register the initial conditions of the ultrasound diagnostic scanner in order to simplify operation. When the system is initially started, the basic applications are already registered. You can then register a maximum of 10 additional initial conditions for each probe. You can select an application either by pressing the PROBE key

PROBE

when the probe is

changed or by using a tab menu after a probe is selected. For details, see the subsection Selecting a probe and application in the chapter Operation Procedures in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation.

14.1 Editing an application In the Application window displayed by choosing the Setup tab and then Application on the tab menu, you can edit settings, add or delete applications, and export or import data. If you choose a probe from the Probe View list to edit it, the registered applications are displayed in the Application View list. Use the pointer to choose buttons on the right to perform operations. Some operations open a separate window for the operation, and some operations start as soon as the button is chosen.

Q1E-EA1203

211

Chapter 14 - Application Function

(1)

(2)

(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)

Figure 14.1-1 Application window Table 14.1-1 Application window No

Item

Description

(1)

Probe View

Select a probe to edit it.

(2)

Application View

The applications registered for the selected probe are displayed. Select an application to edit it. You can change the display order of the applications by dragging and dropping applications.

(3)

Probe

The selected probe is displayed.

(4)

Base Application

The application used when a user-defined application was created is displayed.

(5)

User Defined Application

The number of applications registered by the user is displayed. For each probe, a maximum of 10 applications can be registered.

(6)

Get Current Condition

An application is created based on the current equipment

button

conditions. You can overwrite an existing application or create a new application.

(7)

Edit Data button

Use this button to display the Application Data Setting window, where you can specify detailed settings for each mode (See 14.2 Application Data Setting window ).

212

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No

Item

Description

(8)

Copy button

Use this button to copy the selected application.

(9)

Paste button

Use this button to paste the copied application.

(10) Delete button

Use this button to delete the selected application.

(11) Edit Name button

Use this button to change the name of the selected application.

(12) Set Default Application

Use this button to specify the default application.

button

This application is selected when the system is turned on or the default application is executed.

(13) Export/Import button

Choosing this button displays the Application Export / Import window, where you can save data to or read from external media.

(14) Save button

Use this button to save the edited data.

(15) Close button

Use this button to close the Application window.

Q1E-EA1203

213

Chapter 14 - Application Function

14.2 Application Data Setting window Choosing the Edit Data button in the Application window displays the Application Data Setting window, where you can specify the settings for each parameter. For details about the settings on each tabbed page in the window, see 14.2.1 and the subsequent sections. Depending on the selected probe, some items are not displayed or cannot be chosen.

(1)

(2)

(4) (3)

(5)

Figure 14.2-1 Application Data Setting window Table 14.2-1 Application Data Setting window No

Item

Description

(1)

Item View

Select the item to edit it.

(2)

Tabbed pages

Use the tabbed pages to specify settings. Settings differ according to the item selected in the Item View list. To change pages, choose the tab for another page above the currently open page. For details about settings of each tabbed page, see the subsequent sections.

(3)

Factory Data button

Use this button to reset all parameter settings to the base application settings.

(4)

Current

The probe and application being edited are displayed.

(5)

Close button

Use this button to close the Application Data Setting window and return to the Application window.

214

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

14.2.1 General item tabbed pages ···································································· (1)

Operation page [5]

[1]

[2]

[3] [4]

Figure 14.2-2 Operation page Table 14.2-2 Operation page No

Item

Description

Exec.

Specify the screen button to be displayed when an application

Screen

Application

is executed.

Button

In Frozen

Specify the screen button to be displayed when Freeze mode

[1] Setting of

Display

is activated. This setting takes effect only when the mode-dependent screen button is displayed.

[2] User Screen B Mode, Button

M Mode,

Specify the screen button to be displayed when a user-defined screen button is pressed in each mode.

D Mode, CFM Mode [3] Switch Fine Flow/CFA Mode [4] Switch TDI/Elasto Mode

Specify the mode to be executed when the Fine Flow/CFA mode key

Fine Flow CFA

is pressed.

Specify the mode to be executed when the Elasto/TDI mode selection key

Elasto TDI

is pressed.

Q1E-EA1203

215

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No [5] F1, F2 Key

Item F1 Key, F2 Key

Description Assign the optional functions to be started when you press the Function 1 key F1 and Function 2 key F2 . The functions that can be assigned differ depending on the optional functions installed on your equipment. If there are only one or two optional functions that can be registered for the function keys, the function or functions are automatically assigned to the Function 1 key F1 and Function 2 key F2 . You cannot change the assignment. If there are three or more optional functions that can be registered for the function keys, you can assign List to the Function 2 key F2 . When you do so and then press the Function 2 key F2 , the available optional functions appear as screen buttons. You can then use a screen button to select and start the desired function.

When you have selected an application for which List is assigned to the Function 2 key F2 , and you press the Function 2 key F2 ,

the optional function assigned to the Function 1 key F1 does not appear as a screen button.

216

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

(2)

US Power page

[1] [2] [3]

Figure 14.2-3 US Power page Table 14.2-3 US Power page No

Item

Description

[1] B Mode (%)

Specify the ultrasound output in B mode.

[2] CFM Mode (%)

Specify the ultrasound output in CFM mode and PW mode.

[3] CW Mode

Specify the ultrasound output in CW mode.

Q1E-EA1203

217

Chapter 14 - Application Function

(3)

Region Data Setting page. [1]

Figure 14.2-4 Region Data Setting page Table 14.2-4 Region Data Setting page No

Item

[1] Region Data Setting

Description

Assign the common settings for a region to an application. For details about the common settings by region, see 13.2.3 Region Data Setting.

218

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

(4)

Annotation page [1]

Figure 14.2-5 Annotation page Table 14.2-5 Annotation page No

Item

[1] Region

Description

Select the region for which you want to add an annotation. For details about annotations, see 13.2.13 Annotation

Q1E-EA1203

219

Chapter 14 - Application Function

14.2.2 B item tabbed page················································································· (1)

B page (Default) [7] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

[8]

Figure 14.2-6 B page Table 14.2-6 B page No

Item

Description

[1] BW-PRF

Specify PRF of B-mode and M-mode images.

[2] Display Depth Size (mm)

Specify the initial display depth of a B-mode image. (When a biplane probe is used, this value can be specified separately for the T and L sides).

[3] View Angle

Specify the display angle of a B-mode image. (When a biplane probe is used, this value can be specified separately for the T and L sides.)

[4] Vertical Shift

Specify the initial value for the amount of vertical shift for a B-mode image.

[5] Depth Gain Control

Select Fixed to fix the assignment of the depth gain slider to depth. Select Variable to fix it to the window.

[6] Trapezoid Scan

Specify whether to use the trapezoid scan for the initial display of a B-mode image.

220

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No

Item

[7] Focus Set.

Control

Description Select Auto for automatic setting of the focus of a B-mode image. Select Manual for manual setting.

Position

Specify the initial focus position. (When a biplane probe is used, this value can be specified separately for the T and L sides.)

Step

Specify the initial number of focus steps. (When a biplane probe is used, this value can be specified separately for the T and L sides.)

Width

Specify the focus interval. (When a biplane probe is used, this value can be specified separately for the T and L sides.)

Execute

Specify whether to correct the focus depth of a B-mode

Stand Off

image when a linear probe for superficial organs with a coupler for observation attached is used.

[8] Edit PSS button

Use this button to display the Edit PSS window (For details, see 14.3 Edit PSS window).

Q1E-EA1203

221

Chapter 14 - Application Function

14.2.3 M item tabbed page ················································································ (1)

M page [1]

[3] [2] [4]

[5]

[6]

Figure 14.2-7 M page Table 14.2-7 M page No

Item

[1] Sweep Speed (s)

Description Specify the sweep speed of an M-mode image.

[2] Simultaneous

Frame Rate

Select the frame rate.

[3] ODM Mode Setting

B View Angle

Specify the view width for ODM mode.

[4] Image Split

L/R, U/D

Select L/R to display vertically split B-mode and M-mode images. Select U/D to display horizontally split B-mode and M-mode images.

Split Ratio

When U/D is selected, specify the split ratio for displaying the B-mode image and M-mode image.

222

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No

Item

[5] Initial Mode

CFM OFF

Description B Real,

Specify the initial mode when B/M

Simultaneous mode is started. CFM ON

B Real,

Specify the initial mode when

Simultaneous CFM/M mode is started. Cursor

Select this check box to display the M cursor in a B-mode image window by default when the M mode selection key

M

is

pressed. [6] Edit PSS button

Use this button to display the Edit PSS window (For details, see 14.3 Edit PSS window).

14.2.4 D item tabbed pages ·············································································· (1)

Common page

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

Figure 14.2-8 Common page Table 14.2-8 Common page No

Item

[1] Sweep Speed (s)

Description Specify the sweep speed.

Q1E-EA1203

223

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No

Item

[2] Oblique Scan Angle (°)

Description Specify the oblique scan angle when a linear probe is used.

[3] D Color

Specify the color display map for a Doppler image.

[4] Speaker Volume

Specify the speaker volume for Doppler mode.

[5] Dop. Cursor in changing

Specify whether to display the Doppler cursor when the mode changes to B.

to B mode [6] Angle Bar

Angle

Specify the incident angle.

Angle Bar

Specify whether to display the bar for correcting the angle.

Keep an angle on

Select the behavior of the bar while the Doppler

screen., Keep an

cursor is moving.

angle with Doppler cursor. Automatic Inversion

Select this check box to invert the bar when the Doppler cursor is inverted.(When Keep an angle with Doppler cursor is selected in an application of linear probe, you can select this check box.)

[7] Post Processing

ϒ Curve

Select the basic style of the ϒ curve.

ϒ

Specify the ϒ factor for ϒ correction of the displayed image.

Sat.

Specify the gradation level for driving the high-level echo into saturation at the maxim brightness for ϒ correction of the displayed image.

Rej.

Specify the gradation level for removing the low-level echo for ϒ correction of the displayed image.

Cent

Specify the center of the S-curve for S-curve ϒ correction.

[8] Image Split

L/R, U/D

Select L/R to display vertically split B/PW-mode and B/CW-mode images. Select U/D to display horizontally split B/PW-mode and B/CW-mode images.

Split Ratio

When U/D is selected, specify the split ratio for displaying the B-mode image and Doppler image.

224

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No

Item

[9] Unit

Description

Angle On

Select the unit of display (m/s or cm/s) when the bar for correcting the angle is displayed in a Doppler image.

Angle Off

Select the unit of display (m/s, cm/s, or kHz) when the bar for correcting the angle is not displayed in a Doppler image.

(2)

PW page

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

[9]

Figure 14.2-9 PW page Table 14.2-9 PW page No [1]

Item REF (MHz)

Description

Select the reference frequency (REF) for a PW-mode image. (When a biplane probe is used, this value can be specified separately for the T and L sides.)

[2]

PRF (kHz)

Select the velocity range (PRF) of a PW-mode image.

Q1E-EA1203

225

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No [3]

Item

Description Select the wall filter that removes

Wall Filter

unnecessary Doppler components caused by wall motion. The wall filters that are available differ depending on the PRF. [4]

FFT-ϒ

Select the dynamic range of a PW-mode image.

[5]

Select the gain value of a PW-mode

Initial Gain (dB)

image. (When a biplane probe is used, this value can be specified separately for the T and L sides.) [6]

Select the number of analysis points

Resolution

(resolution) in a PW-mode image. [7]

Select the display position of the base line

Base Line Position

when PW mode is selected. [8]

Sample Length (mm)

[9]

Initial Mode

CFM OFF

Select the sample width. B Real,

Specify the initial mode when B/PW mode

Simultaneous is started. CFM ON

B Real,

Specify the initial mode when CFM/PW

Simultaneous mode is started. Cursor

Select this check box to display the PW cursor in a B-mode image window by default when the PW mode selection key PW

226

Q1E-EA1203

is pressed.

Chapter 14 - Application Function

(3)

CW page

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

[7]

Figure 14.2-10 CW page Table 14.2-10 CW page No

Item

Description

[1] PRF(kHz)

Specify the velocity range (PRF) of a CW-mode image.

[2] Wall Filter (Hz)

Specify the wall filter to remove unnecessary Doppler components caused by wall motion. The wall filters that are available differ depending on the PRF.

[3] FFT-ϒ

Specify the dynamic range of a CW-mode image.

[4] Initial Gain (dB)

Specify the gain value of a CW-mode image.

[5] Resolution

Select the number of analysis points (resolution) in a CW-mode image.

[6] Base Line Position

Specify the display position of the base line when CW mode is selected.

[7] Initial Mode

Cursor

Select this check box to display the Doppler cursor in a B-mode image window when the CW mode key

is

pressed.

Q1E-EA1203

227

Chapter 14 - Application Function

14.2.5 CFM item tabbed pages ········································································· (1)

Common page [1]

[2]

Figure 14.2-11 Common page Table 14.2-11 Common page No [1] Color ROI

[2] PRF

Item

Description

Width, Height,

Specify the width, height and Position (Depth) of color

Position(Depth)

ROI for CFM mode.

PRF Priority

Choose Frame Rate or Sensitivity as the PRF condition to be prioritized when CFM mode is selected.

Max. Operating

Select a value to limit PRF. When a value is set,

PRF (Hz)

PRF of CFM does not become the value specified here or a greater value when a CFM-mode image or B-mode image is displayed in real time. The sensitivity of a CFM-mode image can be maintained if ROI is moved upward or downward.

228

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

(2)

CFI page

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

[11]

[12]

Figure 14.2-12 CFI page Table 14.2-12 CFI page No [1]

Item REF (MHz)

Description

Select the reference frequency for a CFI-mode image. (When a biplane probe is used, this value can be specified separately for the T and L sides.)

[2]

PRF (Hz)

Select the velocity range of a CFI-mode image.

[3]

Initial Gain (dB)

Select the gain value of a CFI-mode image. (When a biplane probe is used, this value can be specified separately for the T and L sides.)

[4]

CFM Filter

Select the CFM filter that removes frequency components unnecessary for observing a CFI-mode image.

[5]

Packet Size

Select the packet size (the minimum unit of size used for detecting color information) of a CFI-mode image.

[6]

A.Suppress.

Select the level of suppressing body movement in a CFI-mode image.

[7]

Smoothing

Select the smoothing level of a CFI-mode image.

[8]

Persistence

Select the persistence level of a CFI-mode image. Q1E-EA1203

229

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No [9]

Item

Description Select the degree (emphasis) of displaying a color

Variance

display map in the velocity - velocity dispersion display or a CFI-mode image in a dispersion display. [10] Scan Line Density [11] Preference

Select the scan line density of a CFI-mode image. Mode

Select Auto to automatically superimpose a CFI-mode image over a B-mode image. Select Manual to manually superimpose a CFI-mode image over a B-mode image.

Level

Select the brightness level used as the threshold for displaying a B-mode image when Mode in the Preference section is set to Manual.

[12] Color Map

Color Map

Select the color map for CFI mode.

Preset

Select a color map preset for use in this application. (For details about the color map, see 13.2.11 Color Map.)

230

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

(3)

CFA page

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

[11]

[12]

Figure 14.2-13 CFA page Table 14.2-13 CFA page No [1]

Item REF (MHz)

Description

Select the reference frequency for a CFA-mode image. (When a biplane probe is used, this value can be specified separately for the T and L sides.)

[2]

PRF (Hz)

Select the velocity range of a CFA-mode image.

[3]

Initial Gain (dB)

Select the gain value of a CFA-mode image. (When a biplane probe is used, this value can be specified separately for the T and L sides.)

[4]

CFM Filter

Select the CFM filter that removes frequency components unnecessary for observing a CFA-mode image.

[5]

Packet Size

Select the packet size (the minimum unit of size used for detecting color information) of a CFA-mode image.

[6]

A.Suppress.

Select the level of suppressing body movement in a CFA-mode image.

[7]

Smoothing

Select the smoothing level of a CFA-mode image.

Q1E-EA1203

231

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No

Item

Description

[8]

Persistence

Select the persistence level of a CFA-mode image.

[9]

Dynamic Range

Select the dynamic range of a CFA-mode image.

[10] Scan Line Density [11] Preference

Select the scan line density of a CFA-mode image. Mode

Select Auto to automatically superimpose a CFA-mode image over a B-mode image. Select Manual to manually superimpose a CFA-mode image over a B-mode image.

Level

Select the brightness level used as the threshold for displaying a B-mode image when Mode in the Preference section is set to Manual.

[12] Color Map

Color Map

Select the color map for CFA mode.

Preset

Select a color map preset for use in this application. (For details about color map, see 13.2.11 Color Map.)

232

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

(4)

Fine Flow page

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

[11]

[12]

[13]

Figure 14.2-14 Fine Flow page Table 14.2-14 Fine Flow page No [1]

Item REF(MHz)

Description

Select the reference frequency for Fine Flow mode. (When a biplane probe is used, this value can be specified separately for the T and L sides.)

[2]

PRF(Hz)

Select the velocity range of a Fine Flow-mode image.

[3]

Initial Gain (dB)

Select the gain value of a Fine Flow-mode image. (When a biplane probe is used, this value can be specified separately for the T and L sides.)

[4]

CFM Filter

Select the CFM filter that removes frequency components unnecessary for observing a Fine Flow-mode image.

[5]

Packet Size

Select the packet size (the minimum unit of size used for detecting color information) of a Fine Flow-mode image.

[6]

A.Suppress.

Select the level of suppressing body movement in a Fine Flow-mode image. Q1E-EA1203

233

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No [7]

Item

Description Select the smoothing level of a Fine Flow-mode

Smoothing

image. [8]

Select the persistence level of a Fine Flow-mode

Persistence

image. [9]

Select the dynamic range of a Fine Flow-mode

Dynamic Range

image. [10] Scan Line Density

Select the scan line density of a Fine Flow-mode image.

[11] PRF

PRF Priority

Select Frame Rate or Sensitivity as the PRF condition to be prioritized when Fine Flow mode is selected.

Max. operating

Select a value to limit PRF. When a value is

PRF (Hz)

set, the velocity range of a Fine Flow-mode image does not become the value specified here or a greater value. The sensitivity of a Fine Flow-mode image can be maintained if ROI is moved upward or downward.

[12] Preference

Mode

Select Auto to automatically superimpose a Fine Flow-mode image over a B-mode image. Select Manual to manually superimpose a Fine Flow-mode image over a B-mode image.

Level

Select the brightness level used as the threshold for displaying a B-mode image when Mode in the Preference section is set to Manual.

[13] Color Map

Color Map

Select the color map for Fine Flow mode.

Preset

Select a color map preset for use in this application. (For details about color map, see 13.2.11 Color Map.)

234

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

14.2.6 TDI item tabbed pages ··········································································· (1)

TDI_Dop page

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

[7]

Figure 14.2-15 TDI_Dop page Table 14.2-15 TDI_Dop page No

Item

Description

[1] FFT-ϒ

Select the dynamic range of a TDI-PW-mode image.

[2] Initial Gain (dB)

Select the gain value of a TDI-PW-mode image.

[3] Resolution

Select the number of analysis points (resolution) in a TDI-PW-mode image.

[4] Base Line Position

Specify the display position of the base line for TDI-PW mode.

[5] PRF(Hz)

Specify the velocity range (PRF) for TDI-PW mode.

[6] Sample Length (mm)

Specify the sample width for TDI-PW mode.

[7] Unit

Select the unit of display (m/s or cm/s) when the bar for correcting

Angle On

the angle is displayed in TDI-PW mode. Angle Off

Select the unit of display (m/s, cm/s, or kHz) when the bar for correcting the angle is not displayed in a TDI-mode image.

Q1E-EA1203

235

Chapter 14 - Application Function

(2)

TDI_Color page

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

[6]

[7]

Figure 14.2-16 TDI_Color page Table 14.2-16 TDI_Color page No

Item

[1] PRF (Hz)

Description Select the velocity range (PRF) of TDI-B-mode and TDI-M-mode images.

[2] Initial Gain (dB)

Select the gain value of TDI-B-mode and TDI-M-mode images.

[3] Smoothing

Select the smoothing level of TDI-B-mode and TDI-M-mode images.

[4] Persistence

Select the persistence level of TDI-B-mode and TDI-M-mode images.

[5] Blend

Select the transmission level of the blend function for TDI-B-mode and TDI-M-mode images.

[6] Color ROI

Width,

Select the width, height and Position (Depth) of color ROI for

Height,

TDI-B mode and TDI-M mode.

Position(D epth) [7] Color Map

Select the color map to be used in TDI-B mode and TDI-M mode.

236

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

14.2.7 Measurement item tabbed pages ··························································· Use these tabbed pages to specify settings on the Measurement item tabbed pages opened by pressing the MEAS. MENU key (1)

MEAS. MENU

.

Setting page

[1] [2]

Figure 14.2-17 Setting page

Q1E-EA1203

237

Chapter 14 - Application Function

Table 14.2-17 Setting page No

Item

Description

[1] Behavior in Freeze-Off Keep Locus

Specify whether to automatically delete the displayed measurement locus when the freeze function is released. Selected

The measurement locus remains when the freeze function is released.

Cleared

The measurement locus is deleted when the freeze function is released.

If the Continue Calip, Trace check box is cleared, caliper measurement and trace measurement are terminated and hidden regardless of the Keep Locus setting.

For

measurement

other

than

caliper

and

trace

measurement, if the Continue measurement after freeze off/cine operation checkbox that can be specified in Property of the Set Up Measurement window is cleared, the measurement is terminated and hidden regardless of the Keep Locus setting. For

details

about

settings

on

the

Continue

measurement after freeze off/cine operation check box, see the subsection Measurement Type in the chapter Measurement Setup in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Measurement. Continue Calip, Trace

Specify

whether

to

continue

caliper

and

trace

measurements when the freeze function is released. Selected

Caliper and trace measurements are not terminated when the freeze function is released.

Cleared

Caliper and trace measurements are terminated when the freeze function is released. (Caliper measurement and trace measurement are terminated regardless of the Keep Locus setting above.)

238

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No

Item

[2] When the Doppler mode is switched, it starts the

Description Select this check box to automatically start trace measurement when mode is changed to real-time Doppler mode.

trace measurement

Turning the freeze function on or off in B mode by using the UPDATE(NEXT) key UPDATE (NEXT)

(2)

is treated as the same operation as turning the freeze function on or off.

Region and Screen Button page Frequently used measurement functions can be assigned to the Measurement screen button

by mode.

In addition, the measurement region can also be specified. [6]

[1] [2]

[3] [4] [5]

Figure 14.2-18 Region and Screen Button page

Q1E-EA1203

239

Chapter 14 - Application Function

Table 14.2-18 Region and Screen Button page No

Item

[1] Region

Description Set the region for the measurements that can be performed when this application is used. For details about setting the region for measurement, see the chapter Measurement Setup in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Measurement.

[2] Measurement

The names of measurements and the measurement items that can be performed in the specified region are listed.

[3] Assign button

Use this button to assign the item you select in the Measurement list to the location you select in the Measurement Screen Button section.

[4] Delete button

Use this button to delete an item selected in the Measurement Screen Button section.

[5] Delete All button

Use this button to delete all items assigned to the buttons displayed in the Measurement Screen Button section.

[6] Measurement Screen Button

The measurement names and the measurement items currently assigned to screen buttons are displayed.

In addition to measurements, measurement items that satisfy the following conditions can be registered to a screen button: ƒ

The tool for the measurement item is the B-mode distance tool, boundary length tool, or B-mode area calculating tool.

ƒ

The display setting of the measurement item is a setting other than Appear.

ƒ

The measurement item is listed in the Measurement list (that is, it is not listed in the Item View list).

ƒ

The measurement function is not performed automatically.

ƒ

The measurement type is a type other than L/R.

When a measurement item is registered, only its measurement name is displayed. If you register measurement items that have the same name, you will not be able to distinguish what the displayed item name actually refers to. For such cases, we recommend that you change the item name in the Set Up Measurement window.

240

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

The following measurement items can be registered as the factory default: y

Measurement items from OB-STD/FetalPara and subdirectories

y

Measurement items from OB-STD/AFI and subdirectories

y

Measurement items from OB-Todai/FetalPara and subdirectories

y

Measurement items from OB-OsakaU/FetalPara and subdirectories

y

Measurement items from OB-JSUM/FetalPara and subdirectories

14.2.8 Body Mark item tabbed pages································································ Use these tabbed pages to specify the settings of body marks that can be switched by pressing the Body mark keys. (1)

Body Mark page

[1]

[2]

Figure 14.2-19 Body Mark page Table 14.2-19 Body Mark page No

Item

[1] Select Preset

Description

Assign the body mark setting to the application. For details about body mark settings, see 13.2.14 Body Mark.

[2] Ordering

Body marks registered in the region specified in the body mark setting procedure are displayed. When a body mark key is pressed, the body marks are displayed in the specified order.

Q1E-EA1203

241

Chapter 14 - Application Function

(2)

Location page Specify the body mark display location. You can specify a separate location for each image display mode. When you choose one of the buttons in the lower part of the tabbed page, the text in the selected frame turns yellow and you can move the body mark with the trackball. After moving the body mark to the specified location, press the ENTER key

ENTER

.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

Figure 14.2-20 Location page Table 14.2-20 Location page No

Item

[1] B button

Description Use this button to specify the body mark display location for single window display mode of a B-mode image.

[2] B/B-L button

Use this button to set the left window as the body mark display location for dual window display mode of a B-mode image.

[3] B/B-R button

Use this button to set the right window as the body mark display location for dual window display mode of a B-mode image.

[4] B/M(D)-LR button

Use this button to specify the body mark display location for dual window display mode of a B-mode image and another image, such as M-mode or D-mode image (referred to as B/M or B/D).

242

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

14.3 Edit PSS window In the Application Data Setting window, choosing the Edit PSS button displays the Edit PSS window, where you can set the PSS parameters. For details about each menu, see 14.3.1 and subsequent sections. Depending on the selected probe, some items are not displayed or cannot be selected. (1)

(2) (3) (4) (5)

(6)

Figure 14.3-1 Edit PSS window Table 14.3-1 Edit PSS window No

Item

Description

(1)

Preset Item

Select an item to edit it.

(2)

Information

The names of the probe and application currently being edited are displayed.

(3)

Preset Copy button

Use this button to display the Preset Copy window (For details, see 14.4 Preset Copy window).

(4)

Rename button

Use this button to change the name of the selected preset item.

(5)

Delete button

Use this button to delete the selected preset item.

(6)

Tabbed pages

Use the tabbed pages to specify the settings of each function. To change pages, choose the tab for another page above the currently open tab. For details about each tabbed page, see the subsequent sections.

Q1E-EA1203

243

Chapter 14 - Application Function

14.3.1 B page ····································································································

[1]

[7] [8]

[2]

[9] [10] [11] [12]

[3]

[13] [14]

[4] [6]

[5]

Figure 14.3-2 B page Table 14.3-2 B page No [1]

Item

Description Select the initial mode for displaying a B-mode image (dTHI

Mode

ON, or Fundamental). [2]

Frequency

dTHI

Select the frequency used when the dTHI function is executed.

Fundamental

Select the frequency used when the fundamental function is executed.

[3]

Initial Gain (dB)

[4]

HI Com

Select the gain value of a B-mode image.

HI Com

Select ON for B mode.

Compound

Select the number of images to be superimposed when the HI Com function is enabled.

[5]

HI REZ

HI REZ+

Select ON for B mode.

Level

Select the level for enhancing edges (HI REZ+ level) when the HI REZ+ function is enabled.

B-Enhance

Select the level for enhancing edges (B-Enhance) when the HI REZ+ function is turned off.

244

[6]

Texture

Select the texture for a B-mode image (Smooth or Sharp).

[7]

Scan Line Density

Select the setting of the scan line density of a B-mode image.

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No

Item

Description

[8]

Gray Map

Select the gray map for a B-mode image.

[9]

AGC

Select the AGC for a B-mode image.

[10]

Receiving Filter

Select the receiving filter for a B-mode image.

[11]

Persistence

Select the persistence level of a B-mode image.

[12]

Patient Dependent

Select the type of patient-dependent compensation (PDC) for

Compensation

a B-mode image.

[13]

Dynamic Range (dB)

Select the dynamic range of a B-mode image.

[14]

Comment

Enter comments regarding the preset.

14.3.2 M page ···································································································

[1]

[2]

Figure 14.3-3 M page Table 14.3-3 M page No [1] M Mode

Item

Description

Dynamic Range (dB) Select the dynamic range of an M-mode image. Gray Map

Select the gray map of an M-mode image.

Enhance

Select the enhancement level of an M-mode image.

Initial Gain (dB)

Select the initial gain of an M-mode image.

Q1E-EA1203

245

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No

Item AGC

[2] ODM Mode

Description Select the AGC of an M-mode image.

Dynamic Range (dB) Select the dynamic range of an ODM-mode image. Gray Map

Select the gray map of an ODM-mode image.

Enhance

Select the enhancement level of an ODM-mode image.

Initial Gain (dB)

Select the initial gain of an ODM-mode image.

14.3.3 Display page ···························································································

[1]

[2]

Figure 14.3-4 Display page Table 14.3-4 Display page No

Item

[1] B Mode, Post Processing

Description

ϒ Curve

Select the basic style of the ϒ curve.

ϒ

Select the ϒ factor for ϒ correction of a B-mode image.

Sat.

Specify the gradation level for driving the high-level echo into saturation at the maxim brightness for ϒ correction of the displayed image.

Rej.

Specify the gradation level for removing the low-level echo for ϒ correction of the displayed image.

Cent

246

Q1E-EA1203

Specify the center of the S-curve for S-curve ϒ correction.

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No

Item

[2] M Mode,

B Color

Select the color display map of a B-mode image.

ϒ Curve

Select the style of the correction curve for ϒ correction of an M-mode image.

Post Processing

Description

ϒ

Select the ϒ factor for ϒ correction of an M-mode image.

Sat.

Select the upper limit for the saturation brightness for ϒ correction of an M-mode image.

Rej.

Select the lower limit for the rejection brightness for ϒ correction of an M-mode image.

Cent

Select the inflection point level for S-curve ϒ correction.

M Color

Specify the color display map of an M-mode image.

14.4 Preset Copy window To copy the PSS settings, choose the Preset Copy button in the Edit PSS window. (3)

(1)

(4)

(2)

(5)

(6)

Figure 14.4-1 Preset Copy window

Q1E-EA1203

247

Chapter 14 - Application Function

Table 14.4-1 Preset Copy window No

Item

(1) Probe/Application

Description The names of the probe and application being edited are displayed.

(2) Preset Item

Presets specified for the probe being edited and for applications are listed. The selected preset is highlighted and details of the selected preset are displayed underneath.

(3) Probe

Select the probe of the copy destination and source. Use the combo box to change the probe.

(4) Application

Specify the application registered in the probe of the copy destination and source. Use the combo box to change the application.

(5) Preset Item

Presets specified for the probe of the copy destination and source, and for the application are listed. The selected preset is highlighted and details of the selected preset are displayed underneath.

(6) Preset Copy << button Preset Copy >> button

Use these buttons to copy a preset. When a button is chosen, a dialog box for entering the name of the preset to be created after copying appears. Enter a name and then choose the OK button.

248

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 14 - Application Function

14.5 Application Export / Import window The application export and import functions save applications to and load applications from external media. To display the Application Export / Import window, choose the Export/Import button in the Application window. (3)

(1) (2)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

Figure 14.5-1 Application Export / Import window Table 14.5-1 Application Export / Import window No

Item

Description

(1)

Probe View

The names of the probes registered in the system are listed.

(2)

Application View

The applications available for the selected probe are listed.

(3)

Media

Select the media to which an application is to be exported or from which it is to be imported.

(4)

Export >> button

Use this button to export the application you select in the list on the left of the Export button to the specified media in the right side list.

(5)

Import << button

Use this button to import the application you select in the list on the right of the Import button to the system in left side list.

(6)

Rename button

Use this button to change the name of the selected application.

Q1E-EA1203

249

Chapter 14 - Application Function

No

Item

Description

(7)

Delete button

Use this button to delete the selected application.

(8)

Save to Media button

Use this button to save the selected application to media. The edit result is not saved to media until this button is chosen.

(9)

Close button

y

Use this button to close this window.

When an application is imported or exported and an application with the same name for the same probe already exists at the import or export destination, a similar name is temporarily given to the imported or exported application. To rename the application later, select the imported or exported application, and then choose the Rename button.

y

Imported or exported data is not saved to media until the Save to Media button is chosen. You must choose the Save to Media button to save the data.

y

If the number of applications added to the system per probe reaches 10, the Import button is grayed out and no more applications can be imported to the probe.

y

250

Q1E-EA1203

We recommend that you use DVD-RAM for reliability.

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

Chapter 15 - Filing Function 15.1 Overview 15.1.1 Overview of the filing function ································································ The filing function is used to save images, measurement results, and other data during an examination, and to efficiently view, review, or back up this data after an examination. The filing function has two aspects: z

Saving data Data including Single Images, Multi Images, and measurement data, can be saved. The displayed image can be recorded as a Single Image, and the filing function can create video from Multi Images stored in the cine memory. A maximum of 60 GB of data can be saved on the internal hard disk. Single Images can be saved in BMP, TIFF, or JPEG image format, and Multi Images can be saved as video in AVI image format to external media or in a network folder. The images saved on the internal hard disk can be converted for transfer.

z

Viewing data In the Filing window, you can easily view data such as images, read saved data, delete unnecessary data, and replace data. The function of the network can be used after an optional network interface unit is installed.

15.1.2 Notes on using data ··············································································· z

Hitachi Medical Corporation shall not be liable for any loss of data resulting from an unforeseen accident, malfunction, or operating error. Make sure that all important data is backed up.

z

Before recording important data, make sure that the data can be successfully saved before starting the actual recording.

z

The internal hard disk capacity is limited. If the remaining hard disk capacity is too low, the system operation might be adversely affected. If this happens when attempting to save images to the hard disk, delete some images on the hard disk. When you delete important data, verify that the data has been saved to at least two different media before deleting the data.

z

The quality of Single Images and Multi Images is degraded if they are compressed. Compress data only if the quality of the data will have no adverse effects on the diagnosis. Q1E-EA1203

251

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

z

On a PC, do not change the names of files and folders containing examination data located on external media. If you do, the system will not be able to read the examination data.

z

Do not eject external media while sending data to and receiving data from the media. If you do so, the system might fail to work properly, or the media might be damaged so that it is no longer usable.

z

Always use the EJECT key

EJECT

to eject media from the DVD multi-drive.

Otherwise, the media will no longer be usable. z

Do not turn off the breaker switch while saving data. Doing so might damage the drive, disks, or data on the disks.

z

If you press the ON/STANDBY key

while data is being saved, the system does not

shut down. When you want to shut down the system, press the ON/STANDBY key

only after

all data has been saved. z

If you press the End Exam key

End Exam

while data is being saved, the examination has not

terminated. When you want to terminate the examination, turn off the End Exam key End Exam

only after all data has been saved.

z

Do not use damaged media. If you do so, the system might not work properly.

z

When you remove a USB memory device or USB HDD, always use the Safely Remove Hardware window. However, we recommend that you use a DVD-RAM as the way to securely save data, since USB memory devices and USB HDD, subject to removal at any time, are not a secure means of saving data. For details about the Safely Remove Hardware window, see 13.1.5 Remove Hardware.

z

Note that if you change the DGA or BSA while reviewing Single Images or Multi Images, that change is not reflected in the DGA or BSA on the recorded images.

z

When you perform measurements that are affected by the DGA or BSA value, the values appearing in the Patient Information window or Measurement Report window are used. Therefore, if necessary, check these values to perform measurement.

15.1.3 Notes on using the Filing function··························································· z

Do not load data created with equipment using software version V01-** or later into equipment that uses software version V00-65 or earlier. If the data is loaded into such equipment, the data might not be displayed correctly in the list view in the Filing window. To confirm the software version, first open the System Settings window, which is accessed by selecting Tab menu, Setup, and then System. Then, select the Soft Option section to display the Soft Option window, where the software version is shown.

z

To record data to media that was created on a device with a different software version, from the Filing window, select the target location list, refresh the database, and then record the data.

z

Data created by using an EUB series ultrasound system or the HI VISION 900 cannot be read by this equipment.

252

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

z

Functionality for saving data directly to the hard disk without using the Filing function is provided as an option. If you use this option to save data to the hard disk, the amount of hard disk space available for the Filing function decreases by the amount used for the option.

z

After the system is started, it might take a few seconds for DVD-RAM or DVD-R or network folder to become ready.

z

After the system is started, if an error occurs while reading data from or saving data to a network folder, wait about two minutes and then retry the operation. If the problem is not resolved, shut down the system, turn off the breaker switch, wait 30 seconds, and then restart the system.

z

While data is being read or saved, a title bar might appear in the ultrasound image display area or image update might temporarily stop. These errors will be corrected when processing of the data is completed. Wait for the operation to be completed.

z

If you change the DVD-RAM or DVD-R media when the Copy window or File Convert window is open, the information about the available disk space is not updated. Select DVD-RAM or DVD-R for the drive again.

z

Do not remove the selected probe from the probe connector on the equipment while the filing function is being used to review images. If you do so, the system might fail to work properly.

15.1.4 Basic operations····················································································· (1)

Saving images and measurement results If you press one of the REC1 to REC5 keys when the function for recording Single Images is assigned to it, the ultrasound image currently being displayed is recorded to the hard disk. After measurement has been performed, the measurement data can be saved in the Measurement Report window displayed by pressing the REPORT key

REPORT

. For

information about saving the measurement data, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Measurement. (2)

Playing back data Pressing the READ key

READ

while freeze mode is activated displays the Filing window,

where saved data can be viewed. When the data to be reviewed is selected by using the pointer, checkbox of the data is checked. If the Select All button at the lower left of the window is chosen, all data are selected. If the Retrieve button at the bottom of the window is chosen, the window changes and only the data of which the checkbox is checked are displayed.

Q1E-EA1203

253

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.2 Settings in the Set Up Filing window In the tab menu area, choose Setup and then Filing. The Set Up Filing window for specifying filing settings appears. Settings are specified in several different windows, which are described in sections 16.2.1 to 16.2.4.

15.2.1 Common ································································································· Specify the common settings that are independent of the type of examination data in this window. (1)

Destination Select a location for saving data.

Figure 15.2-1 Set Up Filing window (Destination under Common) If the Use the data destination as a common setting check box is selected, Single Images, Multi Images, measurement data, and the optional 3D Images are saved to the same location. Selecting the check box next to a location displayed in the Destination list saves the data to that location.

254

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

If a power failure occurs due to some unexpected problem during operations, the data that was being saved to a DVD-RAM right before the power failure is sometimes lost. For safer operation, we recommend always saving data to a hard disk and a DVD-RAM at the same time. y

When destination of measurement is set to DVD-RAM, the destination is set to DVD-RAM and HardDisk.When the function of Auto Read is used, the result is read from DVD-RAM.

y

When destination of measurement is set to DVD-RAM, the destination is set to DVD-RAM and HardDisk.When the function of History is used, the result is read from DVD-RAM.

(2)

Details Specify the detailed settings for the filing function. [1] [2] [3]

[4]

Figure 15.2-2 Set Up Filing window (Details under Common)

Q1E-EA1203

255

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

Table 15.2-1 Set Up Filing window (Details under Common) No

Item

[1] Timing of Transfer

Description Select whether a transfer is to be on an image basis or a patient basis. Every image

：

Every image is transferred.

Every patient

：

Pressing the End Exam key or the Patient key

End Exam

transfers

the images. For details, see 15.7 Collectively transferring images.

If Every image is selected in Timing of Transfer and images are saved to external media such as DVD-RAM or network folder, it might take about 10 seconds to complete saving of each image. If you want to save images to the external media, we recommend that you select Every patient in Timing of Transfer, or that you save images to the hard disk and then copy all images to the external media.

[2] Record/Print area

Select whether to record the basic area only or to record the full screen when an image is to be transferred or printed. For details about the basic area, see Figure 1.1-1. This setting takes effect when any of the following methods is used: - Printing using an image printer (PC printer or DICOM printer) - Printing using a USB printer

For devices connected to the video signal output terminal, only the basic area is recorded, regardless of this setting.

256

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

No

Item

[3] Color select for Record Image

Description Specify the color setting for output of an image. :

B/W Mode

Select this mode for images in B mode, M mode, and Doppler mode.

:

Color Mode

Select this mode for images when color mode is used.

Regardless of the mode in which an image is output, the image can be recorded in either black-and-white mode or color mode.

In the following case, the image is recorded with the color image setting. y

Dialog boxes and the Patient Information window, etc

[4] Masking area

y

Multi Images in AVIm image formats

y

An MPEG multi images

Select the areas to be masked when the masking copy function is used. You can specify the following areas: - Hospital Name - Examined by (the name of the person who examined the patient) - Examination date - Patient ID, Patient Name - Added Info in basic area (Age, Sex, BSA)

Q1E-EA1203

257

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(3)

Network Folder Specify the network folder settings.

Figure 15.2-3 Set Up Filing window (Network Folder under Common) When the Register button is chosen, the Registered Folders window appears. When you select a folder that you want to register and then choose the OK button, the folder is added to the Registered Folders list. The folder is also added, with the check box selected, to the list of destinations for both Single Images and Multi Images. To delete a registered folder, select the folder from the Registered Folders list and select the Delete button. Assign names by using 63 characters or less to registered network folders. You cannot use the symbol “ % ” “ ; ” “ ' ”

258

Q1E-EA1203

in the name.

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.2.2 Recording Single Image ········································································· Specify the setting for recording Single Images when the REC1 to REC5 keys to which the function for recording Single Images has been assigned is pressed.

(1) (2)

Figure 15.2-4 Set Up Filing window (Recording Single Image) Table 15.2-2 Set Up Filing window (Recording Single Image) No (1)

(2)

Item

Description

Image

BMP, TIFF, or JPEG can be selected. In TIFF image format, the compression method

Format

can be set to None (no compression) or PackBits.

Destination

Selecting the check box next to a location displayed in the Destination list saves Single Images to that location.

If a power failure occurs due to some unexpected problem during operations, the data that was being saved to a DVD-RAM right before the power failure is sometimes lost. For safer operation, we recommend always saving data to a hard disk and a DVD-RAM at the same time. If the Use the data destination as a common setting check box is selected, the save locations are grayed out and cannot be selected. Clear the Use the data destination as a common setting check box by using the procedure described in (1) Destination in 15.2.1 Common when you individually set the save location.

Q1E-EA1203

259

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.2.3 Recording Multi Image············································································ Specify the recording destination and the recording image format for recording Multi Images when the REC1 to REC5 keys to which the function for recording Multi Images has been assigned is pressed. (1)

General Specify the settings for Multi Images to be recorded when the REC1 to REC5 keys to which the function for recording Multi Images has been assigned is pressed.

Figure 15.2-5 Set Up Filing window (General under Recording Multi Image) Selecting the check box next to a location displayed in the Destination list saves Multi Images to that location. If a power failure occurs due to some unexpected problem during operations, the data that was being saved to a DVD-RAM right before the power failure is sometimes lost. For safer operation, we recommend always saving data to a hard disk and a DVD-RAM at the same time. If the Use the data destination as a common setting check box is selected, the save locations are grayed out and cannot be selected. Clear the Use the data destination as a common setting check box by using the procedure described in (1) Destination in 15.2.1 Common when you individually set the save location.

260

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(2)

Preset Specify the recording conditions for Multi Images. Each of eight presets can be associated with an application as a recording condition. A Multi Image is recorded under the condition set for the preset associated with the application. Specify the recording settings according to the use of an application, including regions. To change the association between an application and a preset, see (7) Image Filing page of the General item in 13.2.3 Region Data Setting.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

Figure 15.2-6 Set Up Filing window (Preset under Recording Multi Image) Items that can be specified only when optional Digital Video Archiving Software is installed are grayed out.

Table 15.2-3 Set Up Filing window (Preset under Recording Multi Image) No

Item

[1] Image Format

Description Select the image format for recording Multi Images from AVI [Not compressed] and AVI (Compression) [Microsoft Video 1 Compression].

Q1E-EA1203

261

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

No

Item

[2] Mode

Description Select the mode for recording Multi Images from the following. :

F-F out

Randomly selected consecutive frames are recorded as a single file.

:

R-R out

Randomly selected frames between R-wave time phases are recorded as a single file. The settings of this mode are activated only when ECG mode is activated.

:

ALL

All cine images are recorded as a single file. Range and Number cannot be selected.

[3] Range

Select the recording range from the following. Manual

:

Specify the start and end points of the image to be transferred in the cine memory. For R-R out, an image is created between R waves that contain randomly selected frames.

Auto

:

Frames specified in the Number section described below are recorded automatically.

[4] Number

Specify the number of frames to be recorded. When F-F out is selected

:

The images of the frames selected for the F-F out setting are recorded.

When R-R out is selected

:

The images of the frames selected for the R-R out setting are recorded.

262

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.2.4 Measurement Filing················································································ Specify a destination for saving measurements. Moreover, when the function of Auto Read or the function of History are used, it is read from this set place. Please set to one measurement destination when you use the function of Auto Read or the function of History.

Figure 15.2-7 Set Up Filing window (Measurement Filing) Selecting the check box next to a location displayed in the Destination list saves the data to that location. If a power failure occurs due to some unexpected problem during operations, the data that was being saved to a DVD-RAM right before the power failure is sometimes lost. For safer operation, we recommend always saving data to a hard disk and a DVD-RAM at the same time.

Q1E-EA1203

263

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

y

If the Use the data destination as a common setting check box is selected, the save locations are grayed out and cannot be selected. Clear the Use the data destination as a common setting check box by using the procedure described in (1) Destination in 15.2.1 Common when you individually set the save location.

y

When destination of measurement is set to DVD-RAM, the destination is set to DVD-RAM and HardDisk.When the function of Auto Read is used, the result is read from DVD-RAM.

y

When destination of measurement is set to DVD-RAM, the destination is set to DVD-RAM and HardDisk.When the function of History is used, the result is read from DVD-RAM.

15.2.5 Specifying the retrieval interval ······························································· Specify the retrieval (update) interval for slide shows.

Figure 15.2-8 Set Up Filing window (Retrieve)

264

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.3 Saving examination data (1)

Recording Single Images Specify a destination for saving Single Images before you save them. For details, see 15.2 Settings in the Set Up Filing window. When you press the REC1 to REC5 keys to which the function for recording Single Images has been assigned, the ultrasound image currently being displayed is recorded. While a Single Image is being recorded, the Recording symbol appears in the system information display area.

Figure 15.3-1 Recording symbol (2)

Recording Multi Images Before saving Multi Images, specify a destination for saving them. For details, see 15.2 Settings in the Set Up Filing window. If you press the REC1 to REC5 keys to which the function for recording Multi Images has been assigned, a Multi Image is created and recorded. While a Multi Image is being created, the Creating symbol appears in the system information display area.

Figure 15.3-2 Creating symbol To cancel the operation while a Multi Image is being created, press the UNDO key y

UNDO

.

You cannot record Multi Images in DICOM format while the 4D display unit is running.

y

While a Multi Image is being created, the system CPU is under heavy load. If this situation continues, the time setting might be delayed. The time setting will be automatically corrected when the system is restarted.

(3)

Measurement filing After measurement is performed, the measurement data can be saved in the Measurement Report window that is displayed when the REPORT key

REPORT

is pressed.

For how to save measurement data, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Measurement.

Q1E-EA1203

265

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(4)

Temporarily changing settings Settings, including destination and recording conditions can be temporarily changed by choosing the Tool tab menu and then Filing. For details, see 15.2 Settings in the Set Up Filing window. You can easily switch the Multi-Image recording conditions to preset conditions by choosing Import from the Preset drop-down list. The temporarily changed settings are valid until the system is turned off, an application is executed, or the setting is reset in the Set Up Filing window.

Figure 15.3-3 Preset window

266

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.4 Filing window 15.4.1 Operations in the Filing window ····························································· If the READ key

READ

is pressed in freeze mode, the Filing window for reviewing stored

images appears. y

The first time you press the READ key

READ

after turning on the system, a

connection might not be established. This occurs when the transfer destination of the the REC1 to REC5 keys to which the recording Single Image function is assigned is a network folder. (Occurrence of this symptom is related to the performance and settings of the destination PC.) If a connection cannot be established, close the Filing window, and then press the READ key y

READ

again.

If a USB memory device that is not recommended is connected, the Filing window might not be displayed. In this case, remove the USB memory device.

y

Do not remove a USB memory device or USB HDD when the Filing window is displayed.

y

If the destination network is disconnected, it might take some time for the Filing window to open.

（2） （3）

（4）

（5）（6） （11） （10） （9） （8） （7）

（1）

（12）

（14） （13）

Figure 15.4-1 Filing window

Q1E-EA1203

267

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(1)

Location list Specify the location from where the data is to be read.

(2)

Set Up button above the Location list Use the Set Up button to specify a location for inclusion in the Location list. [3]

[2]

[1]

[4]

[5]

Figure 15.4-2 Location List Set Up window Table 15.4-1 Items in the Location List Set Up window No. [1]

Item Browsing Location list

Description Lists the locations currently displayed in the Location list.

[2]

Non Browsing Location list

Lists the locations that can be added to the Location list.

[3]

€ and  buttons

Use these buttons to add and delete locations to and from the Location list.

[4]

 and ‚ buttons

Use these buttons to change the display sequence of the locations in the Browsing Location list.

[5]

Network Set Up button

Use this button to add the network folder to the Browsing Location list.

(3)

Q/R button Use the Q/R button to find and display images transferred to the DICOM server. (This button is available when the optional DICOM software for the transfer and storage services and the DICOM software for the Query/Retrieve service are installed. In addition,

268

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

if you search an image, and to display it from server, it is necessary to be installed an optional network interface unit.) (4)

Transfer spool button Use this button to display the transfer status. For details, see 15.4.7 Transfer spool.

(5)

Patient list Select the patient to be displayed in the list view in the lower part of the window from the Patient list. The Patient list displays the patients saved in the specified location. When the check box of a patient is selected, the applicable data is displayed in the list view in the lower part of the window.

(6)

Set Up button above the Patient list Use this Set Up button to specify patient information for inclusion in the Patient list.

[1] [2]

[3]

Figure 15.4-3 Patient List Set Up window Table 15.4-2 Items in the Patient List Set Up window No.

Item

Description

[1]

Display list

Lists the items displayed in the Patient list.

[2]

 and ‚ buttons

Use these buttons to change the sequence of the selected items.

[3]

Sort by

Use these radio buttons to specify listing of the items in the Patient list in either ascending or descending order.

Q1E-EA1203

269

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(7)

All button above the Patient list When all of the check boxes for all patients have been selected in the Patient list, use this button to clear the check boxes. When none or only some of the check boxes have been selected, use this button to select all of the check boxes in the list.

(8)

Study Date list Select the examination date to be displayed in the list view in the lower part of the window from the Study Date list. The Study Date list displays examination dates saved in the specified location. If you select the check box of an examination date, the applicable data is displayed in the list view in the lower part of the window.

(9)

Set Up button above the Study Date list Use this Set Up button to specify the display sequence of the items in the Study Date list.

Figure 15.4-4 Study List Set Up window (10) All button above the Study Date list When all of the check boxes for all examination dates have been selected in the Study Date list, use this button to clear all the check boxes. When none or only some of the check boxes have been selected, use this button to select all of the check boxes in the list. (11) Searching You can search for data by using either patient information or a date as a keyword. Specify the search target in the combo box next to the Search button, enter a search keyword as necessary, and then press the Search button to execute the (narrowed) data search.

[1]

Figure 15.4-5 Searching for data

270

Q1E-EA1203

[2]

[3]

[4]

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

If you change list view details by changing the search condition or similar item while transfer is still in progress, the transfer status and backup location displays are not automatically updated when the transfer is complete. Press the Search button to update the displays.

[1] Search If you select Current Exam. or Today's Study for Search, the search runs automatically. [2] Keyword search You can also perform the following types of keyword searches depending on the selected Search area: ●

Input the search keyword if you select Search All, Patient ID, Patient Name, Additional Patient History, or Comment for Search. If you select Search All for Search, search from the following items: Patient ID, Patient Name, Study Date, Body Part Exam., Examined by, Ref. Physician, Additional Patient History, Application, or Comment.

●

Select the displayed keyword or input the search keyword if you select Study Date, Application, Body Part Exam., Examined by, Ref. Physician, or Transfer Status for Search.

y

Data containing the character string specified for the search and the keyword are displayed as the search result. y Example of search

y

Keyword

: OKA

Search result

: OKADA, OKAYAMA, YAMAOKA

Search condition Application sets images as the search object. Measurements and optional measurements are not displayed in the search result.

y

If searching by time period, you can search in monthly units by specifying the month and year using Search All. y Example of search Keyword

: 2009/08

Search result : Images registered in Aug. 2009

[3] Search button Choosing the Search button after entering a keyword starts the data search on the specified drive. The retrieved data containing the keyword is listed in the list view in the lower part of the window. Q1E-EA1203

271

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

When DICOM is selected in the Location list, the following items can be selected in the Search area: y

Current Exam.

y

Patient ID

y

Patient Name

y

Study Date

y

Today's Study

[4] Show All button Use this button to run the search with Search All specified for Search and nothing entered in the keyword text box. Displaying thumbnail images might take longer if there are many images to be displayed.

(12) List view The data filtered by the search, Location list, Patient list, and Study Date list is displayed. You can select the types of data to be displayed by choosing the appropriate tab. Choosing the All tab displays all types of data. For details, see 15.4.2 Viewing data. (13) Status display The following status information is displayed: [1] Avail (Available disk space) [2] Save Limit The approximate number and/or duration of Single Images (Images), Multi Images (Clips), 3D Volume Data (optional), and Long-time Recordings (optional) that can be saved by using the currently selected format is displayed. [3] Volumes (Number of selected files) [4] Selected (Size of the selected file) If a format that compresses images, such as JPEG (Lossy) or TIFF (PackBits), is selected, the size of an image is determined after the compression. Accordingly, the size might not change before and after the transfer.

272

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(14) Close button Use this button to close the Filing window and return to the original screen. y

When the list view is in Detailed view mode, you can sort the listed items in ascending order or descending order by clicking a column header.

y

When the list view is in Detailed view mode, you can change the width of a column or the column order by dragging the column header.

Q1E-EA1203

273

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.4.2 Viewing data ··························································································· Choose the Exam data tab to display the saved images.

（2） （3） （1）

（4） （9） （10）

（5）

（6）

Figure 15.4-6 Viewing examination data

274

Q1E-EA1203

（7）

（8）

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

Choosing the Measurement Data tab displays the stored measurement data. For details about the measurement, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Measurement.

（11）

（12）

（4） （9） （10）

（5）

（8）

Figure 15.4-7 Viewing measurement data

Q1E-EA1203

275

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

Choosing the Option measurement data tab displays the data for optional measurements. For details about the optional measurement, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Measurement.

(14) (13)

(15) (10) (4)

(5)

(8)

Figure 15.4-8 Viewing optional measurement data

276

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

Choosing the All tab displays a list of examination data, measurement data, and optional measurement data.

（16）

（4） （10） （5）

（8）

Figure 15.4-9 Displaying all saved data

(1)

Examination data list Examination data is displayed. To enlarge an image, press the UNDO key

UNDO

on the thumbnail.

To view the information about an image displayed in thumbnail view, place the pointer on the thumbnail. The following information is displayed when Detailed view is selected. Table 15.4-3 Detailed view list Item Name

Description

Patient ID

The patient ID entered in the Patient Information window is displayed.

Patient Name

The patient name entered in the Patient Information window is displayed.

Save Date

The date and time the image was saved are displayed.

Body Part Exam.

The region entered in the Patient Information window is displayed.

Examined by

The examiner name entered in the Patient Information window is displayed. Q1E-EA1203

277

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

Item Name Ref. Physician

Description The name of the doctor entered in the Patient Information window is displayed.

(2)

Image Format

The format of the image is displayed.

Size

The file size of the image is displayed.

Backup to

The backup location of the image is displayed.

Transfer Status

The transfer status of the image is displayed.

Check

The selection status of the image is displayed.

Line up Select the keyword on which to sort thumbnail images.

(3)

View Select either Thumbnail view or Detailed view.

(4)

Select all and Select clear buttons Use these buttons to select or deselect all the examination data listed in the list view.

(5)

Copy and Delete buttons Use these buttons to copy the selected data to other disks and to delete the data. For details, see 15.4.3 Using files.

(6)

Convert button Use this button to convert the image format of the selected image data to copy it to other disks. For details, see 15.4.3 Using files. Because format conversion is impossible while the 4D display unit is running, the Convert button is dimmed at such times.

(7)

Print button Use this button to output the selected thumbnail image to a PC printer or a DICOM printer. For details, see Chapter 16 - Image Print Function.

(8)

Property button This button is available when only one data item is selected. Use this button to display the property information for the selected data item. For details, see 15.4.5 Displaying patient information.

278

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(9)

Retrieve button Use this button to view the selected data. When the selected data is an image, the image is played back. For details, see 15.5 Review window. When the selected data is a measurement, the data appears in the measurement report window.

(10) Create Data-Disc button Use this button to create a DVD data disc from the selected data. For details, see 15.4.6 Burning a data disc. (11) Measurement list The details of measurement data are displayed. The following table explains each item. Table 15.4-4 Measurement data list Item Name

Description

Patient ID

The patient ID entered in the Patient Information window is displayed.

Patient Name

The patient name entered in the Patient Information window is displayed.

Study Date

The date and time the measurement data was studied is displayed.

Auto Read

This item indicates whether the measurement data can be automatically read.

Backup to

The backup location of the measurement data is displayed

Check

The selection status of the measurement data is displayed.

(12) Measurement item list The details of the measurement data selected in the measurement data list are displayed. The following table explains each item. Table 15.4-5 Measurement item list Item Name

Description

Measurement

The name of the measurement item is displayed.

Type

The type of the measurement item is displayed.

(13) Optional measurement list The optional measurement data is listed. The following table explains each item. Table 15.4-6 Optional measurement data list Item Name

Description

Patient ID

The patient ID entered in the Patient Information window is displayed.

Patient Name

The patient name entered in the Patient Information window is displayed

Save Date

The date and time the optional measurement data was saved are displayed.

Q1E-EA1203

279

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

Item Name

Description The date and time the image used for analysis was saved are displayed.

Save Date of Analysis Image

The diagnosed body part providing the optional measurement data is

Body Part

displayed. Type

The type of the optional measurement data is displayed.

Study Date

The date and time the measurement data was studied is displayed.

Backup to

The backup location of the optional measurement data is displayed.

Check

The selection status of the examination data is displayed.

(14) Measurement You can appoint the kind of the option measurement to display. (15) Create button The viewer of an optional measurement selected in a measurement item is displayed. (16) All list Images, measurements, and optional measurements are displayed. All of the information displayed in the image list, measurement list, and optional measurement list is displayed.

15.4.3 Using files ······························································································· File operations are performed for the selected data. y

If a thumbnail image is selected, a check mark appears at the upper right of the image.

y

When you select a thumbnail image, the selected image is enclosed by a dashed line. Press the Space key to reverse the selection status of the image enclosed by the dashed line. (The dashed line does not indicate selection status.)

(1)

Copying data Choosing the Copy button in the Filing window displays the Copy window. Use the window to copy the selected data to other drives. While the data is being copied, Now transfer appears in the system information display area.

280

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

[1] [2] [3]

Figure 15.4-10 Copy window Table 15.4-7 Copy window No

Item

[1] Destination

Description Select the transfer destination. If you want to temporarily transfer data to a network server, specify the transfer destination after choosing the View button.

(2)

[2] Avail

Displays the amount of free space at the transfer destination.

[3] Media Format button

Use this button to display the window for formatting media.

Deleting data Choosing the Delete button in the Filing window or Retrieval display window deletes the selected data.

(3)

Converting data Choosing the Convert button while examination data is being displayed in the list view of the Filing window displays the File Convert window. Use the window to convert the image format of the selected image and copy it to other drives.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[5]

Figure 15.4-11 File Convert window

Q1E-EA1203

281

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

Table 15.4-8 File Convert window No

Item

[1] Destination

Description Select the transfer destination. If you want to temporarily transfer data to a network server, specify the transfer destination after choosing the View button.

[2] Avail

Displays the amount of free space at the transfer destination.

[3] Media Format button

Displays the window for formatting media.

[4] File Convert

To change the format of image data, select the applicable check box. 1. From BMP to Image data can be converted to TIFF or JPEG imgae format. For TIFF image format, select either None (not compressed) or PackBits as the compression method. If optional software for transferring DICOM images is installed, DICOM or DICOM JPEG (Lossy) can be selected. 2. From AVI to Select files compressed in AVI (Compression) [Microsoft Video 1 Compression] format. If optional software for transferring DICOM images is installed, DICOM or DICOM JPEG (Lossy) can be selected. 3. From AVIm to If optional software for transferring DICOM images is installed, DICOM JPEG (Lossy) can be selected. When using the masking copy function, data can be converted to a file compressed in the AVI (Compression) [Microsoft Video 1 Compression] format.

282

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

No

Item

Description

[5] Without personal

To delete personal information contained in the data to be copied

information

(masking copy), select the Without personal information check box. By using the masking copy function, the specified location in the window can be hidden and patient information such as patient name and date of birth can be deleted. Additionally, the patient ID can be changed to M_YYYYMMDDhhmmss (Study Date).

y

A TIFF (PackBits) image format is changed to an un-compressed TIFF image format.

y

When an image is converted to an irreversibly compressed image for example, to a JPEG image format or AVI (Compression) [MicrosoftVideo 1 Compression] format, the image format is re-created. As a result, the file size is changed and the quality of the image is degraded.

y

Masking copy data is managed by using the patient ID (M_examination-date/time). If multiple masking copies are made at one time of data for multiple patients with the same examination date/time, or if data of the same examination date/time from multiple devices is saved in the same network folder, the same patient ID (M_examination-date/time) is displayed for all of the masking copy data.

y

If multiple masking copies are made at one time from examination data, and the masking copy data is stored in external media, all of the masking copy data is stored in the same folder of the external media (see 15.8.1 Folder configuration). However, when you reference the examination data in the Filing window after the masking copy has been created, individual patient information is displayed for each image.

Q1E-EA1203

283

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

y

Images saved in DICOM image format and images for which a dialog window opens cannot be copied without personal information. Check thumbnail images and image formats before selecting an image.

y

When data in AVIm image format is changed to AVI (Compression) [Microsoft Video 1 Compression] format, the file size is changed and the quality of the image is degraded.

284

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.4.4 Printing an image ··················································································· When examination data is displayed in the list view of a Filing window, you can choose the Print button to print the selected image. For details, see Chapter 16 - Image Print Function.

15.4.5 Displaying patient information ································································ When the Property button in the Filing window is chosen, the Property window appears. Use this window to display the patient information of the selected data. The patient information that can be displayed is any information entered in the Patient Information window.

(1)

Patient information This page displays the information about a patient.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

Figure 15.4-12 Property window (Patient Information page)

Q1E-EA1203

285

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

Table 15.4-9 Property window (Patient Information page) No

Item

Description

[1] Patient ID

Displays the patient ID.

[2] Patient Name

Displays the name of the patient.

[3] Sex

Displays the sex of the patient.

[4] Birth Date

Displays the patient's date of birth.

[5] Other Patient

Displays another patient ID.

ID [6] Patient

Displays a comment.

Comment

(2)

Study information This page displays the information about an examination.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

Figure 15.4-13 Property window (Study Information page) Table 15.4-10 Items in the Property window (Study Information page) No.

286

Item

Description

[1]

History

Displays any additional medical history.

[2]

Age

Displays age.

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

No.

Item

Description

[3]

Weight

Displays weight.

[4]

Height

Displays height.

[5]

Pregnancy

Indicates whether the patient is pregnant.

Status

(3)

[6]

Description

Displays a description of the examination.

[7]

Accession#

Displays the control number.

[8]

Ref. Physician

Displays the name of the doctor who requested the examination.

Series information This page displays additional information.

[1] [2]

Figure 15.4-14 Property window (Series Information page) Table 15.4-11 Items in the Property window (Series Information page) No. [1]

Item Body Part

Description Displays the examined part.

Exam. [2]

Examined

Displays the name of the examiner.

by

Q1E-EA1203

287

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(4)

Image information This page displays the information about the images that have been taken.

[1]

Figure 15.4-15 Property window (Image Information page) Table 15.4-12 Items in the Property window (Image Information page) No. [1]

(5)

Item Image Type

Description Displays the type of the image.

Close button Use this button to close the Property window.

288

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.4.6 Burning a data disc················································································· When the Create Data-Disc button is chosen in the Filing window, the Burn a Disc window appears. Use this window to write the selected examination data to DVD-R media to create a data disc. The created data disc can be viewed in the Filing window.

(1)

(3) (2)

(5) (4)

Figure 15.4-16 Burn a Disc window While the 4D display unit is running, File Convert and Without personal information is not displayed at such times.

(1)

Select Data The data to be written to a disc is displayed in list form. When the check box of a data item is selected, the data for that item is written to the disc.

(2)

Settings Specify the settings for writing data to the disc. Specify the following items: [1] Volume label Specify the volume label of the data disc that will be created. [2] Burn speed Select the speed for writing data to the disc.

Q1E-EA1203

289

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

[3] Compare the data after burning When this check box is selected, the data written to the disc is compared with the original data after writing is complete to verify its accuracy. The comparison of data takes about the same amount of time as writing it.

[4] Eject disc after burning When this check box is selected, the disc will be ejected after writing data to the disc has been completed. [5] Without personal information Select this check box to create a masked copy. For details, see (3) Converting data in 15.4.3 Using files. [6] File Convert If you select the format that you want from the combo box of the file format, you can convert the image data format. For details, see (3) Converting data in 15.4.3 Using files. (3)

Media information The estimated size of the data, the available space on the media, and the type of the media when data is to be written to media are displayed. The estimated size displayed is an approximate value. If Without personal information is selected or image format conversion is selected in File Convert, the actual written size might differ considerably from the estimated size.

(4)

Burn button When this button is chosen, creation of the data disc starts. If you want to cancel the burning of a data disc before the operation is complete, choose the Cancel button in the displayed dialog box. Additional data cannot be written to a data disc once it has been burned. If you cancel the burning of a data disc before the operation is completed, no more data can be read from or written to the data disc.

290

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(5)

Close button Use this button to close the Burn a Disc window. When a DVD-RAM or DVD-R to which images have been written is inserted into the DVD multi-drive, the images might not be displayed in the Filing window. In this case, remove and reinsert the DVD-RAM or DVD-R into the drive, and then check the Filing window again.

Q1E-EA1203

291

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.4.7 Transfer spool························································································· When the Transfer spool button is chosen in the Filing window, the Transfer Spool window appears. Use this window to check the processing status of each transferred item, and to stop or resume the transfer of each item. (1)

(2) (3) (4)

(5)

(6)

Figure 15.4-17 Transfer Spool window Table 15.4-13 Transfer Spool window No

Item

(1) Transfer spool list

Description The following table lists the transfer statuses. Status Transferring

Description Data is being transferred. When the data transfer is complete, that item is deleted from this list.

Waiting

Data is waiting to be transferred. When the transfer of the data item listed above this one is complete, transfer of this data item starts.

Stopped

Data transfer has stopped because the Stop button was chosen.

(2) Pause button

Use this button to pause the transfer of the data item selected in the Transfer spool list.

(3) Delete button

Use this button to cancel the transfer of the data item selected in the Transfer spool list and to remove the data item from the list.

292

(4) Restart button

Use this button to resume a transfer that has been paused.

(5) Select All button

Use this button to select all items in the list.

(6) Select Clear button

Use this button to clear the selection of all items.

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.5 Review window You can review an image by choosing an image in the Filing window and then choosing the Review button.

Number of the review image

Figure 15.5-1 Reviewing images y

Images can be reviewed if the selected images total size is not more than 1 GB, individual image size (except long time recordings) is not more than 1 GB and selected images are not more than 100 files.

y

The display of the number of the review image at the bottom right of the image might overlap the parameter display of the review image.

y

During an examination of a patient, you can review only images of that patient.

y

Some time may be required to start playback of Multi Images having a large number of frames or a large file size.

y

When playing back Multi Images having a large number of frames or a large file size, the operation of the equipment might slow down. If that happens, re-select the Multi Images in the Filing window, and then start playback again.

Q1E-EA1203

293

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.5.1 Filing function screen buttons ································································· When multi-image display is selected (1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

File Operations

# Speed

Filing

To Single

Prev Page

Next Page

Division

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(11)

(12)

(12)

File Operations

# Speed

Filing

To Multi

Select Start

Select End

Prev Page

Next Page

Division

(8)

(9)

(10)

Measurement

# Images

■

(5)

(6)

When single-image display is selected

Measurement

Slideshow

■

(13)

(6)

(7)

When the File Operations menu screen button is chosen (1) File Operations Delete

Trim

(14)

(15)

Figure 15.5-2 Filing screen buttons (1)

(Displaying a menu of file operations)

File Operations screen button

Press the File Operations screen button to display more screen buttons (Delete and Trimming). (See When the File Operations menu screen button is chosen in Figure 15.5-2.) (2)

Speed screen button , and then turning the Multi encoder

Pressing the Speed screen button changes the speed for reviewing an image. The speed changes as follows:

-1x⇔-1/2x⇔-1/4x⇔-1/8x⇔0x⇔1/8x⇔1/4x⇔1/2x⇔1x –

+

# Speed

Change the review speed.

Multi encoder knob

Figure 15.5-3 Changing the speed for reviewing images

294

Q1E-EA1203

Multi encoder

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(3)

Filing screen button Pressing the Filing screen button

(4)

returns you to the Filing window. (Selecting the type of display (single display))

To Single screen button

changes multi-image display to

Pressing the To Single screen button single-image display.

When you select multiple images and display them, you can display a selected image in a sigle window by using the yellow frame to select the image and then pressing the To Single screen button

.

After the multiple images have been selected and displayed, if Filing function box cursor (in single-image display mode)

is assigned to the trackball (indicated at the

bottom of the window), you can change the image that is displayed in single-image display mode by rolling the trackball right or left. (5)

(Changing the number of displayed images)

Images screen button

In multi-image display, you can press the Images screen button turn the Multi encoder (6)

Multi encoder

to change the number of displayed images. (Stopping review of a Multi Image)

Stop screen button Press the Stop screen button

(7)

and then

to stop review of a Multi Image. (Reviewing a Multi Image)

Play screen button

to start review of a Multi Image.

Press the Play screen button

When you stop reviewing a Multi Image in single-image display mode, if Image filing playback by frame

is assigned to the trackball (shown at the bottom of the

window), you can advance or rewind the image frame by frame by rolling the trackball right and left, pressing the ← and → keys on the optional alphanumeric keyboard, or turning the B Gain encoder y

B

.

The review speed of high-frame-rate Multi Image data might be affected by the capability of the CPU. In addition, the review speed of color image data consisting of 200 or more frames or black-and-white image data consisting of 600 or more frames might be affected.

y

When you stop reviewing a Multi Image in single-image display mode, a Multi Image is smooth when it is frozen but the image is rough when it is moving.

Q1E-EA1203

295

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(8)

(Changing the page to the previous page)

Previous Page screen button

In multi-image display, pressing the Previous Page screen button

returns to

the previous page. In single-image display, pressing the Previous Page screen button

returns to

the previous image. When the function assigned to the trackball, which is indicated at the bottom of the window, is Filing function box cursor

, you can also return to the previous page or

image by rolling the trackball right and left, or pressing the ← and → keys on the optional alphanumeric keyboard. (9)

Next Page screen button

(Changing the page to the next page)

In multi-image display, pressing the Next Page screen button

goes to the

next page. In single-image display, pressing the Next Page screen button

goes to the

next image. When the function assigned to the trackball, which is indicated at the bottom of the window, is Filing function box cursor

, you can also go to the next page or image by

rolling the trackball right and left, or pressing the ← and → keys on the optional alphanumeric keyboard. (10) Division screen button When a Multi Image is selected, pressing the Division screen button

divides

a Multi Image into Single Images. A maximum of 16 images can be displayed at the same time. (11) To Multi screen button

(Selecting the type of display (multiple display))

Pressing the To Multi screen button

changes single-image display to

multi-image display. (12) Select Start screen button

and Select End screen button

When you load a Multi Image, you can extract only the frames you want to review. Display the Multi image on a single screen, and search for the necessary section while changing frames by using the trackball. Press the Select Start screen button Press the Select End screen button Use the Play screen button Use the Trimming screen button separate file.

296

Q1E-EA1203

on the first of the necessary frames. on the last of the necessary frames. to repeat review of the specified frames only. to save only the specified frames as a

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

Live image frames 1

2

Start frame

3

4

5

6

7

3

7

Select Start

Select End

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

End frame

Repeat

Figure 15.5-4 Specifying the start and end frames y

Either the start frame or the end frame can be specified first.

y

The start frame cannot be set for review after the end frame. (The first image and the last image of the entire file are not regarded as continuous images.)

y

A single image cannot be specified as both the start and end images.

(13) Slide Show screen button In single-image display mode, you can change the image that is displayed at regular intervals. For details about how to change the interval, see 15.2.5 Specifying the retrieval interval. (14) Delete screen button See 15.4.3 Using files. (15) Trimming screen button Specific frames of a Multi Image can be extracted and then saved as a separate file. When the start frame and end frame have been specified by using the Select Start and Select End screen buttons

(for filing-related operations), the

Trimming screen button is enabled. Pressing the Trimming screen button

opens the Trimming window from

where you can transfer the specified frames of the selected Multi Image to other drives. The trimming function can be used for images in AVI image format, AVI (Compression) [MicrosoftVideo 1 Compression] format, or AVIm image format.

Q1E-EA1203

297

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.5.2 Functions in the review bar area····························································· When a Multi Image is displayed in single-image display mode, the number of the displayed frame is displayed.

15.5.3 Performing measurements on review images ········································ Various measurements can be performed in single-image display mode. When starting a measurement that uses heart rate, the heart rate value might be loaded automatically. If this heart rate value is different from the heart rate value shown on the review image, enter the heart rate value once again. You can review Dual Doppler mode images.

(1)

Performing measurements Although it is generally possible to start measurements at the same time as performing normal examinations, the settings described below might be required depending upon the condition of the review image. If the MEAS. MENU key

MEAS. MENU

does not illuminate and measurement does not start,

perform the following settings: ƒ

Registering the modes of review images Resister display mode after the Mode adjust menu are displayed by choosing the Tool on the tab menu. For details about how to register display mode, see 15.5.4 Registering the modes of review images.

ƒ

Adjusting the incident angle (for Doppler mode only) Adjust the incident angle. For details about how to adjust the incident angle, see (3) Adjusting the incident angle (for Doppler mode only) in 15.5.3 Performing measurements on review images.

ƒ

Adjusting the 0 m/s line (for Doppler mode only) For details, see (2) Adjusting the 0 m/s line (for Doppler mode only) in 15.5.3 Performing measurements on review images.

298

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

Some review images are not suitable for measurement. Do not perform measurements on review images in the following case: y

A marker indicating the sweep speed of an M-mode or D-mode image could be deleted depending on the display status of the measurement result. Before reviewing and performing measurements on an M-mode or D-mode image that contains a measurement result, make sure that the marker indicating the sweep speed will not be deleted. If the marker will be deleted, do not perform measurements on the image.

y

These settings are used only for measurements on review images. Although it might be possible to record review images in some cases, these settings are not recorded. Also, depending on conditions, the following settings might be required and the following functions might not be able to be performed. x

Registering a mode for review images (Mode adjust function) In the cases listed below, the menu shown in Figure 15.5-8 appears. The registration of a mode for the review image might be required. For details on the registration method, see 15.5.4 Registering the modes of review images. x Reviewing an image recorded in other ultrasound diagnostic scanner x Reviewing an image recorded in an application that has been deleted x Reviewing a still image recorded from a review imange x Reviewing an image for which one or more operations for changing parameters have been performed x Reviewing an image trimmed in AVIm format x Reviewing an image in MPEG2 when optional Digital Video Archiving Software is not installed

x

For measurements that cannot be performed on review images, or if they can be performed, available functions are limited, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Measurement.

y

It is not possible to enter or modify DGA for a review image.

y

It is not possible to enter or modify height, weight, or BSA for a review image.

y

It is not possible to do TIC, %WT, CTT, and LA Tracking on trimmed realtime AVIm File.

Q1E-EA1203

299

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(2)

Adjusting the 0 m/s line (for Doppler mode only) <When B/PW or B/CW display mode is selected> If the Doppler base line (0 m/s line) could not be read correctly, use the BASELINE toggle switch

BASELINE

to slide the displayed 0 m/s line over the 0 m/s line of the Doppler

waveforms in the review image. Doppler image

Baseline in the review image

Move the baseline over the baseline in the review image Baseline displayed separately from the one in the review image

Figure 15.5-5 Entering the 0 m/s line <When B/PW/PW, B/PW/TDI, or B/TDI/TDI mode display mode is selected> (in Dual Doppler mode) In Dual Doppler mode, since two different Doppler baselines exist, perform the procedure for B/PW or B/CW display mode twice, as follows: [1] Use the BASELINE toggle switch

BASELINE

to adjust the baseline on the D1 side.

[2] When the D1-side adjusting is complete, press the ENTER key

ENTER

.

[3] Adjust the D2-side baseline. [4] When adjusting of the D2-side baseline is complete, press the ENTER key

ENTER

.

When you perform this procedure, you must adjust the baseline for both the D1 and D2 sides. The UNDO key

300

Q1E-EA1203

UNDO

cannot be used to undo the preceding step.

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(3)

Adjusting the incident angle (for Doppler mode only) For Doppler-image measurements, if the incident angle of the review image is not adjusted or information data has not been written, the measurement function cannot be started. When adjusting of the incident angle is required, perform the following procedure. <When B/PW or B/CW display mode is selected> [1] When you press or turn the central button of the Angle encoder

ODM

, a message

prompting you to move the plus mark (+) over the Doppler sample point appears in the window and a plus mark (+) is displayed on the B-mode image. Use the trackball to move the plus mark to the center of the Doppler sample, and then press the ENTER key

ENTER

. Doppler sample point

Plus mark (+)

Figure 15.5-6 Entering the 0 m/s line [2] Beam line setting bar A message prompting you to align the bar with the beam line direction appears in the window, and the bar for setting the beam line is displayed. Use the Angle encoder

ODM

to align the beam line setting bar with the Doppler

cursor orientation, and press the ENTER key

ENTER

.

A message prompting you to align the bar along the blood flow appears, after which the incident angle measurement bar is displayed. Use the Angle encoder

ODM

to

align the incident angle measurement bar with the blood flow direction. After adjusting an incident angle, if you want to adjust a new angle, press the Angle encoder

ODM

to set the incident angle to 0 degrees. Because this operation resets the

incident angle adjusting, you can perform the procedure from the step [1].

Q1E-EA1203

301

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

<When B/PW/PW, B/PW/TDI, or B/TDI/TDI display mode is selected> (for Dual Doppler mode) In Dual Doppler mode, since there are two Doppler sample points, perform step [1] to [2] for the B/PW or B/CW display mode twice in succession. The flow is as follows. [1] Use the Angle encoder

ODM

and the trackball to adjust the incident angle on the D1

side. [2] When adjusting of the incident angle on the D1 side is complete, press the ENTER key

ENTER

.

[3] Adjust the D2-side incident angle. [4] When adjusting of the incident angle on the D2 side is complete, press the ENTER key

ENTER

.

When you perform this procedure, you must adjust the incident angle on both the D1 and D2 sides. In Dual Doppler mode, if you want to adjust a new incident angle after one has already been adjusted, perform steps [1] to [4] above again.

<When PW or CW display mode is selected> [1] Display of the incident angle When the Angle encoder

ODM

is turned, the value of incident angle for measurement

is displayed at the lower right of the window. Use the Angle encoder

ODM

to align the incident angle value of the review image

with the incident angle when captured.

Value of incident angle for measurement 0° D1 SD:85.0 SL:2.0mm WF:130 DG:45 4k/2.0M 65° Value of incident angle when captured

Figure 15.5-7 Displaying the incident angle

302

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

<When PW/PW, PW/TDI, or TDI/TDI display mode is selected> (in Dual Doppler mode) In Dual Doppler mode, since there are two Doppler sample points, perform step [1] for the PW or CW display mode twice in succession. The flow is as follows. [1] Use the Angle encoder

ODM

to align the incident angle on the D1 side with the

incident angle of the review image. [2] When adjusting of the incident angle on the D1 side is complete, press the ENTER key

ENTER

.

[3] Align the incident angle on the D2 side with the incident angle of the review image. [4] When adjusting of the D2-side incident angle is complete, press the ENTER key ENTER

.

When you perform this procedure, you must adjust the incident angle on both the D1 and D2 sides.

15.5.4 Registering the modes of review images ··············································· If the information data in the image is not recognized correctly when the measurement function is started, Mode Adjust menu appears automatically. Because the mode information for a read error is empty, specify an appropriate value. Mode Adjust Range L/U

(1)

Mode

B/PW/PW

(2)

Split

L/R

(3)

Split Rate

(4)

Sweep Speed

1.5

(5)

Meas. Region

Cardiac

(6)

PRF

3.5 kHz

Doppler-2 3.5 kHz

(7)

REF

2.0MHz

2.0MHz

(8)

Flow Invert

Positive

Positive

(9)

Doppler Unit

m/s

m/s

(10)

Annotation Region

Cardiac

(11)

Adjust 155.00

mm

Range R/D s

(11)

Adjust mm

(12)

Please do not Measure the image where the compared window is record. OK Cancel

Figure 15.5-8 Mode Adjust menu

Q1E-EA1203

303

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

The mode information you enter is used only for measurements on review images. Although it might be possible to record review images in some cases, this information is not recorded. Also, the mode information you enter will be cleared at the following times:

(1)

y

When the displayed image is changed

y

When the mode is changed from single-image display to multi-image display

Mode Select the same display mode as the review image. In the case of selecting the display mode again, information automatically input is usually wrong. Please reconfirm input information. Moreover, please adjust the position of baseline and the incident angle when you select PW, PW/PW, CW, B/PW, B/PW/PW, or B/CW mode. For details about how to adjust the position of baseline, see (2) Adjusting the 0 m/s line (for Doppler mode only) in 15.5.3 Performing measurements on review images. For details about how to adjust the incident angle, see (3) Adjusting the incident angle (for Doppler mode only) in 15.5.3 Performing measurements on review images. y

The 2D-3D, MPR-4, MPR-1, MSV-1, MSV-2, MSV-4, MSV-9, and MSV-16 modes can be used for images that are recorded in the optional Three-Dimensional Display Unit (Real-Time). For details, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL Three-Dimensional Display Unit (Real-Time).

y

Use the Wide View and Wide V./Cine functions for images recorded using optional software that displays wide viewing angle images. For details, see the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL Wide View Software.

(2)

Split Select the method for splitting the window. (This setting can be specified if B/M, B/M/M, B/PW, B/PW/PW, or B/CW mode is selected.)

(3)

Split Rate Select the split ratio. (This setting can be specified when the window is vertically split.)

304

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(4)

Sweep Speed Select the sweep speed. (This setting can be specified if M, M/M, PW, PW/PW, CW, B/M, B/M/M, B/PW, B/PW/PW, or B/CW mode is selected) Example: When the sweep speed is 1 s

0.5s

1s

Figure 15.5-9 Review image and its sweep speed (5)

Meas. Region Select the measurement region.

(6)

PRF Select the velocity range (PRF). (This setting can be selected if PW, PW/PW, CW, B/PW, B/PW/PW, or B/CW mode is selected.)

(7)

REF Select the reference frequency (REF). (This setting can be selected if PW, PW/PW, CW, B/PW, B/PW/PW, or B/CW mode is selected.)

(8)

Flow Invert Select either Positive or Negative for the Doppler polarity. (This setting can be selected if PW, PW/PW, CW, B/PW, B/PW/PW, or B/CW mode is selected.) The polarity direction (positive or negative) can be determined from the sign of the detected maximum velocity display value shown at the far right of the reviewed Doppler image. If the top is plus (+) and the bottom is minus (-), the Doppler polarity is in the positive direction. If the top is minus and the bottom is plus, the polarity is in the negative direction.

(9)

Doppler Unit Select the velocity unit of a Doppler image. (This setting can be selected if PW, PW/PW, CW, B/PW, B/PW/PW, or B/CW mode is selected.)

Q1E-EA1203

305

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

(10) Annotation Region Enter comments and annotations by using the same method used for examinations. For details, see Chapter 12 - Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks. Select the annotation region. (11) Range L/U and Range R/D If the Adjust button in the Range L/U or Range R/D area is disabled, use the following procedure to specify the display depth of the review image: [1] From the Mode Adjust menu, choose the Adjust button. The Display Depth window appears. [2] Move the cursor line to the first point and then press the ENTER key the same operation for the second point. Display Depth

Display Depth

¯

¯

Position of the first point

Position of the second point

Register

Figure 15.5-10 Setting the distance between two points

306

Q1E-EA1203

Register

ENTER

. Perform

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

[3] When the display depth has been set correctly, the index can be specified at the bottom of the Display Depth window. If the distance between two points is 100 mm, enter 100 as the index. Display Depth

100

¯

Register

Figure 15.5-11 Entering the distance between two points [4] When you choose the Register button, you are returned to the Mode Adjust menu. The display depth is displayed under the Adjust button in the window. When the Display Depth window is opened, it might not appear next to the scale. Move the window to the desired position. If measurement is performed for an image which is captured by a Multi Image, the Mode Adjust menu appears. To perform measurements on the image, specify a value. If the image is changed by advancing the frame, the Mode Adjust menu appears again and the value must be specified again.

(12) Doppler-2 This function is enabled only if Dual Doppler mode is selected (when the display mode is B/PW/PW or PW/PW).

Q1E-EA1203

307

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.5.5 Mode adjust function ·············································································· When measurements are performed for a review image, the wrong data might be read. Even when the read data is correct, you might manually modify the data and then use the modified data for measurement. You can use the mode adjust function for adjustment in these circumstances. Choose the Tool tab menu, and after using the trackball to move the pointer to the mode adjust function location, press the ENTER key

ENTER

.

A menu for registering the display mode appears. For the information data to be entered, see 15.5.4 Registering the modes of review images.

15.5.6 Entering comments on the review image················································ As with examinations, comments can be entered in a review image. For details, see Chapter 12 Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks.

15.5.7 Reading measurement results automatically·········································· When an image is reviewed, the measurement results saved for the examination can be read automatically from the Measurement Filing destination. When the measurement operation of the report and the measurement execution, etc. is done first, an automatic reading is done. However, images saved in DICOM image format do not support this function. Moreover, when it has been selected two or more destination, this function cannot be used. (1)

Reading reports automatically If you press the REPORT key

REPORT

while reviewing an image, the measurement results

saved for the examination can be read. (2)

Adding measurement results If the measurement function is started for the review image, the image measurements are taken from the point at which the measurement result is saved. When the measurements are complete, pressing the REPORT key

REPORT

adds the new measurement items to the

measurement result for the examination that was read automatically. Choose the Save button in the Measurement Report window to save this measurement result.

308

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

1 When the automatic reading function is used, there is the case that it fails in reading measurement results automatically, if the setting of the measurement is different between the equipment of saving and the equipment of reading. Please make the setting of the measurement same between the equipment of saving and the equipment of reading. 2 If performing automatic reading, it is necessary to use the same ID as that for measurement. If newly registering measurement by using the measurement input/output function, check that the ID matches that for measurement. For details about how to check the ID, see the chapter Measurement Setup in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Measurement. 3 When desitination of measurement is selected to DVD-RAM and HardDisk,

the

result is read from DVD-RAM.

15.5.8 Other functions ······················································································· (1)

Function for rewriting review images When you enter the measurement result or comments in a review image and transfer the image to a DVD, record the image as Single Images in single-image display mode before performing the transfer. The image is transferred to the preset address. For how to set the address, see 15.2 Settings in the Set Up Filing window. To temporarily change the transfer destination, choose the Tool tab menu and then Filing. (For details, see (4)Temporarily changing settings in 15.3 Saving examination data.)

(2)

Continuously reviewing multiple Multi Images simultaneously When multiple Multi Images are reviewed, double-click the same image to select all the images (when this function is used, all the images are displayed enclosed in a blue frame). After this operation, press the Review screen button (Filing)

to review

multiple Multi Images simultaneously. y

While reviewing an image, you can not change patient information.

y

Depending on conditions, reviewing Multi Images which are saved to external media might slow down. If this happens, transfer the Multi Images to a merge folder before reviewing them.

Q1E-EA1203

309

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.6 Editing image data 15.6.1 Merge folder ··························································································· In the Filing window, the merge folder is one of the choices in the location list and a destination for file transfer when the Convert button is used to convert the image format. The merge folder is used to temporarily save image data that will be edited.

15.6.2 Saving data····························································································· To save data in the merge folder, select an image in the Filing window and then choose the Copy button or Convert button. In the displayed Copy window or File Convert window, in the Transferred to box, specify the merge folder.

15.6.3 Deleting data··························································································· Select an image in the Filing window and then choose the Delete button.

15.6.4 Example of editing ·················································································· To save images of a single patient captured in the past and saved on multiple DVD-RAM or DVD-R disks together with the images captured this month and saved to the hard disk onto a single DVD-RAM for the patient, use the merge folder. You can use the merge folder to temporarily save all the applicable images and then save all the saved data onto a single DVD-RAM. Media 1

Hard disk

・ ・ ・ Media n

Media for a patient

Merge folder Figure 15.6-1 Example of editing

15.6.5 Display after operation completed ·························································· If you choose the Close button of Filing window when any images remain in the merge folder, the following message appears. Confirmation Do you want to delete all images in merge folder ? Yes

No

Figure 15.6-2 Message asking whether the image files should be deleted Choose the No button to leave the data in the merge folder. Choose the Yes button to delete the data.

310

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

15.7 Collectively transferring images 15.7.1 Setting ···································································································· Images can be transferred collectively for each patient. In the tab menu area, choose Setup and then Filing to open the Set Up Filing window. In the tree menu for specifying settings, select Details. Select the Every patient radio button in the Timing of Transfer section.

15.7.2 Transfer ·································································································· During an examination, pressing the REC1 to REC5 keys to which the function for recording Single Images or Multi Images is assigned, temporarily saves the image to the hard disk. If you select the Every patient radio button when the destination for transferring the Single Image is set to the hard disk, the image is saved to the hard disk. When an image has been temporarily saved to the hard disk, the

mark appears at the System

information display area. When the Every patient radio button is selected, during review, pressing the REC1 to REC5 keys to which the function for recording Single Images is assigned temporarily saves the image to the hard disk. This occurs only if the destination for transferring a Single Image is not the hard disk. If any of the following operations is performed, images temporarily saved to the hard disk are transferred: z

The End Exam key

End Exam

is pressed. (You cannot press the End Exam key

End Exam

while

reviewing images.) z

The Patient key

is pressed. (The Property window is displayed while revewing

images, and images temporarily saved to the hard disk are not transferred.) z

The ultrasound diagnostic scanner is started.

15.8 Saving examination data to external media 15.8.1 Folder configuration················································································ The folder configuration of examination data to be saved to external media is as follows: z external-media-drive-name¥PDFiles¥P_patient-ID¥YYYYYMMDD¥exa mination-data All examination data is saved in the root folder (PDFiles). Examination data is distributed to folders created for each patient ID in the root folder, and then distributed additionally to folders created for each date. Examination data is distributed to patient ID folders or date folders based on the file name.

Q1E-EA1203

311

Chapter 15 - Filing Function

On a PC, do not change the names of files and folders containing examination data located on external media. If you do, the system will not be able to read the examination data.

15.9 Image compression ratio The table below provides guidelines for the compression ratio for each compression method. The values listed are only guidelines. The actual compression ratio depends on the specific file. Table 15.9-1 File compression ratio list Image format TIFF

JPEG

Image

Compression method PackBits

Baseline

Color

Remarks

Black-and-white

Compressed to

Compressed to

about 60 %

about 60 %

Compressed to

Compressed to

about 10 %

about 15 %

y

Lossless compression

y

Baseline is the standard JPEG compression method.

AVI

Microsoft

Compressed to

Compressed to

(Compression)

Video 1

about 25 %

about 20%

y

Lossy compression

y

Microsoft Video 1 is one of AVI compression methods

y

312

Q1E-EA1203

Lossy compression

Chapter 16 - Image Print Function

Chapter 16 - Image Print Function 16.1 Overview 16.1.1 Overview of the printing image function ················································· The image print function allows you to output images to a PC printer or DICOM printer. You can print an ultrasound image displayed during an examination or print saved Single Images after an examination. You can also print multiple images in a single film. When you print images, you can preview the images in a preview window before either printing the images or deleting unnecessary images. In addition, you can save printed images as image data. Images to be printed are temporarily saved to the internal hard disk. The images are actually printed on the specified printer when the layout for the film fills with images to be printed or an examination is complete.

16.1.2 Notes on using this function ··································································· z

Some printers might not be able to detect print errors such as no more paper. Make sure that the images are printed correctly.

z

If a message related to printing appears, see Appendix A Message list in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation.

z

If a printer-related error such as no more paper or ink occurs, see the documentation provided with your printer.

z

Some printers display a dialog box indicating the printing status in the ultrasound window. If this dialog box hinders viewing of the image, activate the on-screen keyboard, press the alt key, and then press the tab key. The ultrasound window is displayed in the foreground. For details about how to start the on-screen keyboard, see 2.2 On-screen keyboard. When the optional alphanumeric keyboard is installed, press the Tab key while holding down the Alt key of the alphanumeric keyboard. As with the on-screen keyboard, the ultrasound window is displayed in the foreground.

Q1E-EA1203

313

Chapter 16 - Image Print Function

z

To output data to a PC printer on the network, install the driver for the printer on the ultrasound diagnostic scanner so that the data can be printed directly. Even if you install the printer driver on the network server, the data cannot be printed by using the network server. y

When an optional network interface unit is not installed, it is impossible to print from network printer..

y

Rarely, an attempt to establish a LAN connection might fail. In this case, shut down the equipment and turn off the breaker. Then, after 30 seconds, restart the equipment.

z

If an error occurs when optional software starts, the error message might not appear in the foreground and the window of the ultrasound diagnostic scanner might be frozen. If this problem occurs, perform either of the following operations depending on optional software that you are using, and then close the error message by choosing the OK button in the error dialog box. y

Software for displaying

:

wide-viewing-angle images

To display the error message, start the on-screen keyboard and press the alt key. Then press the ent key. The ultrasound window is displayed in the foreground. For details about how to start the on-screen keyboard, see 2.2 On-screen keyboard. When the optional alphanumeric keyboard is installed, press the Alt key to display the error message. Then press the Enter key. As with the on-screen keyboard, the ultrasound window is displayed in the foreground.

y

Stress Echo Software

:

Choose the Exit button.

16.2 Preparing a PC printer Connect the PC printer to the system, and install the printer driver in the system. For details about the Recommended PC Printer, see the chapter Precaution in Combination with Peripheral Devices in the separate INSTRUCTION MANUAL HI VISION Avius Preparation. For any questions about installing a printer driver, contact our service support.

314

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 16 - Image Print Function

16.3 Printer settings 16.3.1 PC printer ······························································································· In the tab menu area, choose Setup and then Filing. When the Set Up Filing window appears, choose Print, and then choose PC Printer in the tree menu on the left to specify the printer settings.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Figure 16.3-1 Set Up Filing window (displayed by choosing Print and then PC Printer) Table 16.3-1 Set Up Filing window (displayed by choosing Print and then PC Printer) No

Item

(1) Select Printer

Description Select the printer to be used to output data. You can select a connected printer from the pull-down menu.

(2) Film Size

Select the size of the film.

(3) Orientation

Select the print orientation. The print orientation is determined by the print layout.

(4) Number of Copies

Specify the number of copies to be printed.

(5) Paper Source

Select the paper feed method.

(6) Properties button

Use this button to specify the detailed settings for the printer. Choosing this button opens the appropriate window for setting up the connected printer you selected.

Q1E-EA1203

315

Chapter 16 - Image Print Function

No

Item

(7) Image Display Format

Description Specify the print layout. Image Display Format

Orientation

1x1

Landscape

1x2

Portrait

2x2

Landscape

2x3

Portrait

3x3

Landscape

16.3.2 Printing images ······················································································· In the tab menu area, choose Setup and then Filing. When the Set Up Filing window appears, choose Print, and then choose Image Print in the tree menu on the left to specify the settings for printing images.

(1)

(2) (3)

Figure 16.3-2 Set Up Filing window (displayed by choosing Print and then Image Print)

316

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 16 - Image Print Function

Table 16.3-2 Set Up Filing window (displayed by choosing Print and then Image Print) No

Item

Description

(1) Select Image Print

Select the PC Printer or DICOM Printer radio button.

(2) Print images by film

If this check box is selected, the output setting is by film, and output occurs when the film layout has filled with images to be printed or the examination has terminated. If this check box is cleared, the output setting is by patient, and output occurs only when the examination has terminated.

(3) when printing, open a print

If this checkbox is selected, the Print Preview window appears before any images are actually printed.

preview

For details about the Print Preview window, see 16.5 Print preview.

16.3.3 Other setting items ················································································· To print an ultrasound image displayed during an examination, you must assign the image print function to the REC1 to REC5 keys in advance. For details about the REC Key/Foot SW window, see 13.2.6 REC Key/Foot SW. In this window, if you select the Concurrently save image checkbox, the printed image is also saved as an image.

16.4 Printing images 16.4.1 Printing using the REC key ···································································· (1)

Printing 1

Display the frozen image you want to print. You can either display the image you want to print and then press the FREEZE key FREEZE

, or press the FREEZE key

FREEZE

first, start cine review, and then select the

image during cine review. 2

Press the REC1 to REC5 keys assigned as the Image Printer function. Images to be printed are temporarily saved on the hard disk.

3

Perform steps 1 and 2 as many times as there are images to be printed on a sheet of paper. The number of images that can be printed on a sheet of paper is determined by the printing layout setting.

4

When the number of images temporarily saved before printing reaches the specified number, the images are printed automatically.

Q1E-EA1203

317

Chapter 16 - Image Print Function

(2)

Status of images to be printed The status of images to be printed is displayed as the print status icon in the system status display area at the bottom of the screen. You can use the print status icon to check the image display format, number of films, and status of the images to be printed. PC printer

Number of films waiting to be printed

Status of images to be printed

Image display format (in this example, 2 x 2)

Figure 16.4-1 Print status icon (3)

Printing images by patient The images for a patient can be printed after the patient's examination. The images for a patient are collectively printed when either of the following operations is performed: ƒ

The End Exam key

End Exam

is pressed. (The End Exam key

End Exam

cannot be pressed

while images are being reviewed.) ƒ (4)

The Patient key

is pressed.

Force output If either of the operations below is performed, a message asking whether all of the images are to be printed appears. If you want to print all of the images, choose the Yes button. If you do not want to print all of the images, choose the No button. ƒ

The OK button is chosen in the Set Up Filing window.

ƒ

The ultrasound diagnostic scanner is started.

16.4.2 Printing images by using the Filing window ············································ To print images by using the Filing window: 1

In the Filing window, select the images to be printed.

2

Choose the Print button. Images in AVI, MPEG2, or DICOM image formats cannot be printed. If images in these formats are selected, the following message indicating printing restrictions is displayed. To continue the output operation to the printer, choose the OK button. To cancel the output operation, choose the Cancel button. If you choose the OK button, AVI, MPEG2, and DICOM image formats are not printed.

318

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 16 - Image Print Function

16.5 Print preview To display the Print Preview window before images are actually printed, select the when printing, open a print preview check box. For details about the print settings, see 16.3.2 Printing images. In the Print Preview window, you can delete temporarily saved images, change the order of images, and change the printing layout. (1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

Figure 16.5-1 Print Preview window Table 16.5-1 Print Preview window No

Item

Description

(1)

Film Size

Select the desired film size.

(2)

Image Display Format

Select the desired image display format.

(3)

Orientation

Select the desired orientation.

(4)

Thumbnail view

Images temporarily saved on a printer are displayed as thumbnails. To enlarge images, press the UNDO key

UNDO

on the thumbnail.

Q1E-EA1203

319

Chapter 16 - Image Print Function

No (5)

Item Print preview

Description The specified images are displayed within the print preview frame. The page number is displayed in the format current-page/ total-number-of-pages in the lower right corner of the frame.

In the Print Preview window, images are arranged in the order they were recorded.

(6)

Move up and Move down

Use the Move up button on the selected image to print it earlier than

buttons

the previous image. Use the Move down button on the selected image to print it later than the following image.

(7)

Delete button

Use this button to delete the image you selected.

(8)

Delete all button

Use this button to delete all images.

(9)

Print button

Use this button to start printing.

(10) Close button

Use this button to close the Print Preview window and return to the previous window.

320

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 17 - Optional DVD Video Recorder

Chapter 17 - Optional DVD Video Recorder 17.1 Remotely controlling DVD video recorder Images can be recorded to a DVD video recorder (DVO-1000MD) connected to the system by using keys on the keyboard panel (a remote control cable must be connected). In addition, screen buttons can be used to perform such operations such as stop, freeze, review, fast forward, and fast rewind. If a remote control cable is not connected, these operations can be performed on the recorder itself, but the recorder cannot be remotely controlled from the ultrasound diagnostic scanner. To record images, you need an optional peripheral device interface unit. To review images, you need an optional peripheral device interface unit and an analog capture card unit.

17.2 Recording images to DVD video recorder When the DVD REC function is assigned to one of the REC1 to REC5 keys, and that key is pressed, the recorder starts recording. For details about REC key assignments, see 13.2.6 REC Key/Foot SW. When recording starts normally, a counter for the recorder appears. Counter

Figure 17.2-1 Counter y

After recording, you must check whether the counter has been updated.

y

If the DVD has no free space or 49 titles have already been recorded, you cannot record images on that DVD. In this case, delete unnecessary titles or replace the current DVD with a new one.

y

If you are controlling a DVD recorder remotely from the ultrasound diagnostic scanner, do not perform operations directly on the recorder while an image is being recorded or recording is paused (when the counter is displayed at the upper right of the window). If you do, the transfer title function may not be performed for the data being recorded. If you want to perform operations directly on the recorder, such as ejecting a DVD, you must first press the End Exam key

y

End Exam

to stop recording.

If the free space on a DVD+RW runs out during recording, recording automatically stops and the DVD is ejected. In this case, the transfer title function is not performed. Check the free space on your DVD before you start recording.

Q1E-EA1203

321

Chapter 17 - Optional DVD Video Recorder

If Transfer Title is specified for the remotely controlled DVD recorder, recording automatically ends when you press the End Exam key

End Exam

or Patient key

.

(Transfer Title is specified as the factory setting.) If you want to restart recording, press the Start Exam button in the Patient Information window and press REC key. When recording starts, the counter is updated. If recording does not start, the information data and counter disappear in a few seconds. When a dialog box is displayed, the information data and counter might not be visible. In this case, check the status from the LED indications on keys. When the dialog box is closed, the information data and counter become visible.

Pressing any of the REC1 to REC5 keys pauses recording. Each time a REC key is pressed, the recording pauses or restarts. You must use one of the REC1 to REC5 keys on the keyboard panel to record images. If a remote control cable is not connected, record images by using the functions of the video recorder. Only the basic area can be recorded. Because the image displayed in the Patient Information window is larger than the image displayed in the basic area, some information might be lost during recording.

322

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 17 - Optional DVD Video Recorder

17.3 Switching to the DVD video recorder's playback mode When normal mode is selected, choosing Tool in the tab menu area and then choosing Video Playback switches the mode to the DVD video recorder's playback mode (video playback mode hereafter). When video playback mode is selected, choosing Tool in the tab menu area and then choosing Video Playback switches the mode to normal mode. If a remote control cable is connected, a DVD video recorder can be operated separately. Images are played back in the center of the window as NTSC 640 x 480 video, or PAL 800*600 video.

Q1E-EA1203

323

Chapter 17 - Optional DVD Video Recorder

17.4 Using a DVD video recorder's video playback mode If video playback mode is selected when a DVD video recorder is connected, the following screen buttons appear. (1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

■

Menu

TitleList

(6)

(7)

# Sound Volume

(8)

(9)

(10)

Figure 17.4-1 Function menu for video playback mode (1)

Stop

If you press this button while an image is being played back, playback stops and no image is displayed.

(2)

Rewind

If you press this button while an image is being played back, the image is played back in reverse. If this button is pressed when playback has stopped, you can return to the beginning of the disc.

(3)

Review

If you press this button when playback has stopped, playback starts and the image is displayed.

(4)

Fast Forward

If you press this button while the image is being played back, the image is played back at fast forward speed.

(5)

Pause

If you press this button while an image is being played back, playback stops, but the image continues to be displayed. If you press this button while playback is paused, playback resumes.

(6)

Menu

Use this button to specify DVD video recorder settings, format, DVD + RW finalization, etc. (For details, see 17.4.1 Menu functions.)

(7)

Title List

Use this button to display the titles of recorded images, and play back the image of the selected title. (For details, see 17.4.2 Title list functions.)

(8)

Reverse Skip

If you press this button while an image is being played back or while playback is paused, the previous title is displayed.

(9)

Skip

If you press this button while an image is being played back or while playback is paused, the next title is displayed.

(10)

Sound Volume

If you turn the Multi encoder speaker.

324

Q1E-EA1203

Multi encoder

, you can adjust the volume of the

Chapter 17 - Optional DVD Video Recorder

17.4.1 Menu functions ······················································································· If the Menu screen button

is pressed while playback on DVD has stopped, a menu

window for the DVD video recorder appears. Don't use menus other than from (1) to (4).

You can use arrow keys (↑, ↓, ←, and →) and the Enter key on an optional alphanumeric keyboard. If no alphanumeric keyboard is connected, use the on-screen keyboard or the DVD video recorder keys.

(1)

Time settings 1.

Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to choose SETUP MENU, and then press the right arrow key (→).

2.

Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to choose DATE/TIME PRESET, and then press the right arrow key (→).

3.

Use the right and left arrow keys (← and →) to choose the items to be changed (date and time), and then adjust them by using the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓).

4.

When all adjustments have been made, press the Enter key to close the menu window.

(2)

Recording mode 1.

Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to choose SETUP MENU, and then press the right arrow key (→).

2.

Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to choose REC MODE, and then press the right arrow key (→).

3.

Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to choose the recording mode, and press the Enter key to complete the setting and close the menu window.

Table 17.4-1 Recording mode and recording time guidelines Recording mode

Recording time (4.7 GB per side)

HQ (High quality)

1 hour

SP (Standard)

2 hours

LP (Long-time recording)

3 hours

A maximum of 49 titles can be recorded on one disc.

Q1E-EA1203

325

Chapter 17 - Optional DVD Video Recorder

Table 17.4-2 Recommended disc DVD+RW manufactured by Sony

(3)

4.7 GB per side (4X speed)

Formating DVD + RW discs If an un-formatted disc is inserted into a DVD video recorder, it is automatically formatted. To use a disc formatted on another DVD video recorder, you must reformat the disc on this system's DVD video recorder before using the disc. Formatting a disc deletes all data saved on the disc. To reformat a DVD + RW disc: 1.

Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to choose DISC. INFO, and then press the right arrow key (→).

2.

Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to choose FORMAT, and then press the right arrow key (→).

3.

Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to choose EXEC, and then press the Enter key.

4.

When the "READY?" message appears, press the Enter key.

5.

The "FORMATTING THE DISC. PLEASE WAIT." message appears and disc formatting starts. When formating has been completed, the "COMPLETE!" message appears and the menu window closes. Disc formatting cannot be undone. Make sure that all of the data on the disc can be safely deleted before you start formatting the disc.

(4)

Finalizing DVD + RW discs DVD + RW discs on which images are recorded can be played back on a DVD player that supports DVD + RW if the disc has been finalized. A disc is automatically finalized when it is ejected. To finalize a DVD + RW disc: 1.

Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to choose DISC. INFO, and then press the right arrow key (→).

2.

Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to choose FINALIZE, and then press the right arrow key (→).

3.

Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to choose EXEC, and press the Enter key.

4.

326

When the "READY?" message appears, press the Enter key.

Q1E-EA1203

Chapter 17 - Optional DVD Video Recorder

5.

The "FINALIZING THE DISC. PLEASE WAIT." message appears, and finalization of the disc starts. When the disc has been finalized, the "COMPLETE!" message appears and the menu window closes. You can record images on the DVD + RW disc once it has been finalized.

17.4.2 Title list functions ···················································································· If the Title List screen button

is pressed when the DVD video recorder has stopped

or an image is being played back, the title list window of the DVD video recorder can be displayed or the displayed window can be closed. To use the title list function: 1.

Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to choose a title to review, and then press the right arrow key (→).

2.

Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to choose PLAY, and then press the right arrow key (→).

3.

Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to choose the chapter you want to play back, and then press the ENTER key.

4.

The chapter you selected is played back.

Q1E-EA1203

327

Chapter 17 - Optional DVD Video Recorder

y

A patient ID can be automatically registered as a title. For details, see (3) DVD in 13.2.7 Recorder.

y

Discs recorded on a DVD video recorder cannot be used in the DVD drive of the ultrasound diagnostic scanner.

y

If you enter a new patient ID to change the existing ID while the image is being recorded, recording is stopped to update the title, and then restarted automatically. Some delay is likely.

y

To change the title, you must enter a new patient ID.

y

If a character other than an alphanumeric character (A to Z, a to z, and 0 to 9) is used in a patient ID, the title list is not displayed properly.

y

The "Recovering…" message might appear in the front panel of the DVD video recorder when it is turned on. This is not a failure.

y

When playback is paused, body marks and physiological signal waveforms might not be displayed continuously. This is not a failure, however.

y

When you pause playback of a DVD image by using the remote control function from the keyboard panel of the ultrasound diagnostic scanner, there is a delay in response until the image is frozen. End Exam

cannot be used.

y

During video playback, the End Exam key

y

If you play back an image by operating the DVD video recorder, there is a delay in displaying screen buttons and in the on-off state of keyboard panel indicators.

17.5 Measurement of played back images Measurement cannot be performed in DVD playback mode.

328

Q1E-EA1203

INDEX

INDEX ３

Ｂ

360° radial display ................................................ 131

B item tabbed page...................................................220

360° Radial Display Mode.................................... 131

B Mode.......................................................................25 B page.......................................................................244

Ａ

Base area ......................................................................4

About cine memory.................................................. 113

Baseline ......................................................................73

Adjusting filters ....................................................... 126

Basic features of TDI mode...................................... 111

Adjusting the baseline................................................ 98

Basic operations .......................................................253

Adjusting the gain .................................... 26, 57, 71, 96

Biopsy Guide............................................................206

Adjusting the incident angle....................................... 96

Blend function ..........................................................112

Adjusting the position (height) of the displayed

Body Mark ...............................................................208

waveform ............................................................. 124 Adjusting the sensitivity (brightness) of an entire image...................................................................... 26 Adjusting the sensitivity (brightness) of an image for a

Body Mark item tabbed pages..................................241 Burning a data disc...................................................289

Ｃ

specific depth (all modes) ...................................... 27

CFI-mode images .......................................................69

Adjusting the waveform amplitude .......................... 125

CFM filter...................................................................77

Advancing and rewinding frame by frame............... 117

CFM item tabbed pages............................................228

Annotation................................................................ 206

CFM Mode .................................................................69

Application............................................................... 179

Changing display depth ..............................................31

Application Data Setting window ............................ 214

Changing sample width ............................................100

Application Export / Import window ....................... 249

Changing the cine memory split ratio ......................114

Application Function................................................ 211

Changing the display depth ........................................58

Applying the ALARA principle in B mode................ 50

Changing the display for M-mode images .................57

Applying the ALARA principle in CFM mode .......... 89

Changing the display width of B-mode images (360°

Applying the ALARA principle in CFM mode when

/180°) .................................................................132

used together with the M and PW modes............... 90

Changing the focus position .................................58, 71

Applying the ALARA principle in CW mode .......... 110

Changing the focus position (for all modes) ..............27

Applying the ALARA principle in M mode............... 68

Changing the reference frequency........................72, 98

Applying the ALARA principle in PW mode .......... 109

Changing the sweep speed .................................58, 125

Attaching the ECG lead cable to the body ............... 122

Changing the time display range for M mode and

Auto Freeze.............................................................. 203

Doppler mode.......................................................116

Automatic adjustments............................................. 100

Changing the transmission frequency ........................28

Automatic gain adjustment function .......................... 35

Cine Memory ...........................................................168

Automatically adjusting the ECG gain..................... 126

Cine Memory Function ............................................113 Q1E-EA1203

329

INDEX

Cine memory playback bar...........................................4

Displaying the label UP in body marks ................... 157

Closing the Comparison window ...............................10

Doppler cursor in TDI-PW submode........................112

Collectively transferring images...............................311

Doppler Mode............................................................ 91

Color Map ................................................................205

Dual display for B-mode images ............................... 35

Common...................................................................254

Dynamic Tissue Harmonic Imaging (dTHI) function ..... 29

Comp. Window (Left, Right) ...................................203 Comparison window ....................................................6

Ｅ

Configuration of the Examination window ..................1

Edit Patient .............................................................. 162

Configuration of the Examination Window..................1

Edit PSS window..................................................... 243

Connecting cables ....................................................121

Editing an application...............................................211

Connecting cables to the main unit ..........................121

Editing image data ................................................... 310

Connecting probes......................................................95

Ending entry of comments....................................... 141

Continuous playback ................................................117

Entering annotations ................................................ 138

Continuous playback mode for normal images and

Entering arrows ....................................................... 138

playback mode for automatically detected heartbeats

Entering body marks................................................ 155

..............................................................................116

Entering comments and annotations........................ 135

Controlling the center of the ODM cursors in bi-directional ODM mode ......................................55

Ｄ D item tabbed pages .................................................223

Entering comments on the review image................. 308 Entering Comments, Annotations, and Body Marks 135 Entry Option ............................................................ 210 Examination information display area......................... 2 Example of editing .................................................. 310

Data Backup .............................................................209 Deleting comments...................................................141

Ｆ

Deleting data ............................................................310

Filing ............................................................... 168, 197

Display .....................................................................169

Filing Function ........................................................ 251

Display after operation completed............................310

Filing function screen buttons ................................. 294

Display page.............................................................246

Filing window.......................................................... 267

Displaying B-mode images ........................................25

Fine Flow-mode images and CFA-mode images....... 69

Displaying body marks.............................................155

Folder configuration .................................................311

Displaying CFM-mode images ..................................69

Functions assigned to the trackball............................ 13

Displaying CW-mode images.....................................94

Functions in the review bar area.............................. 298

Displaying image numbers.......................................119 Displaying M-mode images .......................................51

Ｇ

Displaying patient information.................................285

General item tabbed pages....................................... 215

Displaying physiological signal waveforms.............123 Displaying PW-mode images .....................................91

Ｈ

Displaying real-time ODM-mode images ..................53

HI Com function........................................................ 30

Displaying Single Element CW-mode images ...........95

HI zoom function....................................................... 33

Displaying single-directional/dual-directional

HI zoom function (when the angle of the CFM ROI is

ODM-mode images ................................................54

330

Q1E-EA1203

180 degrees or greater) .......................................... 75

INDEX

HI zoom function (when the angle of the CFM ROI is

Number of recorded images .....................................113

less than 180 degrees) ............................................ 74 How to Operate the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner.. 11

Ｉ

Ｏ Oblique B-mode image function (for linear probes only) .......................................................................30

If the cine memory has not been divided ................. 114

Oblique function (for linear probes only).............73, 99

Image adjustment screen buttons ........... 43, 64, 82, 105

On-screen keyboard....................................................12

Image compression ratio .......................................... 312

Opening the Comparison window ................................9

Image Print Function................................................ 313

Operating the screen buttons ......................................18

Images displayed in the Comparison window.............. 7

Operation when freeze mode is deactivated ...............21 Operations in the Filing window ..............................267

Ｋ Keeping the ECG clip .............................................. 122

Optional Displaying omni-directional M (ODM)-mode images ....................................................................53 Optional DVD Video Recorder ................................321

Ｍ

Optional Physiological Signal Display Function......121

M item tabbed page.................................................. 222

Other adjustments.......................................................97

M Mode...................................................................... 51

Other functions.........................................................309

M page ..................................................................... 245

Other operations .......................................................112

Manipulating probe marks for a radial scan............. 157

Other setting items ...................................................317

Manual ..................................................................... 162

Outline of PSS function..............................................35

Measure.................................................................... 197

Overview ................................................6, 15, 251, 313

Measurement Filing ................................................. 263

Overview of omni-directional M (ODM) mode .........53

Measurement item tabbed pages .............................. 237

Overview of the filing function ................................251

Measurement of played back images ....................... 328

Overview of the printing image function .................313

Media ....................................................................... 163 Menu functions ........................................................ 325

Ｐ

Menu list .................................................................... 19

PAN Zoom function ...................................................32

Merge folder............................................................. 310

PC printer .................................................................315

Mode Adjust............................................................. 162

Performing measurements on review images...........298

Mode adjust function ............................................... 308

Physiology................................................................170

Mode-specific screen buttons................. 37, 59, 77, 101

Playing images .........................................................117

Moving and rotating probe marks ............................ 156

Position of the Comparison window display................7

Moving the CFM ROI................................................ 70

Preparing a PC printer ..............................................314 Preset Copy window.................................................247

Ｎ

Print preview ............................................................319

Needle Guide Line ................................................... 127

Printer settings..........................................................315

Notes on operations in Single Element CW mode ..... 95

Printing an image .....................................................285

Notes on using data .................................................. 251

Printing images.................................................316, 317

Notes on using the Filing function ........................... 252

Printing images by using the Filing window ............318

Notes on using this function..................................... 313

Printing using the REC key ......................................317 Q1E-EA1203

331

INDEX

PSS function.........................................................35, 59

Special operations in 360° radial display mode ... 132 Specifying the CFM ROI range................................. 70

Ｒ

Specifying the retrieval interval............................... 264

Reading measurement results automatically ............308

Starting M mode or PW mode in 360° display mode

REC Key/Foot SW ...................................................197

............................................................................. 133

Recorder ...................................................................200

Starting Single Element CW mode ............................ 95

Recording B- and M/Doppler-mode images in two

Switching to the DVD video recorder's playback mode

parts of the cine memory ......................................115

............................................................................. 323

Recording images.....................................................113

System ..................................................................... 172

Recording images in the cine memory .....................113

System information display area ................................. 1

Recording images to DVD video recorder ...............321 Recording Multi Image ............................................260

Ｔ

Recording Single Image ...........................................259

Tab menus............................................................ 5, 161

Recording two B-mode images in two parts of the cine

TDI item tabbed pages............................................. 235

memory ................................................................114

TDI Mode .................................................................111

Region Data Setting .................................................179

Title list functions.................................................... 327

Registering presets .....................................................36

Tool tab menu .......................................................... 162

Registering the modes of review images..................303

Toolbars for operating the Comparison window ......... 6

Remotely controlling DVD video recorder ..............321

Transfer.....................................................................311

Remove Hardware....................................................167

Transfer spool .......................................................... 292

Review window........................................................293

Types of annotations................................................ 142

Rotating and moving the ODM cursor .......................54

Types of screen buttons ............................................. 15

Rotating and reversing images .................................132

Ｕ Ｓ

Using a DVD video recorder's video playback mode

Saving data ...............................................................310

............................................................................. 324

Saving examination data ..........................................265

Using files................................................................ 280

Saving examination data to external media..............311

Using gain encoders to play images frame by frame 119

Screen Button ...........................................................204

Using screen buttons to change settings .......... 139, 158

Screen buttons ........................................................5, 15

Using tab menus ........................................................ 22

Selecting a connector for inputting the physiological

Using the Body mark key to display body marks .... 155

signal waveforms..................................................123

Using the cine memory to create ODM-mode images56

Selecting presets.........................................................36

Using the keyboard panel ...........................................11

Selecting TDI submode ............................................ 111

Using the keyboard to directly enter comments ...... 137

Selecting the body mark subject to operation during

Using the pointer ....................................................... 24

dual display in B mode.........................................157 Setting ......................................................................311

Ｖ

Settings in the Set Up Filing window.......................254

Velocity range (PRF) ........................................... 72, 99

Setup tab menu .........................................................171

Vertically reversing waveforms ............................... 125

Simplified Transfer...................................................167

Video/ORIG............................................................. 170

332

Q1E-EA1203

INDEX

Viewing data ............................................................ 274

Ｗ Wall filter ................................................................. 100

Ｚ Zoom function.......................................................... 134 Zoom functions .......................................................... 74

E Q1E-EA1203

333